JP2020028450A - Slot machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a slot machine for limiting an advantageous section even if a betting number is selected from plural betting numbers.SOLUTION: A slot machine is configured to be capable of executing a game even if three betting numbers are set or two betting numbers are set. A main control part adds one game to an advantageous section game number counter and updates the counter regardless of whether three betting numbers are set or two betting numbers are set when a section is specified as an advantageous section in putout ball control processing, determines whether a value of the advantageous section game number counter reaches a second prescribed number after updating the advantageous section game number counter, and completes the advantageous section when determining that the second prescribed number is reached, or when a first prescribed number is exceeded by updating a net increased token counter and then determining whether a value of a net increased token counter exceeds the first prescribed number after updating the net increased token counter.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 41

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined prize according to a display result of a variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each of which can be identified.

  This type of slot machine controls an advantageous section which can be controlled by an AT or the like in which an operation mode advantageous to a player is notified, and reaches the limit game number of 1500 games controlled in the advantageous section. Thus, there has been proposed a method in which information relating to control of the advantageous section such as the number of remaining games in the AT is initialized while the advantageous section is terminated (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-140305 A

  Some slot machines can play a game by selecting any one of a plurality of bets. However, in the slot machine described in Patent Literature 1, a period controlled in an advantageous section or an advantage is controlled. No consideration is given to a configuration in which the number of bets can be selected from a plurality of bets when limiting the value given in the section.

  It is an object of the present invention to provide a slot machine that limits the value provided in a period controlled in an advantageous section or in an advantageous section even when any bet number is selected from a plurality of bet numbers.

The slot machine of claim 1 is
A variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each of which can be identified,
In the slot machine capable of deriving a display result by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and generating a prize according to the display result,
Bet number setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of bet numbers including a first bet number or a second bet number by a player's selection;
Game execution means for enabling a game to be executed even when the first bet amount is set and when the second bet amount is set;
Advantageous section control means for controlling to an advantageous section that is advantageous to the player;
In the advantageous section, regardless of whether the first bet number is set or the second bet number is set, the advantageous section game number that is the game number since the advantageous section started is updated. Section game number updating means;
After the number of advantageous section games is updated, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached a specified number of games, and if it is determined that the number of advantageous sections has been reached, the first advantageous section is terminated. Section end means,
In the advantageous section, regardless of whether the first bet number is set or the second bet number is set, an advantageous section increase amount that is an increase amount of a game value since the start of the advantageous section. Updating means for updating the advantageous section,
After the advantageous section increment is updated, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section increment has exceeded a prescribed amount, and if it is determined that the advantageous section increment has exceeded the prescribed amount, a second advantageous section ending means for terminating the advantageous section is provided. ,
Advantageous state control means for controlling to an advantageous state advantageous to the player in the advantageous section;
Advantageous section notification means for performing an advantageous section notification indicating that it is controlled to the advantageous section,
Advantageous section signal output means for outputting a signal during the advantageous section indicating that it is controlled in the advantageous section to the outside,
Advantageous section related information initialization means for initializing the advantageous section related information related to the advantageous section when ending the advantageous section,
With
In the advantageous section notifying means, when ending the advantageous section, the advantageous section related information initializing means initializes the advantageous section related information, and the advantageous section signal output means terminates output of the advantageous section signal. After that, the advantageous section notification is ended.
According to this feature, in a configuration in which the game can be executed regardless of whether the first bet amount is set or the second bet amount is set by the player's selection, the first bet amount is set in the advantageous section. Is set or the second bet number is set, the number of advantageous section games is updated, and when the number of advantageous section games reaches the specified number, the advantageous section is terminated. Even when the first bet number is set or the second bet number is set, the advantageous section increment is updated, and the advantageous section is terminated when the advantageous section increment exceeds the specified amount. Even if one bet is selected or the second bet is selected, it is limited so that it is not controlled in the advantageous section for a long time, and the second bet is selected even if the first bet is selected. Even if it is Since the pressurized amount is limited so as not to become excessively large, it is possible to prevent the gambling is enhanced.
In addition, after the advantageous section related information is initialized and the output of the signal during the advantageous section ends, the advantageous section notification ends, so that the advantageous section notification ends without the advantageous section information being initialized. Can be prevented, and the advantageous section notification can be prevented from ending even though the signal during the advantageous section is output to the outside.

  It should be noted that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the example to which the present invention is applied. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine. It is a figure for explaining a medal selector. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a memory map of a ROM and a RAM of a main control unit. It is a figure showing the relation between a game field and a non-game field. It is a figure for explaining a game state. It is a figure for explaining an internal lottery target combination (setting value 1, 3 piece betting game). It is a figure for explaining an internal lottery target combination (setting value 1, 3 piece betting game). It is a figure for explaining an internal lottery target combination (setting value two and three betting game). It is a figure for explaining an internal lottery target combination (setting value two and three betting game). It is a figure for explaining an internal lottery target combination (setting value 3, three betting game). It is a figure for explaining an internal lottery target combination (setting value 3, three betting game). It is a figure for explaining an internal lottery object combination (setting value 4, 3 betting game). It is a figure for explaining an internal lottery object combination (setting value 4, 3 betting game). It is a figure for explaining an internal lottery object combination (setting value 5, three-piece betting game). It is a figure for explaining an internal lottery object combination (setting value 5, three-piece betting game). It is a figure for explaining an internal lottery object combination (setting value 6, 3 betting game). It is a figure for explaining an internal lottery object combination (setting value 6, 3 betting game). It is a figure for explaining an internal lottery object combination (set value 1-6, a two-sheet betting game). It is a figure for explaining an internal lottery object combination (set value 1-6, a two-sheet betting game). It is a figure for explaining a technical matter related to an internal lottery object combination. It is a figure for explaining a technical matter related to an internal lottery object combination. It is a figure for explaining a technical matter related to an internal lottery object combination. It is a figure for explaining a technical matter related to an internal lottery object combination. It is a figure for explaining composition of a game auxiliary display, navigation information, and an execution mode of a navigation effect. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the control contents of an initial setting process performed by a main control unit. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the control content of a main process performed by a main control unit. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the control content of a main process performed by a main control unit. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the control content of a main process performed by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the group information setting process (general combination) which a main control part performs. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing control contents of continuous data processing performed by a main control unit. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing control contents of continuous data processing performed by a main control unit. FIG. 5 is a diagram for describing a continuous data processing table It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the game start waiting process which a main control part performs. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the control contents of error processing performed by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the medal insertion signal processing which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the medal sensor process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the medal sensor check process which a main control part performs. It is a timing chart for explaining a state transition of a medal insertion signal in which it is determined that a medal passes normally in the medal insertion signal processing and the medal sensor check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the payout control process which a main control part performs. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing control contents of an operation information output process performed by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the data processing for combination ratio monitoring which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of each state count process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the accessory ratio update process which a main control part performs. It is a figure for explaining the update situation of a total buffer, a buffer for 6000 times calculation, and a buffer for outputting total cumulative calculation. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the continuous accessory ratio update process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the instruction-incorporated property ratio update process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of AT state management processing which a main control part performs. It is a figure for explaining a net number increase counter. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the control contents of a timer interrupt process performed by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the time monitoring update process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the sensor monitoring process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the sensor monitoring process which a main control part performs. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing control contents of a test signal output process performed by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer update process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the display monitor output data selection process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the display monitor output data selection process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the counter update process which a main control part performs. It is a figure for explaining an installation position of a game machine information display. It is a figure showing the example of a display of a game machine information display. It is a figure for explaining a display test pattern of a game machine information display. It is a figure for explaining a notice mode of a section display LED lighting notice. It is a timing chart for explaining execution timing of section display LED lighting informing.

  Embodiments for implementing a slot machine according to the present invention will be described below based on embodiments.

[Form 1]
The slot machine according to the embodiment 1-1 includes:
A variable display section (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (symbols) each of which can be identified;
A display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a slot machine (slot machine 1) capable of generating a prize according to the display result includes:
Bet amount setting means (main control unit 41) capable of setting any one of a plurality of bet numbers including a first bet amount (3) or a second bet amount (2) by a player's selection;
A game execution means (main control unit 41) for enabling a game to be executed when the first bet number (3) is set and the second bet number (2) is set;
Advantageous section control means (main control section 41) for controlling to an advantageous section which is advantageous to the player;
In the first processing (payout control processing) performed at the start of the game, when the advantageous section (the signal buffer during the advantageous section: 1) is set, the first bet number (3) is set or the second bet is set. An advantageous section game number updating means (main control section 41) for updating an advantageous section game number, which is the number of games since the start of the advantageous section, regardless of whether the number (2) is set;
After the number of advantageous section games is updated, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached a prescribed number of games (second prescribed number), and it is determined that the number of advantageous games has reached the prescribed number of games (second prescribed number). Advantageous section end means (main control section 41) for terminating the advantageous section in the case of
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, in a configuration in which the game can be executed regardless of whether the first bet amount is set or the second bet amount is set by the player's selection, the first bet amount is set in the advantageous section. Is set or the second bet number is set, the number of advantageous section games is updated, and the advantageous section ends when the number of advantageous section games reaches the prescribed number. Even if the second bet amount is selected or selected, it is limited so that it is not controlled in the advantageous section for a long period of time, so that it is possible to prevent gambling from increasing.

The slot machine according to aspect 1-2 is the slot machine according to aspect 1-1,
Advantageous section signal output means (main control section 41) for outputting an advantageous section signal indicating that the apparatus is in the advantageous section during the advantageous section;
Advantageous section determination means (main control section 41) for determining whether or not the vehicle is in the advantageous section;
With
The advantageous section determination means determines whether or not the vehicle is in the advantageous section based on whether or not the signal in the advantageous section is being output (whether or not the signal buffer in the advantageous section is 0).
According to this feature, since it is determined whether the vehicle is in the advantageous section or not during the output of the signal during the advantageous section, it is ensured that the process regarding the advantageous section is performed in the state where the signal during the advantageous section is output. can do.

The slot machine according to aspect 1-3 is the slot machine according to aspect 1-2,
Advantageous section information setting means (main control section 41) for setting advantageous section information (flag during advantageous section) when controlled to the advantageous section;
The advantageous section information setting means is configured to output the signal during the advantageous section when the signal during the advantageous section is not being output (the signal buffer during the advantageous section: 0) and the advantageous section is not within the advantageous section. It is determined whether a start condition (winning of an advantageous section shift) is satisfied or not. If it is determined that a start condition of the advantageous section (winning of an advantageous section shift) is satisfied, the advantageous section information is determined. (Advantaged section flag)
The advantageous section information output means sets the advantageous section information (advantage section flag) after a timing at which the advantageous section information (advantage section flag) is set by the advantageous section information setting means in one game. It is characterized in that it is determined whether or not the advantageous section information (flag during advantageous section) is set, and the signal during the advantageous section is output.
According to this feature, when the signal during the advantageous section is not being output, it is determined whether the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the advantageous section information is set when the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the process of shifting to the advantageous section is performed in a state where no signal is output during the advantageous section.

The slot machine according to aspect 1-4 is the slot machine according to aspect 1-2 or 1-3,
The signal in the advantageous section is a signal used for a performance test of the slot machine.
According to this feature, the process regarding the advantageous section is performed in a state where the signal during the advantageous section is output to the test apparatus that performs the performance test, and the signal during the advantageous section is output to the test apparatus that performs the performance test. It can be ensured that the process of shifting to the advantageous section is performed in a state where the process is not performed.

The slot machine according to aspect 1-5 is the slot machine according to any of aspects 1-1 to 1-4,
A shift-related processing means (main control unit 41) capable of performing a shift-related process (advantageous zone shift-related process) related to the shift of the advantageous zone in the first process (ball-out control process);
Bet number determination means (main control section 41) for determining whether or not the first bet number (3) is set;
With
The transition-related processing unit is configured to determine whether the first bet number (3) is set by the bet amount determination unit when the time is outside the advantageous section (signal buffer during the advantageous section: 0). Performs the transition-related processing (advantageous section transition-related processing), and performs the transition-related processing (advantageous section transition-related processing) when it is determined that the first bet amount (3) is not set. It is characterized by the absence.
According to this feature, when the first bet number is not set, the transfer-related process is not performed, so that it is possible to encourage the player to play a game with the first bet number.

The slot machine according to aspect 1-6 is the slot machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-5,
A shift-related processing means (main control unit 41) capable of performing a shift-related process (advantageous zone shift-related process) related to the shift of the advantageous zone in the first process (ball-out control process);
Game state control means (main control unit 41) for controlling to a plurality of game states including a special game state (BB (RB));
A game state determination unit (main control unit 41) for determining whether or not the game is controlled to the special game state (BB (RB));
With
The transition-related processing means determines that the game state is not controlled to the special game state (BB (RB)) by the game state determination means when the state is outside the advantageous section (the signal buffer during the advantageous section is 0). In such a case, the transition-related processing (advantageous section transition-related processing) is performed, and when it is determined that the game is controlled to the special game state (BB (RB)), the transition-related processing (advantageous section transition-related processing) is performed. Processing) is not performed.
According to this feature, when the game is controlled to the special game state, the transition-related processing is not performed, so that it is possible to prompt the player to play a game other than the special game state.

The slot machine according to aspect 1-7 is the slot machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-6,
A shift-related processing means (main control unit 41) capable of performing a shift-related process (advantageous zone shift-related process) related to the shift of the advantageous zone in the first process (ball-out control process);
Bet number determination means (main control section 41) for determining whether or not the first bet number (3) is set;
Game state control means (main control unit 41) for controlling to a plurality of game states including a special game state (BB (RB));
A game state determination unit (main control unit 41) for determining whether or not the game is controlled to the special game state (BB (RB));
With
The transition-related processing means determines that the first bet number (3) is set by the bet number determination means when the time is outside the advantageous section (the signal buffer during the advantageous section is 0); When it is determined by the gaming state determining means that the game is not controlled to the special gaming state (BB (RB)), the transition-related processing (advantageous section transition-related processing) is performed, and the first bet number (3) is determined. When it is determined that is not set, or when it is determined that the game is controlled to the special game state (BB (RB)), the transition related processing (advantageous section transition related processing) is not performed. It is characterized by.
According to this feature, when the first bet number is not set, and when the game is controlled to the special game state, the transition-related process is not performed. The user can be prompted to play a game other than in the gaming state.

The slot machine according to aspect 1-8 is the slot machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-7,
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result;
An operation mode instructing means (navigation notification) for instructing an operation mode (stop order) of the deriving operation module;
In the first process (ball-out control process), an instruction-related process related to the instruction of the operation mode (a process of performing a navigation notification according to the ball-out status, an update of the ED transition game number counter, a ball-out status process, and the like). Instruction-related processing means (main control unit 41) that can be performed;
Bet number determination means (main control section 41) for determining whether or not the first bet number (3) is set;
With
When the instruction-related processing means determines that the first bet number (3) is set by the bet number determination means in the advantageous section (signal buffer during the advantageous section: 1), , Perform the instruction-related processing (processing for performing a navigation notification in accordance with the payout state, update of the ED transition game number counter, payout state processing, and the like), and determine that the first bet number (3) is not set. In this case, the instruction-related processing (the processing for performing the navigation notification in accordance with the payout state, the update of the ED transition game number counter, the payout state processing, and the like) is not performed.
According to this feature, when the first bet number is not set, the instruction-related processing related to the instruction of the operation mode is not performed, and therefore, it is possible to prompt to play a game with the first bet number. it can.

The slot machine according to aspect 1-9 is the slot machine according to any of aspects 1-1 to 1-8,
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result;
An operation mode instructing means (navigation notification) for instructing an operation mode (stop order) of the deriving operation module;
In the first process (ball-out control process), an instruction-related process related to the instruction of the operation mode (a process of performing a navigation notification according to the ball-out status, an update of the ED transition game number counter, a ball-out status process, and the like). Instruction-related processing means (main control unit 41) that can be performed;
Predetermination means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not to allow a prize,
When the special prize (BB1, BB2) is allowed by the predetermined means, and when the special prize (BB1, BB2) does not occur, the special prize (BB1, BB2) is generated. Carryover means (main control unit 41) for carrying over the determination of the allowance after the next game;
Whether or not the state (RT1) in which the determination to allow the generation of the specific special winning (BB1) to be determined is carried over, provided that the second bet amount (2) is set. Specific state determination means (main control unit 41) for determining whether
With
The instruction-related processing unit is configured to determine whether the specific state is controlled to the specific state (RT1) by the specific state determination unit when the specific state is determined to be in the advantageous section (signal buffer during the advantageous section: 1). When an instruction-related process (a process of performing a navigation notification in accordance with a ball-out state, an update of an ED transition game number counter, a ball-out state process, and the like) is performed, and it is determined that the state is not controlled to the specific state (RT1), Is characterized by not performing the instruction-related processing (processing for informing navigation according to the ball appearance state, updating the ED transition game number counter, ball appearance state processing, etc.).
According to this feature, if the decision to allow the generation of the specific special prize to be determined on the condition that the second bet amount is set is not controlled to the specific state in which the carryover is carried over, Since the instruction-related processing related to the instruction of the operation mode is not performed, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game in a specific state.

The slot machine according to mode 1-10 is the slot machine according to any of modes 1-1 to 1-9,
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result;
An operation mode instructing means (navigation notification) for instructing an operation mode (stop order) of the deriving operation module;
In the first process (ball-out control process), an instruction-related process related to the instruction of the operation mode (a process of performing a navigation notification according to the ball-out status, an update of the ED transition game number counter, a ball-out status process, and the like). Instruction-related processing means (main control unit 41) that can be performed;
Bet number determination means (main control section 41) for determining whether or not the first bet number (3) is set;
Predetermination means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not to allow a prize,
When the special prize (BB1, BB2) is allowed by the predetermined means, and when the special prize (BB1, BB2) does not occur, the special prize (BB1, BB2) is generated. Carryover means (main control unit 41) for carrying over the determination of the allowance after the next game;
Whether or not the state (RT1) in which the determination to allow the generation of the specific special winning (BB1) to be determined is carried over, provided that the second bet amount (2) is set. Specific state determination means (main control unit 41) for determining whether
With
The instruction-related processing means determines that the first bet number (3) has been set by the bet number determination means when the advantageous section (signal buffer during advantageous section: 1) is present, and When it is determined by the state determination means that the state is controlled to the specific state (RT1), the instruction-related processing (processing for informing the navigation in accordance with the ball-out state, updating the ED transition game number counter, ball-out) State processing), and when it is determined that the first bet amount (3) is not set, or when it is determined that the control is not performed in the specific state (RT), the instruction-related processing is performed. (E.g., processing for notifying the navigation according to the ball appearance state, updating of the ED transition game number counter, and ball appearance state processing) are not performed.
According to this feature, when the first bet amount is not set, the decision to allow the generation of a specific special prize to be determined on condition that the second bet amount is set is carried over. If the game is not controlled to the specific state, the instruction-related processing related to the instruction of the operation mode is not performed. Therefore, it is necessary to play the game with the first bet amount and to promote the game to be performed in the specific state. Can be.

The slot machine according to mode 1-11 is the slot machine according to mode 1-10,
A transition game number updating means (main control unit 41) capable of updating the transition game number (ED transition game number) in the advantageous section;
When the transition game number (ED transition game number) reaches a predetermined game number (fourth prescribed number), an operation mode is instructed by the operation mode instruction means (navigation notification) over a period until the advantageous section ends. Instruction state control means (main control unit 41) for controlling an instruction state (ED) to be performed;
With
The transfer game number updating means determines that the first bet number (3) is set by the bet number determining means and is controlled to the specific state (RT1) by the specific state determining means. If it is determined, the number of transition games (ED transition game number) is updated, and if it is determined that the first bet number (3) is not set, or it is controlled to the specific state (RT1). When it is determined that the number of transition games has not been reached, the number of transition games (ED transition game number) is not updated.
According to this feature, when the first bet amount is not set, the decision to allow the generation of a specific special prize to be determined on condition that the second bet amount is set is carried over. If the game is not controlled to the specific state, the number of transition games that is controlled to the instruction state by reaching the predetermined game number is not updated. The user can be prompted to play a game in a specific state.

The slot machine according to mode 1-12,
A variable display section (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (symbols) each of which can be identified;
A display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a slot machine (slot machine 1) capable of generating a prize according to the display result includes:
Bet amount setting means (main control unit 41) capable of setting any one of a plurality of bet numbers including a first bet amount (3) or a second bet amount (2) by a player's selection;
A game execution means (main control unit 41) for enabling a game to be executed when the first bet number (3) is set and the second bet number (2) is set;
Advantageous section control means (main control section 41) for controlling to an advantageous section which is advantageous to the player;
In the second process (AT state management process) performed after the display result is derived on the variable display unit (reel 2L, 2C, 2R), if the time is the advantageous section (other than the advantageous section game number counter: 0), Regardless of whether the first bet number (3) is set or the second bet number (2) is set, an advantageous section increase which is an increase amount of a game value since the start of the advantageous section. Advantageous section increase amount updating means (main control unit 41) for updating the amount (net increase number);
After the advantageous section increase amount (net additional number) is updated, it is determined whether the advantageous section increase amount (net additional number) exceeds a prescribed amount (third prescribed number), and a prescribed amount (third prescribed number) is determined. Advantageous section end means (main control section 41) for terminating the advantageous section when it is determined that
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, in a configuration in which the game can be executed regardless of whether the first bet amount is set or the second bet amount is set by the player's selection, the first bet amount is set in the advantageous section. Is set or the second bet amount is set, the advantageous section increment is updated, and the advantageous section is terminated when the advantageous section increment exceeds the specified amount. Even if the second bet amount is selected or selected, the amount of increase in the gaming value in the advantageous section is limited so as not to become excessively large, so that it is possible to prevent gambling from increasing.

The slot machine according to aspect 1-13 is the slot machine according to aspect 1-12,
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result;
An operation mode instructing means (navigation notification) for instructing an operation mode (stop order) of the deriving operation module;
Instruction-related processing means (main control unit 41) capable of performing an instruction-related process (ED shift, payout status-related process, etc.) related to the instruction of the operation mode in the second process (AT status management process); ,
Bet number determination means (main control section 41) for determining whether or not the first bet number (3) is set;
With
When the instruction-related processing means determines that the first bet number (3) is set by the bet number determination means in the advantageous section (the number of advantageous section games is other than 0), If the instruction-related processing (ED shift, payout state-related processing, etc.) is performed and it is determined that the first bet amount (3) is not set, the instruction-related processing (ED shift, payout state) is performed. It does not perform state-related processing, etc.).
According to this feature, when the first bet number is not set, the instruction-related processing related to the instruction of the operation mode is not performed, and therefore, it is possible to prompt to play a game with the first bet number. it can.

The slot machine according to aspect 1-14 is the slot machine according to aspect 1-12 or 1-13,
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result;
An operation mode instructing means (navigation notification) for instructing an operation mode (stop order) of the deriving operation module;
Instruction-related processing means (main control unit 41) capable of performing an instruction-related process (ED shift, payout status-related process, etc.) related to the instruction of the operation mode in the second process (AT status management process); ,
Predetermination means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not to allow a prize,
When the special prize (BB1, BB2) is allowed by the predetermined means, and when the special prize (BB1, BB2) does not occur, the special prize (BB1, BB2) is generated. Carryover means (main control unit 41) for carrying over the determination of the allowance after the next game;
Whether or not the state (RT1) in which the determination to allow the generation of the specific special winning (BB1) to be determined is carried over, provided that the second bet amount (2) is set. Specific state determination means (main control unit 41) for determining whether
With
The instruction-related processing unit is configured to determine whether the specific state is controlled to the specific state (RT1) by the specific state determination unit when the specific state is determined to be in the advantageous section (the number of advantageous section games is other than 0). Instruction-related processing (ED transition, ball-out state-related processing, etc.) is performed, and if it is determined that the state is not controlled to the specific state (RT1), the instruction-related processing (ED transition, ball-out state-related processing, etc.) ) Is not performed.
According to this feature, if the decision to allow the generation of the specific special prize to be determined on the condition that the second bet amount is set is not controlled to the specific state in which the carryover is carried over, Since the instruction-related processing related to the instruction of the operation mode is not performed, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game in a specific state.

The slot machine according to mode 1-15 is the slot machine according to any one of modes 1-12 to 1-14,
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result;
An operation mode instructing means (navigation notification) for instructing an operation mode (stop order) of the deriving operation module;
Instruction-related processing means (main control unit 41) capable of performing an instruction-related process (ED shift, payout status-related process, etc.) related to the instruction of the operation mode in the second process (AT status management process); ,
Bet number determination means (main control section 41) for determining whether or not the first bet number (3) is set;
Predetermination means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not to allow a prize,
When the special prize (BB1, BB2) is allowed by the predetermined means, and when the special prize (BB1, BB2) does not occur, the special prize (BB1, BB2) is generated. Carryover means (main control unit 41) for carrying over the determination of the allowance after the next game;
Whether or not the state (RT1) in which the determination to allow the generation of the specific special winning (BB1) to be determined is carried over, provided that the second bet amount (2) is set. Specific state determination means (main control unit 41) for determining whether
With
The instruction-related processing means determines that the first bet number (3) is set by the bet number determination means when the time is in the advantageous section (other than the number of advantageous section games: 0), and When it is determined by the state determination means that the state is controlled to the specific state (RT1), the instruction-related processing (ED transition, payout state-related processing, and the like) is performed, and the first bet amount (3) is reduced. If it is determined that it is not set, or if it is determined that it is not controlled to the specific state (RT1), the instruction related processing (ED shift, payout state related processing, etc.) is not performed. Features.
According to this feature, when the first bet amount is not set, the decision to allow the generation of a specific special prize to be determined on condition that the second bet amount is set is carried over. If the game is not controlled to the specific state, the instruction-related processing related to the instruction of the operation mode is not performed. Therefore, it is necessary to play the game with the first bet amount and to promote the game to be performed in the specific state. Can be.

The slot machine according to aspect 1-16 is the slot machine according to aspect 1-15,
A predetermined amount determining means (main control unit 41) capable of determining whether or not the advantageous section increase amount (net increase number) in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined amount (third specified number);
When the predetermined amount determination means determines that the predetermined amount (the third specified number) has been exceeded, an instruction in which an operation mode is instructed by the operation mode instruction means (navigation notification) over a period until the advantageous section ends. Instruction state control means (main control unit 41) for controlling to a state (ED);
With
The predetermined amount determination means determines that the first bet amount (3) is set by the bet number determination means and determines that the first state is controlled to the specific state (RT1) by the specific state determination means. In this case, it is determined whether the advantageous section increase amount (net increase number) exceeds a predetermined amount (third specified number), and it is determined that the first bet amount (3) is not set. In this case, or when it is determined that the control is not performed in the specific state (RT), it is not determined whether the advantageous section increase amount (net additional number) exceeds a predetermined amount (third specified number). Features.
According to this feature, when the first bet amount is not set, the decision to allow the occurrence of a specific special prize to be determined on condition that the second bet amount is set is carried over. If it is not controlled to the specific state, the first bet is not made because it is not determined whether the amount of increase in the advantageous section, which is controlled to the instruction state by exceeding the predetermined amount, exceeds the predetermined amount. It is possible to encourage the player to play the game in a number and to play the game in a specific state.

The slot machine according to aspect 1-17 is the slot machine according to any of aspects 1-1 to 1-16,
Predetermination means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not to allow a prize,
When the special prize (BB1, BB2) is allowed by the predetermined means, and when the special prize (BB1, BB2) does not occur, the special prize (BB1, BB2) is generated. Carryover means (main control unit 41) for carrying over the determination of the allowance after the next game;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result;
Derivation control means (main control unit 41) for performing control for deriving the display result;
With
The special prize includes a specific special prize (BB1) to be determined on condition that the second bet amount (2) is set,
The derivation control means disables derivation of a display result in which the specific special prize (BB1) occurs when the first bet amount (3) is set, irrespective of the determination result of the pre-determination means. It is characterized by control.
According to this feature, in the state where the decision to allow the generation of a specific special prize has been carried over, the first bet amount is selected and the game is played, so that any prize is generated by the pre-determination means. Even when the special prize is not permitted, the specific special prize does not occur, and the state of permitting the generation of the specific special prize can be maintained.

The slot machine according to aspect 1-18 is the slot machine according to any of aspects 1-1 to 1-17,
Credit storage means (RAM41c) for storing credits,
Bet amount setting operation means (MAXBET switch 6) operated when a player sets a bet amount using credits;
With
The first bet number (3) is a value larger than the second bet number (2),
The operation of the bet amount setting operation means (MAX BET switch 6) is effectively accepted when the first bet amount (3) can be set by adding the already set bet amount and credit. .
According to this feature, in a situation in which the remaining number of credits is sufficient to set the first bet amount, the first bet amount is set by operating the bet amount setting operation means, while the remaining number of credits is set. Even if the bet amount setting operation means is operated in a situation where only the second bet amount can be set, the second bet amount is not set, so that the game can be prevented from being played with the second bet amount as much as possible.

The slot machine according to aspect 1-19 is the slot machine according to any of aspects 1-1 to 1-18,
Predetermination means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not to allow a prize,
When the special prize (BB1, BB2) is allowed by the predetermined means, and when the special prize (BB1, BB2) does not occur, the special prize (BB1, BB2) is generated. Carryover means (main control unit 41) for carrying over the determination of the allowance after the next game;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result;
Derivation control means (main control unit 41) for performing control for deriving the display result;
A specific notification unit (main control unit 41) for performing specific notification (state display);
A setting state control means (main control unit) for controlling a setting state (setting change state) in which any one of the plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player can be selected and set; 41),
Setting confirmation state control means (main control unit 41) for controlling a currently set value to a setting confirmation state capable of confirming;
With
The special prize is a first special prize (BB2) to be determined on condition that the first bet number (3) is set, and the second bet number (2) is set. The condition includes a second special prize (BB1) to be determined,
The specific notification means,
When it is determined that the generation of the second special winning (BB1) is allowed, the specific notification (state display) is performed,
When it is determined that the generation of the first special prize (BB2) is permitted, the specific notification (state display) is not performed.
After starting the specific notification (state display), the specific notification (state display) is continued even when controlled to the setting state (setting change state) or when controlled to the setting confirmation state. It is characterized by.
According to this feature, by performing the specific notification, it is notified that the occurrence of the second special prize has been determined to be permitted, and once the specific notification is started, the setting state and the setting confirmation are confirmed. Even if the state is controlled, the notification continues, so that it is possible to confirm that the occurrence of the second special winning is permitted even in the state where the state is controlled to the setting state or the setting confirmation state.

The slot machine according to aspect 1-20 is the slot machine according to aspect 1-19,
The specific notification means,
The specific notification (state display) is started before the operation of the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) becomes effective in the game in which the generation of the second special winning (BB1) is permitted. When the second special prize (BB1) occurs in the game, the specific notification (state display) ends, and when the second special prize (BB1) does not occur in the game, The feature is that the specific notification (status display) is continued.
According to this feature, since the specific notification starts before the operation of the derivation operation unit becomes effective, the operation of the derivation operation unit can be performed after confirming the presence or absence of the specific notification. Further, when the second special prize has occurred, the specific notification is ended in the game, so that it is possible to confirm that the state in which the generation of the second special prize is permitted has ended.

The slot machine according to aspect 1-21, wherein the slot machine according to aspect 1-20 is provided.
Basic processing means (main control unit 41) for performing basic processing (main processing);
Interrupt processing means (main control unit 41) for periodically interrupting the basic processing (main processing) and performing an interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing);
With
The prior determination means stores a determination result (winning number) as to whether or not a winning is allowed in the basic processing (main processing),
The specific notifying means may determine that the determination result (winning number) stored in the basic processing (main processing) in the interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing) permits generation of the second special prize (BB1). It is determined whether or not the result is the second special determination result (winning number corresponding to BB1). If it is determined that the result is the second special determination result (winning number corresponding to BB1), the specific notification (state display) is performed. Is started.
According to this feature, the specific notification starts immediately when the determination of the occurrence of the second special prize is determined by the pre-determining means, so that the specific notification is issued before the operation of the deriving operation means becomes effective. Sufficient time can be ensured for the presence or absence.

The slot machine according to aspect 1-22 is the slot machine according to aspect 1-21,
After the determination result (winning number) by the pre-determining means is stored, the operation of the deriving operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is enabled after the interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing) is performed. It is characterized by
According to this feature, the specific notification can be reliably started before the operation of the derivation operation unit becomes effective.

The slot machine according to aspect 1-23 is the slot machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-22,
Advantageous state control means (main control unit 41) for controlling to an advantageous state (AT) advantageous to the player in the advantageous section;
An advantageous state signal output means (main control unit 41) for outputting an advantageous state signal (AT signal) indicating that it is controlled to the advantageous state (AT) to the outside;
An advantageous section notification unit (main control unit 41) for performing an advantageous section notification (section display) indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous section;
With
The advantageous section notification means, after being controlled to the advantageous section, starts the advantageous section notification (section display) when an advantageous state (AT) advantageous to the player starts,
The advantageous state signal output means outputs the advantageous state signal (AT signal) to the outside after starting the advantageous section notification (section display) when the advantageous state (AT) starts. I have.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the external device that has received the advantageous state signal from specifying that it is controlled to be in the advantageous section before the advantageous section notification is started.

The slot machine according to mode 1-24 is the slot machine according to mode 1-23,
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result;
An operation mode signal output section (main control section 41) for outputting an operation mode signal (operation information signal) for designating an operation mode of the deriving operation section (stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R);
With
The operation mode signal output means outputs the operation mode signal (operation information signal) to the outside after starting the advantageous section notification (section display) when the advantageous state (AT) starts. And
According to this feature, since the operation mode signal is output to the outside after the start of the advantageous section notification, it is possible to externally specify that the operation mode is specified while the advantageous section notification is being performed.

The slot machine according to aspect 1-25 is the slot machine according to any of aspects 1-1 to 1-24,
Advantageous state control means (main control unit 41) for controlling to an advantageous state (AT) advantageous to the player in the advantageous section;
An advantageous section notification unit (main control unit 41) for performing an advantageous section notification (section display) indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous section;
Advantageous section signal output means (main control section 41) for outputting a signal during the advantageous section indicating that the control is performed to the advantageous section to the outside,
Advantageous section related information initialization means (main control section 41) for initializing advantageous section related information related to the advantageous section when ending the advantageous section;
With
In the advantageous section notification means, when ending the advantageous section, the advantageous section related information initializing means initializes the advantageous section related information, and the advantageous section signal output means terminates output of the advantageous section signal. After that, the advantageous section notification (section display) is ended.
According to this feature, the advantageous section information is initialized, and after the output of the signal during the advantageous section is finished, the advantageous section notification ends. Therefore, the advantageous section information ends without the advantageous section information being initialized. It is possible to prevent the notification of the advantageous section from ending despite the fact that the signal during the advantageous section is output to the outside.

The slot machine according to aspect 1-26 is the slot machine according to aspect 1-25,
The advantageous section related information includes an output buffer (an advantageous section signal buffer) in which an output state of the advantageous section signal is set,
After the advantageous section related information is initialized, the advantageous section signal output means determines whether or not the output buffer of the advantageous section signal (the advantageous section signal buffer) is set to OFF, and When it is determined that is set, the output of the signal during the advantageous section is terminated.
According to this feature, when the advantageous section is ended, the advantageous section related information is initialized, so that the output of the advantageous section signal can be terminated without individually setting the output buffer of the advantageous section signal to OFF. it can.

The slot machine according to aspect 1-27 is the slot machine according to any one of aspects 1-23 to 1-26,
Advantageous section signal output means (main control section 41) for outputting a signal during the advantageous section indicating that the control is performed to the advantageous section to the outside,
Output state setting means (main control unit 41) for setting the output state of the signal during the advantageous section to an output buffer (signal buffer during the advantageous section);
With
The output state setting means determines whether or not the game is in the advantageous section at the end of the game, and sets the output buffer (signal in the advantageous section signal) of the signal in the advantageous section to ON when it is determined that the game is in the advantageous section,
The advantage section signal output means outputs the advantage section signal when the output buffer (intersection signal buffer) is set to ON.
According to this feature, each time the game is over, it is determined whether or not the game is in the advantageous section. If it is determined that the game is in the advantageous section, ON is set in the output buffer of the signal in the advantageous section. Despite the presence, it is possible to prevent the signal during the advantageous section from being turned off.

The slot machine according to aspect 1-28 is the slot machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-27,
An advantageous section notification unit (main control unit 41) for performing an advantageous section notification (section display) indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous section;
After the power supply is stopped in the state where the advantageous section notification (section display) is being performed, the power supply is started to return to the state where the advantageous section notification (section display) is being performed. Return time notification means (main control section 41) capable of performing return time notification (section display LED lighting notification) indicating that the section has been returned to a state in which section notification (section display) has been performed;
With
The return time notification means performs the return time notification (segment display LED lighting notification) for a certain period after the power supply is started, and ends the return time notification (segment display LED lighting notification) after a certain period of time. It is characterized by.
According to this feature, when returning to the state in which the advantageous section notification is performed when the power supply is started, the return time notification indicating that is performed, so that the advantage section is provided to the clerk of the game store. It can be recognized that the store will be opened while the notification is being performed. On the other hand, since the return notification is completed in a fixed time, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even when the store is opened with the advantageous section notification performed.

The slot machine according to aspect 1-29 is the slot machine according to aspect 1-28,
The return time informing means is configured to, after the power supply is stopped in the state where the advantageous section notification (section display) is being performed, start the power supply over a specific time outside the business hours and perform the advantageous section notification (section). Display) is performed, the return time notification (section display LED lighting notification) is performed, the power supply is started without straddling the specific time, and the advantageous section notification (section display) is performed. When returning to the state in which is performed, the above-described notification at the time of return (section display LED lighting notification) is not performed.
According to this feature, even if a power interruption occurs temporarily during business hours, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The slot machine according to aspect 1-30 is the slot machine according to aspect 1-28 or 1-29,
When the game is started while the return time notification (segment display LED lighting notification) is being performed, the return time notification means (segment display LED lighting notification) without waiting for a certain time to elapse. Is terminated.
According to this feature, the return notification can be ended by starting the game even in a state where the fixed time has not elapsed.

The slot machine according to mode 1-31 is the slot machine according to any of modes 1-28 to 1-30,
The advantageous section notification means performs the advantageous section notification (section display) only in a specific section (section after the start of AT) of the advantageous sections,
The return-time notifying unit is configured to stop the power supply in a state in which the advantageous section notification (section display) is not performed in the advantageous section (section before the start of the AT), and then start the power supply to perform the advantageous section. When returning to a state where notification (section display) is not performed, the above-described notification at the time of return (section display LED lighting notification) is not performed.
According to this feature, only when the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous section and returns to the state in which the advantageous section notification is being performed, the store is opened while the advantageous section notification is being performed to the clerk of the game store. Can be recognized.

The slot machine according to mode 1-32 is the slot machine according to any of modes 1-28 to 1-31,
Predetermination means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not to allow a prize,
When the special prize (BB1, BB2) is allowed by the predetermined means, and when the special prize (BB1, BB2) does not occur, the special prize (BB1, BB2) is generated. Carryover means (main control unit 41) for carrying over the determination of the allowance after the next game;
When power supply is started, a setting operation (setting key switch ON) or an initialization operation (setting key switch ON) for enabling setting of any one of a plurality of types of setting values having different advantages for the player. Advantageous section related information initializing means (main control unit 41) for initializing the advantageous section related information related to the advantageous section when the reset / setting switch is turned on);
With
When the game is performed in the specific state (RT1) in which the decision to allow the generation of the specific special prize (BB1) is carried over, the gaming value provision rate (medal payout rate) becomes appropriate,
The advantageous section-related information initializing means may execute the initialization operation (reset / setting switch ON) even when the power supply is started and the setting operation (setting key switch ON) is performed. ), The advantageous section related information is initialized and the advantageous section and the advantageous section notification (section display) are ended, while the specific state (RT1) is initialized. It is characterized in that it is maintained without
According to this feature, when the power supply is started while the setting operation is being performed, or when the power supply is started while the initialization operation is being performed, the advantageous section is ended and the advantageous section is notified. Can be ended, but the specific state is maintained, so that it is not necessary to perform an operation for setting the specific state every time the advantageous section and the advantageous section notification are ended.

The slot machine according to mode 1-33 is the slot machine according to any of modes 1-1 to 1-32,
Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling the game,
Effect control means (sub-control unit 91) for controlling the effect based on the command transmitted from the game control means;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result;
With
The game control means (main control unit 41)
Predetermination means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not to allow a prize,
Derivation control means for performing control for deriving the display result,
A decision result command transmitting means for transmitting a decision result command (internal winning command) according to the decision result (winning number) of the pre-determining means;
Operation mode instructing means (navigation notification) for instructing the operation mode of the deriving operation means;
Including
Whether the first betting number (3) is set or the second betting number (2) is set, a plurality of types of specific results ( Multi-bell, 3)
The derivation control means determines whether the result of the determination by the pre-determination means is the plurality of types regardless of whether the first bet number (3) is set or the second bet number (2) is set. If the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode (order of stopping correct answers) corresponding to the type of the specific result, the specific result ( Displayed so as to be more advantageous to the player than when the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode other than the operation mode corresponding to the type of multi-page bell, three-sheet combination (stop order other than the stop order of correct answers). Control to derive the result,
The operation mode instructing means, when the determination result of the pre-determination means is any of the plurality of types of specific results (multiple bell, three-piece combination), the operation mode corresponding to the type of the specific result ( Order of stopping correct answers)
The determination result command transmission means may determine whether the determination result of the pre-determination means is the same regardless of whether the first bet number (3) is set or the second bet number (2) is set. When one of a plurality of types of specified results (multiple bell, three-piece combination) is obtained, it is possible to specify that the determination result of the pre-determining means is a specified result (multiple bell, three-piece combination). Is characterized by transmitting a determination result command (an internal winning command in which a grouped winning number is specified) in which the type of the specifying result cannot be specified.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the first bet amount is set or the second bet amount is set, a plurality of types of specific results are to be determined, and any type of specific result is obtained. In this case, the operation mode that is advantageous to the player changes according to the type of the specific result. However, even when the first bet number is set or when the second bet number is set, Although it is possible to specify that the determination result of the pre-determining means is a specific result, since a determination result command that cannot specify the type of the specific result is transmitted, even if the first bet amount is set, the second bet amount is set. Is selected, it is possible to prevent an operation mode that is advantageous for the player from being specified from the determination result command.

The slot machine according to mode 1-34 is the slot machine according to mode 1-33,
The operation mode instruction unit is configured to, when the determination result of the pre-determination unit is any of the plurality of types of specific results (multiple bells, triples) in the advantageous section, determine the first bet amount (3 ) Is set, the operation mode (the order of stopping correct answers) corresponding to the type of the specified result can be instructed. If the second bet amount (2) is set, the specified It is characterized in that the operation mode (order of stopping correct answers) corresponding to the type of the result is not instructed.
According to this feature, when the second bet number is set, an operation mode advantageous to the player is not instructed, so that it is possible to prompt the player to play the game with the first bet number.

The slot machine according to mode 1-35 is the slot machine according to mode 1-33 or 1-34,
The determination result command transmitting means is configured to determine whether or not the result of the determination by the pre-determination means is set whether the first bet number (3) is set or the second bet number (2) is set. Is one of the plurality of types of specified results (multiple bell, three-piece combination), it can be specified that the determination result of the pre-determining means is the specified result (multiple bell, three-piece combination) However, it is characterized in that a determination result command (an internal winning command in which a grouped winning number is specified) in which the type of the specified result cannot be specified is created and transmitted by common processing (grouping processing). .
According to this feature, both when the first bet amount is set and when the second bet amount is set, the determination result of the pre-determining means is determined to be one of the plurality of types of specific results. In this case, the command is created by the common processing, so that the program capacity for creating the command can be reduced.

[Mode 2]
The slot machine according to mode 2-1 includes:
A variable display section (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (symbols) each of which can be identified;
A display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a slot machine (slot machine 1) capable of generating a prize according to the display result includes:
Basic processing means (main control unit 41) for performing basic processing (main processing);
Interrupt processing means (main control unit 41) for periodically interrupting the basic processing (main processing) and performing an interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing);
A specific processing unit (main control unit 41) for performing a specific process (game program) in the basic process (main process);
Special processing means (main control section 41) for performing special processing (non-game program) in the basic processing (main processing);
Minimum time timer value updating means (main control) capable of updating a minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value) for measuring a minimum time of one game in the interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing). Part 41),
With
During the execution of the specific process (game program), the minimum time timer value (the timer value for one game time management) is updated by the minimum time timer value updating means, and during the execution of the special process (non-game program). The minimum time timer value updating means does not update the minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value).
According to this feature, while the minimum time timer value is updated as much as possible, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed, but the minimum time timer value is updated during a period in which special processing related to fraud detection is performed. Is not performed, the special processing is not mixed with the processing for updating the minimum time timer value.

The slot machine according to aspect 2-2 is the slot machine according to aspect 2-1.
In the basic processing (main processing), it is determined whether or not the minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value) is a specific value (0) at a specific opportunity (before starting reel rotation) in one game. If it is determined that the minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value) is not the specific value (0), the minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value) is set to the specific value (0). The game is not advanced until it is determined that the game time is satisfied, and when the minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value) is determined to be a specific value (0), the game is advanced.
According to this feature, the game is not advanced until the minimum time elapses, and the game is advanced when the minimum time elapses, so that the minimum time per game can be secured.

The slot machine according to mode 2-3 is the slot machine according to mode 2-2,
If it is determined that the minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value) is a specific value (0), execution of the interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing) is prohibited, and the minimum time timer value ( It is characterized by setting an initial value to one game time management timer value).
According to this feature, since the interrupt processing is prohibited when setting the initial value to the minimum time timer value, the minimum time timer value is updated while the initial value is set to the minimum time timer value. Can be prevented.

The slot machine according to mode 2-4 is the slot machine according to any one of modes 2-1 to 2-3,
A game medium (medal) inserted from outside the slot machine flows down, and a flow-down passage (medal receiving passage 29b) for guiding the game medium (medal) flowing down to the inner side (hopper tank 34a) is provided.
The special process (non-game program) is a passage monitoring process (medal sensor process) for monitoring the passing status of a game medium (medal) flowing down the downflow passage (medal receiving passage 29b).
According to this feature, for the period during which the passage monitoring process of monitoring the passing state of the game medium flowing down the downflow passage is performed, the minimum time timer value is not updated, so that the passage related to the detection of fraud is performed. The monitoring process is not mixed with the process for updating the minimum time timer value.

The slot machine according to mode 2-5 is the slot machine according to mode 2-4,
When an abnormality is detected in the passage monitoring process (medal sensor process), error information (error code) is set,
It is determined whether or not the error information (error code) is set in the specific processing (game program), and if it is determined that the error information (error code) is set, the error processing is executed
During the execution of the error processing, the minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value) is updated by the minimum time timer value updating means.
According to this feature, the minimum time timer value is updated during the execution of the error processing, so that the game can be smoothly performed after the error processing is completed.

The slot machine according to mode 2-6 is the slot machine according to mode 2-5,
The error processing can be ended without interrupting power supply.
According to this feature, the game can be smoothly restarted even if the error processing is performed.

The slot machine according to aspect 2-7 is the slot machine according to any of aspects 2-1 to 2-6,
Special game state control means (main control unit 41) for controlling to a special game state (RB, BB) advantageous to the player;
Special value (total cumulative number of payouts, total cumulative number of consecutive payouts) which is the game value given in the special game state with respect to the total number of game values (total total payout number) provided to the player Special ratio display means (gaming machine information display 50) for displaying a special ratio (government payout ratio, continuous character ratio) which is a ratio of
With
The special processing (non-game program) is to calculate data (total cumulative payout number, total cumulative payout number, total cumulative continuous payout number) for calculating the advantageous ratio (government payout ratio, continuous bonus ratio). It is a special ratio update process (data processing for the role ratio monitor) for updating.
According to this feature, during the period in which the special ratio update process for updating the data for calculating the special ratio is performed, the minimum time timer value is not updated, so that the special ratio related to the performance display of the gaming machine is not performed. The update process is not mixed with the process for updating the minimum time timer value.

The slot machine according to aspect 2-8 is the slot machine according to aspect 2-7,
In the special ratio update process (data for the role ratio monitor), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the special game state (RB, BB), and it is determined that the game is controlled to the special game state (RB, BB). If it is determined, it is determined whether or not the total number of gaming values (total number of payouts) given to the player has reached the upper limit, and if it is determined that the upper limit has been reached, Does not perform the process of updating the special value (total cumulative number of bonuses paid out, total cumulative number of consecutive bonuses paid out), and if it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached, the special value (total cumulative bonuses It is characterized by performing processing to update the number of articles paid out and the total cumulative number of consecutive bonus articles paid out.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the special value from being updated irrespective of the situation where the total number of gaming values given to the player cannot be updated.

The slot machine according to aspect 2-9 is the slot machine according to aspect 2-7 or 2-8,
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result;
Operation mode instructing means (navigation notification) for instructing the operation mode of the deriving operation means;
With
The special ratio display means displays the special value (total cumulative number of payouts) with respect to the total number of game values (total cumulative number of payouts) given to the player, in addition to the special ratios (government payout ratio, continuous bonus payout ratio). The instruction value (navigation value) which is a game value given when an operation mode that is advantageous to the player is instructed by the total number of bonuses to be paid, the total number of consecutive consecutive bonuses to be paid) and the operation mode instruction means (navi notification). It is possible to display an indication ratio (instruction bonus ratio), which is a ratio of an indication value (cumulative instruction invoice delivery volume) obtained by adding the payout number with the notification).
In the special ratio update process (combination ratio monitor data process), it is determined whether or not the total number of gaming values (total cumulative number of payouts) given to the player has reached an upper limit. If it is determined that the special game has not been reached, it is determined that the upper limit value has not been reached. It is determined whether the state is controlled to the state (BB) or not, and if it is determined that the state is controlled to the special game state (BB), the instruction value (total number of instruction-incoming payouts) is updated. When it is determined that the game is not controlled to the special game state (BB), it is determined whether or not an operation mode advantageous to the player has been instructed by the operation mode instruction means (navigation notification). By the operation mode instruction means (navigation notification) If the preferred operation mode is determined to have been instructed to trick users it is characterized by performing a process of updating the instruction write value (cumulative indication Included won game payout number).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the instructed value from being updated irrespective of the situation where the total number of gaming values given to the player cannot be updated.

The slot machine according to aspect 2-10 is the slot machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-9,
The special process (non-game program) is a test signal output process (operation information signal output process) that outputs a test signal (stop execution position signal) to a test device that tests the slot machine. I have.
According to this feature, the minimum time timer value is not updated during the period in which the test signal output process of outputting the test signal to the test device that performs the test of the slot machine is performed. The test signal output processing related to the test is not mixed with the processing for updating the minimum time timer value.

The slot machine according to aspect 2-11 is the slot machine according to aspect 2-10,
Predetermination means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not to allow a prize,
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result;
Operation mode instructing means (navigation notification) for instructing the operation mode of the deriving operation means;
With
In the test signal output process (operation information signal output process), it is determined whether or not the operation mode of the derivation operation unit is instructed. If it is determined that the operation mode of the derivation operation unit is instructed, A process of outputting a test signal (stop execution position signal) designating the operation mode to be instructed is performed, and when it is determined that the operation mode of the derivation operation means is not instructed, the determination result of the pre-determination means (winning No.), and a process of outputting a test signal (stop execution position signal) for specifying an operation mode corresponding to the determined result (winning number) of the predetermined determination means.
According to this feature, when it is determined that the operation mode of the deriving operation unit is instructed, the process of specifying the determination result of the pre-determination unit can be omitted, so that a test signal for specifying the operation mode is output. Processing can be simplified.

The slot machine according to aspect 2-12 is the slot machine according to any of aspects 2-1 to 2-11,
In the interruption process (timer interruption process), a process of updating a plurality of timer values used in the specific process (game program) including the minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value) (counter update process) ) And a process of updating the timer value used in the special process (non-game program) (time monitoring update process) are separately performed.
According to this feature, the process of updating the timer value used by the special process is not mixed with the process of updating the timer value used by the specific process.

The slot machine according to aspect 2-13 is the slot machine according to any of aspects 2-1 to 2-12,
Predetermination means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not to allow a prize,
A predetermined signal output unit (main control unit 41) that outputs a predetermined signal (test signal) capable of specifying a result of the determination by the predetermined unit to the test apparatus;
With
When the minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value) is determined to be a specific value (0), the minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value) is set to an initial value, thereby setting the minimum value. The timer is started and the predetermined signal (test signal) is output when an initial value is set to the minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value). .
According to this feature, the predetermined signal is output when the initial value is set to the minimum time timer value. Therefore, by specifying the output interval of the predetermined signal, the minimum time of one game can be determined on the test apparatus side. Can be specified.

The slot machine according to mode 2-14 is the slot machine according to mode 2-13,
In the interrupt process (timer interrupt process), a process of outputting the predetermined signal (test signal) is performed before updating the minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value). I have.
According to this feature, since the update of the minimum time timer value is started after the output of the predetermined signal is started, the output interval of the predetermined signal can be reliably set to be equal to or longer than the minimum time of one game.

  Embodiments of the slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a housing 1a having an open front surface, and a front door 1b pivotally supported at a side end of the housing 1a. I have. Inside the slot machine 1, a plurality of types of symbols that can be distinguished from each other are arranged in a predetermined order, and reels 2L, 2C, 2R (hereinafter, left reel, middle reel, right reel) arranged in the same number in the horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 1, three continuous symbols among the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in a see-through window 3 provided substantially at the center of the front of the slot machine 1. They are displayed in three steps, upper, middle, and lower, and are arranged so as to be visible from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, each reel has a plurality of types of symbols ("red 7", "blue 7", "white 7", "BAR", "watermelon", "cherry a") which can be identified. , "Cherry b", "bell", "replay", "plum") are arranged in a predetermined order.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration using three reels is illustrated, but a configuration using only one reel, a configuration using two reels, and a configuration using four or more reels may be used. . Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display section for variably displaying the symbols by the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is configured. However, the variable display section may be other than a reel. By moving the belt on which the symbols are arranged, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the symbols can be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in this embodiment, the variable display section is constituted by physical reels, but the variable display section may be constituted by an image display device such as a liquid crystal display.

  On the front of the slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 1, a medal insertion section 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout port 9 for paying out medals, credits (the number of medals stored as a game value owned by the player). ) Is used to set the maximum bet number (three in this embodiment) out of the prescribed number (two or three in this embodiment) determined according to the game state. MAXBET switch 6, a payout switch 10 operated when paying out medals stored as credits and medals used for setting the bet amount (returning medals used for setting credits and bet amount), a game Switch 7L, 8C, 8R, which is operated to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, respectively, which is operated when starting the game, and which can be operated by the player. Re respectively are provided.

  On the front of the slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 1, a credit indicator 11 for displaying the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize, and the contents thereof when an error occurs. A game auxiliary display 12 for displaying an error code, operation information (navigation display) corresponding to the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, etc., a 1-BET LED 14 for notifying by lighting that the number of bets is set to 1, A 2BET LED 15 for notifying that the bet number has been set to 2 by lighting, a 3BET LED 16 for notifying that the bet number has been set to 3 by lighting, and a specific bet number (two in this embodiment) are set. The special role (BB1 in this embodiment) that can be won in the game is controlled to the internal middle state (RT1 in this embodiment) in which it is carried over. , A status indication LED 17 for notifying the start operation of the game by operating the start switch 7, a start valid LED 18 for notifying by lighting that the game start operation is valid, and a section for notifying by lighting that the section state is controlled to the advantageous section. A game display unit 13 provided with a display LED 19 and a replay LED 20 for notifying by light that a replay game is being performed is provided. A liquid crystal display 51 capable of displaying images and the like is provided on the front of the slot machine 1.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 3) for notifying by lighting that the setting operation of the bet amount by operating the MAXBET switch 6 is valid, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, Inside the 8R, left, middle, and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R (see FIG. 3) for notifying by lighting that the operation to stop the reel by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are valid, respectively. Is provided.

  Inside the front door 1b of the slot machine 1, a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state from the outside of the slot machine 1 by a predetermined key operation, while changing a set value or checking a set value , A set value display 24 for displaying the set value at that time, a door open detection switch 25 for detecting the open state of the front door 1b, and a flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4 inside the slot machine 1. And a flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to one of a hopper tank side and a medal payout port 9 side, which will be described later, and detects a medal supplied from the medal insertion section 4 and flowing down to the hopper tank side. A medal selector 29 having inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is provided.

  Further, inside the slot machine 1, a reel unit 34 for rotating and stopping the above-mentioned reels 2L, 2C, 2R according to a control signal from the main control unit 41, and a control from the main control unit 41 A hopper unit 35 for paying out medals from the medal payout exit 9 in accordance with a signal is provided.

  Further, inside the slot machine 1, it functions as a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and functions as a reset switch for canceling an error state in a normal state, and will be described later in the setting change state. A reset / setting switch 38 functioning as a setting switch for changing a set value of a winning probability (a payout rate) of an internal lottery, and a power switch 39 operated when the power is turned on / off are provided.

  Inside the slot machine 1, when the game control board 40 is attached to a predetermined position inside the housing 1a, a lower part on the front side (player side) of the game control board 40 has a seven-segment display. A game machine information display 50 is arranged (see FIG. 60). The gaming machine information display 50 is capable of visually recognizing display contents from outside the board case 120a in a state where the game control board 40 is sealed in the board case 120a. The game information based on the game history in the slot machine 1 displayed on the machine information display 50 can be recognized by a clerk or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40 and an effect control board 90. The game control board 40 controls a game (game). Is performed in accordance with the effect.

  The game control board 40 includes the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the inserted medal sensor 31, the reel sensor (not shown) of the reel unit 34, and a hopper. A payout sensor and a full tank sensor (not shown) of the unit 35, a setting key switch 37, and a reset / setting switch 38 are connected, and detection signals of these connected switches and the like are input.

  In addition, the game control board 40 includes the above-mentioned credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, 1-3 BET LEDs 14-16, the status display LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the section display LED 19, the replaying LED 20, the BET switch valid LED 21, and the left. , Middle and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, a set value display 24, a flow path switching solenoid 30, a reel unit 34, and a hopper unit 35, which are connected to these electric components and the game control board 40. The gaming machine information display 50 is driven under the control of the main control unit 41 mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 is configured by a microcomputer having a main CPU 41a, a ROM 41b, a RAM 41c, and an I / O port 41d, and has a main control unit 41 for controlling a game mounted thereon.

  The main control unit 41 includes a plurality of registers used by the main CPU 41a to perform calculations. The plurality of registers include registers such as an accumulator register, a flag register, a general-purpose register, an index register, an interrupt register, a refresh register, and a program counter. Among these registers, the accumulator register, the flag register, and the general-purpose register include a front register and a back register configured to form a pair, respectively (hereinafter, the front register and the back register may be simply referred to as registers). is there). The main CPU 41a updates the value of a predetermined register by executing various instructions such as an operation instruction and a read instruction included in the program, and stores data in the RAM 41c specified by the value (address) of the predetermined register. It is possible to update the value (data) stored in the area.

  Further, among the registers provided in the main control unit 41, the flag register is configured so that its state changes so as to indicate an operation result by an instruction executed by the main CPU 41a, and utilizes the change in the state of the flag register. Thus, the main CPU 41a can perform a process corresponding to the operation result of the previous instruction.

  The flag register is composed of a plurality of bits (8 bits in the present embodiment). The plurality of bits include an operation of an operation instruction executed by the main CPU 41a in order to reduce a processing load of the main CPU 41a. The state changes according to the result, but the first bit (hereinafter, the first zero flag) configured so that the state does not change with a specific instruction (for example, a read instruction LD (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as an LD instruction)). Z), or a second bit (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a second zero flag TZ) configured such that the state changes according to the operation result of the operation instruction and the state changes even with a specific instruction. ) Is included. In each process included in the game program described later, when the process is performed based on the instruction, the determination is performed by referring to the value of a bit other than the second zero flag included in the flag register. , The value of the bit of the second zero flag is not referred to for determination.

  Further, the main control unit 41 transmits various commands to the sub control unit 91. The command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 is transmitted in only one direction, and the command is not transmitted from the sub control unit 91 to the main control unit 41.

  The I / O port 41d includes output ports 0 to 9, and the main control unit 41 can output control signals for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R from the output port 0 and the output port 1. A control signal for the left / middle / right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R and a control signal for the flow path switching solenoid 30 can be output, and a control signal for the hopper motor 34b and an external output signal can be output from the output port 3. The control signals of the credit indicator 11, the game auxiliary indicators 12, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the status display LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the section display LED 19, the replaying LED 20, and the BET switch valid LED 21 are output from the output ports 4 and 5. The test signal can be output from the output port 6 and the output port can be output. It is capable of outputting more test signal and an external output signal, which can output a command from the output port 8 and an output port 9.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 repeatedly loops processing according to the control state as the main processing until the detection state of various switches connected to the game control board 40 changes, and changes the detection state of the various switches. Then, a process of shifting step by step is executed. Further, the main control unit 41 executes a timer interrupt process (main) at regular time intervals (about 0.56 milliseconds in the present embodiment). The execution interval of the timer interrupt process (main) is set to be longer than the sum of the time during which the process repeated in the main process repeats according to the control state and the execution time of the timer interrupt process (main). Therefore, at least one round of the processing to be repeated in accordance with the control state at least between the current and next timer interrupt processing (main).

  In the present embodiment, as an instruction executable by the main control unit 41, a save instruction for saving by saving a register value provided in the main control unit 41 in a stack area of the RAM 41c indicated by the stack pointer SP in a predetermined order, and The value of the register saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c by the save instruction is sequentially read from the stack area in the reverse order of the save order, and is set in the register corresponding to the order, so that the corresponding register is read. And a return instruction for returning the state to the state at the time of being saved by the save instruction.

  The save instruction stores a first save instruction (PUSH ALL) for saving the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 to the stack area of the RAM 41c, and an operation result among all the registers included in the main control unit 41. And a second save instruction (PUSH AF) for saving the value of the flag register to the stack area of the RAM 41c. The first save instruction is an instruction requiring a 2-byte program capacity, and the second save instruction is an instruction requiring a 1-byte program capacity. By executing the save instruction in the game program, the value of the register can be saved in the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the game program, and executing the save instruction in the non-game program. Thus, the value of the register can be saved in the non-game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the non-game program.

  The return instruction includes a first return instruction (POP ALL) for setting and returning a value saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c for all the registers included in the main control unit 41, and all registers included in the main control unit 41. And a second return instruction (POP AF) for setting a value saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c and restoring the flag register in which the operation result is stored. The first return instruction is an instruction requiring a 2-byte program capacity, and the second return instruction is an instruction requiring a 1-byte program capacity. By executing the return instruction in the game program, it is possible to call the value of the register saved from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the game program and set and return to the corresponding register. By executing the return instruction in the non-game program, the value of the register saved from the non-game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the non-game program is called, and It is possible to set and return.

  The rendering control board 90 is connected to rendering devices such as the above-described liquid crystal display 51, a speaker capable of outputting sound, and a rendering LED 57 used for rendering and visible from the player side. The state can be controlled by a sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90. The sub-control unit 91 receives a command transmitted from the main control unit 41, and performs various controls for performing an effect.

  The liquid crystal display 51 has a liquid crystal panel that is transparent when no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element. The liquid crystal display 51 is located on the front side (player side) of each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 1b. Is provided so that the display area is arranged. Each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R on the rear side of the liquid crystal display 51 is visible from the player side through the transmission area corresponding to the transparent window 3 and the transparent window 3 of the display area of the liquid crystal display 51.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the payout rate of medals changes according to the set value. More specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability according to a set value in a lottery that influences the advantage for the player such as an internal lottery. The set value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate and the payout rate decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases.

  In order to change the set value, the power switch 39 of the slot machine 1 needs to be turned on after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the power is turned on by turning on the setting key switch 37, the set value read from the RAM 41c is displayed on the set value display 24 as a display value, and the set value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. Move to the setting change state. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the set value display 24 is updated by one (when further operated from the set value 6, the set value is changed to 1). Return). Then, when the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is determined as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the determined display value (set value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and the state shifts to a state where the game can be advanced.

  The setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are provided inside the slot machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the front door 1b which can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the clerk who has a predetermined key among the clerks of the installed game store can operate. In particular, since the setting key switch 37 requires further key operation, only the clerk having a key for operating the setting key switch 37 can be operated among the clerks at the game store. The reset switch 23 does not need to open the front door 1b, but requires key operation using a predetermined key, so that only a clerk having the predetermined key can operate the reset switch 23. Further, the reset / setting switch 38 functions as a reset switch for canceling an error state in a normal state.

  When playing a game in the slot machine 1 of the embodiment, first, a medal is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or the MAXBET switch 6 is operated to set a bet amount using credits. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the game state is set, a predetermined pay line LN (see FIG. 1, in the present embodiment, horizontally arranged in the middle of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R). (Set across the symbols) is valid, and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the game can be started. When medals are inserted in more than the maximum number among the prescribed numbers corresponding to the gaming state, the medals are added to the credit. Further, in this embodiment, only one pay line is applied, but a plurality of pay lines may be applied.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are rotated, and the symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are continuously changed. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated while the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are being rotated, stop control is performed on the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and the rotation of the reels is stopped. The reel is stopped, and the design of the reel is derived and displayed on the see-through window 3 as a display result.

  In the stop control, a control for stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operation within a maximum stop delay time (190 ms (millisecond) in this embodiment) from the time when the operation of each stop switch is performed. Is performed. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated 80 times per minute, and the symbols for 80 (rotations) × 21 (the number of symbols per reel, for example, 21 frames) = 1680 frames are changed. Until the stop delay time (190 ms) elapses, symbols of up to four frames can be drawn. That is, in the stop control, a symbol displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and a symbol four frames away from the symbol, one symbol from a total of five symbols (retraction range). Can be selected and led out to the reels 2L, 2R, and 2R.

  Accordingly, in the stop control, when the corresponding stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is operated for each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R to stop the rotation, the winning combination which has been won by the internal lottery described later is used. When the symbol to be configured is within the pull-in range of four frames ahead from the symbol when the stop switch is operated, the symbol is drawn on the pay line LN, and the rotation of the reel on which the stop switch is operated is performed. On the other hand, if the symbols constituting the winning combination won by the internal lottery are not within the pull-in range, the symbols constituting the winning combination not elected by the internal lottery are displayed on the winning line LN. To prevent the reels from stopping above, a symbol that does not constitute any winning combination is drawn on the winning line LN, and the stop switch is operated so as to stop the rotation of the reel. It is possible.

  In the stop control, when the winning of the special combination (BB1, BB2 in the present embodiment) is carried over, the small combination (in the present embodiment, the common multi-sheet combination, etc.) is won by the internal lottery. In the situation where the special combination and the small combination are simultaneously won, the constituent symbols of the small combination that has been won are controlled so as to be preferentially drawn into the winning line LN within the above-described pull-in range, and the combination is won. When the constituent symbol of the small combination cannot be drawn into the winning line LN, the control is performed so that the constituent symbol of the special combination that has been won is drawn into the winning line LN. For this reason, in a game in which the special role and the small role are simultaneously won, it is difficult to make the winning special role win.

  In the stop control, when the winning of the special role (BB1, BB2 in the present embodiment) is carried over, the replaying role (replay A1, etc. in the present embodiment) is won by the internal lottery. When the special combination and the re-game combination are simultaneously won, the configuration symbol of the re-combination that has been won is preferentially drawn into the winning line LN. The symbols that constitute the re-game combination on each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged within a predetermined pull-in range. When the re-game combination is won, the symbols that constitute the re-game combination must be drawn into the winning line LN. Become. For this reason, in a game in which a special role and a replaying role are simultaneously won, it is not possible to win the special role that has been won.

  In the stop control, the winning of the special role (BB1, BB2 in this embodiment) is carried over, and the specified number (two in the case of BB1, BB2 of BB2) corresponding to the special role being won is carried over. In the case of a game in which a bet amount of (3) is set, it is possible to draw the configuration of the winning special role to the winning line LN, but the prescribed number does not correspond to the winning special role. In the game in which the number of bets is set, the control is performed so that the constituent symbol of the winning special combination is not drawn into the winning line LN. For this reason, in the game in which the special role is won, the special role is not won if the prescribed number of bets corresponding to the special role being won is not set. . Thereby, in the gaming state RT1 in which the winning of the specific special role (BB1) is carried over, the player selects the three bets (the first bet) and plays the game. Even if no winning combination is won, the particular special combination (BB1) does not win and the gaming state can be maintained at RT1.

  One game is completed by stopping all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and a predetermined combination of winning symbols is stopped on the winning line LN as a display result on each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. In this case, a prize is generated, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player according to the prize and added to the credit. When the number of credits reaches the upper limit (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid directly from the medal payout port 9 (see FIG. 1). When the combination of symbols accompanied by the transition of the gaming state (in this embodiment, RT0, RT1, RT2, BB1, BB2) stops on the payline LN as a display result of each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. The game state is shifted to a game state according to the combination of symbols.

  In this embodiment, the game starts when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in a state where the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, and ends when all the reels stop. One unit of control (game control) for executing the game is started when all controls accompanying the end of the previous game are completed, and when all controls accompanying the end of the game are completed. finish.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the type of a winning combination (hereinafter referred to as a winning combination) is determined according to a game state, and does not require a small combination with payout of medals and a setting of the number of bets. In addition, there are a re-game combination in which a re-game that enables the next game to be started is provided, and a special combination with a transition to a game state (special state) advantageous to the player. Hereinafter, the small role and the replaying role are also collectively referred to as a general role. In order for the winning of each combination determined according to the game state to occur, it is necessary to win the internal lottery and set the winning flag of the combination. In the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not to permit winning of each of the above-mentioned roles before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived (specifically, the specified number of reels 2L, 2C, and 2R). When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected with the bet amount set), the determination is made using a random number.

  Note that among the winning flags of each role, the winning flags of the small role and the replaying role are valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and are invalid in the next game. The flag is valid until the combination of the permitted combinations is completed, and is invalid in the game in which the combination of the permitted combinations is completed. In other words, once the special combination winning flag is won, even if the combination of combinations allowed by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. Has become.

  In the internal lottery, when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode (for example, the order of the stop operation, the operation timing), it is more advantageous than when the stop operation is performed in another operation mode. Roles, re-playing roles (hereinafter sometimes referred to as navigation target roles) can be won. In the navigation target combination, for example, when a stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode, a role that is a more advantageous stop mode than in a stop mode that is stopped when a stop operation is performed in another operation mode, In addition, a role in which when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode that is predetermined is higher than when the stop operation is performed in another operation mode is more advantageous than when the stop operation is performed in another operation mode. Further, the advantageous stop mode includes not only a stop mode involving the provision of medals, but also a stop mode involving a transition to an advantageous game state, a stop mode for avoiding a transition to an adverse game state, and the like.

  The main control unit 41 executes navigation information for notifying the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result by the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12. Control can be performed during an assist time (AT) that is a possible notification period. When the right to be controlled by the AT is given to the player, the main control unit 41 starts control of the AT and controls the AT. Then, in the case where the AT is controlled, by winning the navigation target combination, the navigation notification is executed, and the operation modes of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that are advantageous to the player (for example, the pressing order, The operation timing and the like are notified using the game auxiliary display 12, and a command capable of specifying an operation mode that is advantageous for the player is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, so that the operation mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display. A navigation effect to be notified is executed using 51 or the like. By operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R in the operation mode informed by the navigation notification and the navigation effect, it is possible to reliably win the navigation target role that has been won by the internal lottery.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 includes the game auxiliary display 12 capable of displaying the number of paid out medals, an error code, and navigation information, and uses the game auxiliary display 12 in controlling the navigation notification. Although the configuration is such that the navigation information is notified by using a dedicated display capable of displaying only the navigation information, the navigation information may be notified using the dedicated display in the control of the navigation notification.

[About the medal selector]
The structure of the medal selector 29 arranged inside the front door 1b will be described with reference to FIG. In the following description, the state in which the medal selector 29 is viewed from the back side of the front door 1b will be described as the front side of the medal selector 29.

  The medal selector 29 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape as shown in FIG. 4, and an inflow port 141 through which medals can flow into the main body is provided on the upper side wall of the main body of the medal selector 29. An outlet 142 through which medals can flow out of the inside of the main body to the outside of the hopper tank 34a is provided on the left side wall of the main body, and a medal payout port is provided on the lower side wall of the main body. A discharge port 143 capable of discharging medals to the outside on the 9th side is provided. Further, inside the main body of the medal selector 29, there is formed a medal flow-down channel having a substantially L-shape in a front view communicating from the inflow port 141 to the outflow port 142. As shown in FIGS. 4 (b) and 4 (c), the side wall of the medal flow-down flow path is inclined from the lower side to the upper side such that the upper end of the flowing-down medal is inclined forward from the lower end. I have. In addition, a medal flow-down flow path that is substantially S-shaped in a front view and that communicates from the inflow port 141 to the discharge port 143 is formed. Hereinafter, of the medal flow paths inside the main body of the medal selector 29, the flow path on the inlet 141 side is the medal inflow path 29a, the flow path on the outlet 142 side is the medal receiving flow path 29b, and the medal flow path on the discharge port 143 side. The channel is referred to as a medal return channel 29c.

  In the medal selector 29, the authenticity (shape, size, thickness, etc.) of the inserted medal is determined. After the authentic medal flows from the inlet 141, the main body of the medal selector 29 is determined. After flowing down the inner medal inflow channel 29a and the medal receiving channel 29b and passing through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the detected medal sensors 31a to 31c detect the outgoing medal sensors 31a to 31c. Spilled out of. The medals are guided to the hopper tank 34a via a medal chute 142a (not shown). On the other hand, the false medals flow into the medal return flow path 29c during the flow of the medal inflow flow path 29a after flowing from the inflow port 141, flow down the medal return flow path 29c, and flow out of the discharge port 143. You. Then, the medals are returned to the lower plate from the medal payout port 9 (see FIG. 1) via a medal return passage (not shown) provided below the medal selector 29.

  Also, at the confluence of the medal inflow channel 29a, the medal receiving channel 29b, and the medal return channel 29c, the channel switching solenoid 30 (see FIG. 3) provided on the front side of the main body of the medal selector 29 is excited. In cooperation, before the medals flowing down the medal inflow channel 29a flow into the medal receiving channel 29b, the medals are forcibly dropped downward from the medal inflow channel 29a and the medals are returned. A flow path switching plate 147 for flowing into the flow path 29c is provided swingably.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (c), the flow path switching plate 147 opens the lower side of the medal inflow flow path 29a in a state where the flow path switching solenoid 30 is not excited, that is, in a state where reception of medals is not permitted. It is possible to swing so that the medal inflow channel 29a and the medal return channel 29c communicate with each other. Further, in a state in which the flow path switching solenoid 30 is excited, that is, in a state in which the reception of medals is permitted, as shown in FIG. By swinging in the direction A), the upper end surface of the flow path switching plate 147 forms the bottom surface of the medal inflow path 29a, and the medal inflow path 29a is closed with the lower side of the medal inflow path 29a closed. And the medal return flow path 29c are configured to be swingable such that they do not communicate with each other. With such a configuration, in a state where the flow path switching solenoid 30 is excited, medals flowing from the inflow port 141 and flowing down the medal inflow flow path 29a flow down along the upper end surface of the flow path switching plate 147, It flows into the medal receiving channel 29b and flows out from the outlet 142.

  An inlet sensor 26 for detecting passage of medals flowing from the inlet 141 is provided upstream of the medal inflow passage 29a, and an outlet 142 is provided downstream of the medal receiving passage 29b. Inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c for detecting the passage of the ejected medals are provided.

  Out of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the inserted medal sensors 31a and 31c pass the medal when the light receiving unit detects the interruption of the light from the light emitting unit when the medal passes between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit. The inserted medal sensor 31b is a physical sensor that detects the passage of medals by detecting the operation of the movable piece 180 that operates in conjunction with the passage of medals by the detector 183. Hereinafter, the inserted medal sensor 31a may be referred to as inserted medal sensor 1, the inserted medal sensor 31b may be referred to as inserted medal sensor 2, and the inserted medal sensor 31c may be referred to as inserted medal sensor 3. Further, a range in which the passing of medals is detected by the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c may be referred to as a detection range A.

  Next, the configuration of the inserted medal sensor 31b, which is a physical sensor, will be described. A movable piece 180 of the inserted medal sensor 31b is provided on the side wall of the medal selector 29 at a lower portion on the downstream side of the medal receiving flow path 29b so as to be able to come and go in the medal receiving flow path 29b. In addition, a detector 183 is provided at a position corresponding to the movable piece 180 outside the medal receiving channel 29b. In the detector 183, a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit are provided in the detecting unit 183a. The movable piece 180 is provided at the end of the movable piece 180 by retreating the tip 180b of the movable piece 180 from the inside of the medal receiving flow path 29b when the medal passes through the medal receiving flow path 29b. The detected part 180a is caused to enter between the light projecting part and the light receiving part of the detecting part 183a, and the light emitted from the light projecting part to the light receiving part is blocked. Passage is detected. On the other hand, when the medals are not passing through the medal receiving flow path 29b, the movable piece 180 is urged so that the distal end portion 180b of the movable piece 180 projects into the medal receiving flow path 29b. In this state, the detected portion 180a of the movable piece 180 does not enter between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the detecting portion 183a, and may block light emitted from the light emitting portion of the detecting portion 183a to the light receiving portion. Since there is no medal, the passage of the medal is not detected by the detector 183.

[About memory area and program of main control unit]
The main control unit 41 includes a ROM 41b and a RAM 41c having a memory area for storing predetermined programs and data.

  FIG. 5 is an address map of a program / data area in the ROM 41b and an available area in the RAM 41c. As shown in FIG. 5A, the program / data area in the ROM 41b includes a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, a game data area in which game data used by the game program is stored, It includes a use area 1, a non-game program area in which a non-game program not related to the progress of the game is stored, a non-game data area in which non-game data used by the non-game program is stored, and an unused area 2. .

  The progress of the game means to advance a series of processes constituting the game, and in the case of a slot machine, setting a bet amount and starting the game, and starting the game and rotating the reels. Advancing a step of causing the reel to stop, deriving a display result, and giving a value such as a medal according to the display result.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, the usable area of the RAM 41c includes a game RAM area used as a work by the game program, a non-game RAM area used as a work by the non-game program, and an unused area 4. The game RAM area includes a special work, an important work, a general work, an unused area 3, and a game stack area in which a game program saves data. The non-game RAM area includes a game stack area. It includes an area that can be referenced by a program, an area that cannot be referenced by a game program, and a non-game stack area in which a non-game program saves data. In the present embodiment, the game stack area and the non-game stack area are individually provided in different areas. However, a configuration in which one stack area shared by the game program and the non-game program may be provided.

  The unused area 3 is an area in which neither the game program nor the non-game program is used, and is a surplus area with respect to the game RAM area having a predetermined capacity.

  The unused area 4 is an area of 16 bytes or more in which neither the game program nor the non-game program is used. Since the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are allocated to areas that are not continuous across the unused area 4, the game RAM area used by the game program related to the progress of the game and the non-game RAM area The non-game RAM area used by the game program can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

  Hereinafter, the game program area, the game data area, and the game RAM area may be collectively referred to as a game area, and the non-game program area, the non-game data area, and the non-game RAM area may be collectively referred to as a non-game area. . The unused area 1 and the unused area 2, the unused area 3 and the unused area 4 may be collectively referred to as an unused area.

[About instructions used by the program]
The program executed by the main control unit 41 includes a main routine for managing the progress of the entire program, and a subroutine called during the execution of another program.

  Further, call instructions for causing the main control unit 41 to call and execute a program stored in the program / data area include a CALL instruction, a CALLV instruction, an RST instruction, and the like.

  The CALL instruction is an instruction to call and execute a subroutine stored at an address designated in a main routine or a subroutine. When calling the subroutine by the CALL instruction, the main control unit 41 stores the address of the caller in the stack area, calls and executes the subroutine stored at the specified address. Then, after the subroutine ends, the process returns to the address of the caller stored in the stack area, that is, the main routine or the subroutine program of the caller who has executed the CALL instruction.

  The CALL instruction includes a normal CALL instruction and a CALLV instruction which is a special CALL instruction. A normal CALL instruction is an instruction that specifies both an upper address and a lower address and specifies an address based on the specified upper address and lower address to call a subroutine, whereas the CALLV instruction uses only the lower address. By designating the subroutine, the subroutine is specified by specifying an address based on an upper address previously set in the vector table area of the ROM 41b and the specified lower address, and the subroutine is called. Can be called.

  The RST instruction is an instruction for calling a subroutine stored at a specific address corresponding to a specified value to execute by designating a value corresponding to a plurality of predetermined specific addresses. A subroutine can be called with a smaller amount of data than an instruction or a CALLV instruction. When calling the subroutine by the RST instruction, the main control unit 41 stores the address of the caller in the stack area, calls and executes the subroutine stored at the specific address corresponding to the designated value. Then, after the subroutine ends, the process returns to the address of the caller stored in the stack area, that is, the main routine or subroutine of the caller who has executed the RST instruction.

  The jump instruction is an instruction for moving to a program stored at an address specified in a main routine or a subroutine. The main control unit 41 moves to the program stored at the address specified by the jump command, and executes the destination program. In this case, unlike the CALL instruction or the RST instruction, even if the program after the movement ends, the program does not return to the source program.

  A subroutine frequently used among the game programs stored in the ROM 41b is stored in a region of the game program region of the ROM 41b where the start address is a specific value (for example, 00H). On the other hand, in the vector table area of the ROM 41b, a specific value is set as an upper address of a subroutine called by the CALLV instruction. Then, when calling the subroutine in which the upper address of the top address becomes the specific value, the main control unit 41 specifies only the lower address using the CALLV instruction, thereby changing the specific value set in the vector table area as the upper address. Then, the lower address specified as the lower address is specified, and the subroutine stored at the combined upper and lower addresses is called and executed. For this reason, an upper address constituting a part of an address used when calling a particularly frequently used subroutine in the game program is set in the vector table in advance as a specific value, and based on the specific value set in the vector table. Address, the subroutine can be called with a smaller amount of data as compared with a normal CALL instruction for calling a program by designating both the upper address and the lower address. It is possible to reduce waste of a program for specifying an address.

  In this embodiment, the head of the subroutine of the game program is stored in the vector table area of the ROM 41b used by the CALLV instruction and the specific address area of the ROM 41b used by the RST instruction. Since it is possible to call a subroutine with a smaller amount of data as compared to the CALL instruction, the use of the CALLV instruction or the RST instruction in the game program makes it possible to reduce the data capacity of the game program. I have. The head of the subroutine of the game program is stored in the vector table area and the specific address area of the ROM 41b, and the head of the non-game program is not stored. The non-game program is executed by the CALLV instruction and the RST instruction. Is not called, and the reduction of the data capacity of the game program is not hindered.

  A particularly frequently used subroutine among the non-game programs stored in the ROM 41b is stored in an area of the non-game program area of the ROM 41b where the start address is a specific value, and a CALLV instruction is stored in a vector table area of the ROM 41b. By setting a specific value as an upper address of a subroutine to be called in the subroutine, and when the main control unit 41 calls a subroutine in which the upper address of the leading address has a specific value, only the lower address is specified by using the CALLV instruction. , The subroutine can be called with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal CALL instruction that calls a program by specifying both the upper address and the lower address. When calling It is possible to reduce the waste of program for specifying the address.

  Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the upper address used when calling by the CALLV instruction is set in a specific register of the main control unit 41 instead of the vector table area.

  In addition to the CALLV instruction, a part of the address is specified by using a value stored in a vector table area, a value set in a specific register, and the like, and by specifying the remaining part of the address, With a configuration using a special CALL instruction capable of specifying the storage address of the subroutine, it is possible to reduce waste of a program for specifying an address when calling a subroutine. Also, an identification value having a smaller data amount than an address is assigned to each of a plurality of areas constituting the vector table area, and a storage address of a subroutine is set to each of the plurality of areas, and the identification value is specified to specify the identification value. Even with a configuration using a special CALL instruction capable of specifying a storage address of a subroutine stored in an area corresponding to a value, it is possible to reduce waste of a program for specifying an address when calling a subroutine. .

  The main control unit 41 is activated by the occurrence of a system reset by input of a system reset signal, a WDT reset by a WDT (watchdog timer, not shown), and an illegal access reset described above. The value set in the area, that is, the upper address of the subroutine of the CALLV instruction and the start address of the timer interrupt processing (main) are values indicating the area where the program or the like is actually stored in the program area, or FFFFH ( (A value set in an unused vector table area), and if the value set in the vector table area is neither a value indicating the area outside the area where the program is set nor FFFFH, activation is performed. Processing that is not originally intended due to the occurrence of interrupts, etc. There can be prevented in advance that would be executed.

  An LD instruction is included as a read instruction for causing the main control unit 41 to read data stored in the program / data area. The LD instruction is an instruction for reading data stored at an address specified in a main routine or a subroutine into a specified register. The main control unit 41 reads the data stored at the address specified by the LD instruction, and stores the read data in the register specified by the LD instruction.

  The LD instruction includes a normal LD instruction and an LDQ instruction which is a special LD instruction. The normal LD instruction is an instruction for reading data stored in a specific area of the ROM 41b or the RAM 41c by the upper address and the lower address specified by specifying both the upper address and the lower address, whereas the LDQ instruction is Specifies an address based on an upper address previously set in a special register (Q register) and a lower address specified in a special register (Q register) in the internal function register area of the above-described RAM 41c by designating only the lower address, and stores the address in the ROM 41b or the RAM 41c. An instruction to read data stored in a specific area and store the read data in a specified register. It is possible to store predetermined data in a predetermined register with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal LD instruction. It becomes possible.

  When reading data stored in a specific area of the ROM 41b or the RAM 41c in the main routine or subroutine, all addresses (upper part and lower part) indicating the specific area are read by using an LDQ instruction which is a special LD instruction. Instead of specifying, it is possible to specify only the lower part of the address and read the data in the specific area. By using the LDQ instruction, it is possible to read data with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal LD instruction that reads out data by specifying both the upper address and the lower address, and specifies the address when reading data Waste of a program for performing the program can be reduced.

  Further, among the game data stored in the game RAM area of the RAM 41c, particularly frequently used game data is stored in an area of the game RAM area where the top address is a specific value, and the specific value is stored in a special register ( (Q register) is set as the upper address of the game data, and when the main control unit 41 reads the game data, by specifying only the lower address using the LDQ instruction, the game data is read out. A game data can be read with a smaller amount of data as compared with a normal LD instruction for reading data by specifying both an address and a lower address, and a program for specifying an address when reading these game data is provided. Waste can be reduced.

  Further, the main control unit 41 can change a value set in a special register (Q register) in a main routine or a subroutine. In the setting, a special register (Q register) is set with a specific value indicating a head address of game data frequently used especially by a game program. When a non-game program is called from a game program, the value set in a special register (Q register) is saved, and when the game program is restored, the value set in a special register (Q register) is saved. It is set again to the value that was used. Thus, when the game program is being executed, a specific value indicating the head address of game data frequently used by the game program is set in a special register (Q register). Game data that is frequently used can be read using the LDQ instruction.

  It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which an upper address used for reading with an LDQ instruction as a special LD instruction is set in a predetermined storage area other than a special register (for example, a Q register), for example, a vector table area. A part of the address is specified by using a value stored in a predetermined storage area such as, for example, and a special LD instruction that can specify the storage address of data by specifying the remaining part of the address by a program is used. With the configuration, it is possible to reduce waste of a program for designating an address when reading data. Also, for example, by assigning an identification value having a data amount smaller than an address to each of a plurality of areas constituting the vector table area, setting a storage address of data in each of the plurality of areas, and specifying the identification value. Even in a configuration using a special LD instruction capable of specifying a storage address of data stored in an area corresponding to an identification value, it is possible to reduce waste of a program for specifying an address when reading data. Can be.

  In the present embodiment, the same value as the value used in the specific program is stored in the Q register as the specific value, but a value different from the value used in the specific program may be stored. For example, when a non-special program is called, a value different from a value used in the specific program as a specific value in the Q register, and a value of a head address of a storage area storing frequently used data in the non-game program By using the LDQ instruction when calling data in a non-specific program, the data capacity of the non-specific program can be reduced.

  The game program is a program related to the progress of the game, and is a program for executing a process that hinders the progress of the game unless a process based on the program is executed. On the other hand, the non-game program is a program that is not related to the progress of the game. Even if the non-game program is called from the game program and returns to the game program without executing the processing based on the program, the game can be advanced. This is a program for executing processing.

  In the game program, any of the above-mentioned CALL instruction and LD instruction including a special CALL instruction, such as a CALLV instruction, an RST instruction, and a special LD instruction, an LDQ instruction, may be used. And a subroutine can be called by specifying an address, and specific game data and non-game data in the ROM 41b and the RAM 41c can be read by using a special LD instruction.

  In the non-game program, a normal CALL instruction is used for the above-mentioned CALL instruction, but a special CALL instruction, a CALLV instruction, is not used. While the subroutine is sometimes called, the subroutine is not called using a special CALL instruction, so that the game program area in the ROM 41b is not accessed by the non-game program.

  In the non-game program, a normal LD instruction and a special LD instruction, that is, an LDQ instruction may be used as the above-mentioned LD instruction. It is possible to read the subroutine and data using a special LD instruction.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the head of the subroutine of the game program is stored in the vector table area and the specific address area of the ROM 41b used by the special CALL instruction and the RST instruction. It is possible to call a game program by using a special CALL instruction. When it is possible to call only the game program by the special CALL command in this way, the special CALL command is used by the non-game program, so that the game program is called by the non-game program. May be performed, or game data may be rewritten by an unintended game program. On the other hand, by calling the program by the normal CALL instruction without using the special CALL instruction by the non-gaming program, the game program is unintentionally called by not using the vector table area and the area of the specific address. Progress can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the LDQ instruction, which is a special LD instruction, specifies a game RAM area using a specific value stored in a special register (Q register) and reads out predetermined game data. By using a special LD instruction even for a non-specific program, game data can be easily read while reducing the data capacity of the non-specific program.

  Note that the LDQ instruction, which is a special LD instruction, can specify a game RAM area using a specific value stored in a special register (Q register) and read out predetermined game data. However, when reading a game data by a special LD instruction, if a specific value of a special register (Q register) is damaged, the game RAM area cannot be normally specified, and unintended data may be lost. There is a risk of being read. On the other hand, by reading the data by the normal LD instruction without using the LDQ instruction which is a special LD instruction by the non-gaming program, the specific value is damaged when switching from the gaming program to the non-gaming program. Even in this case, since the game RAM area is specified and the data is read from the non-game program, unintended data can be prevented from being read.

  In the present embodiment, as an instruction executable by the main control unit 41, a save instruction for saving by saving a register value provided in the main control unit 41 in a stack area of the RAM 41c indicated by the stack pointer SP in a predetermined order, and The value of the register saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c by the save instruction is sequentially read from the stack area in the reverse order of the save order, and is set in the register corresponding to the order, so that the corresponding register is read. And a return instruction for returning the state to the state at the time of being saved by the save instruction.

  The save instruction stores a first save instruction (PUSH ALL) for saving the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 to the stack area of the RAM 41c, and an operation result among all the registers included in the main control unit 41. And a second save instruction (PUSH AF) for saving the value of the flag register to the stack area of the RAM 41c. The first save instruction is an instruction requiring a 2-byte program capacity, and the second save instruction is an instruction requiring a 1-byte program capacity. By executing the save instruction in the game program, the value of the register can be saved in the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the game program, and executing the save instruction in the non-game program. Thus, the value of the register can be saved in the non-game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the non-game program.

  The return instruction includes a first return instruction (POP ALL) for setting and returning a value saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c for all the registers included in the main control unit 41, and all registers included in the main control unit 41. And a second return instruction (POP AF) for setting a value saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c and restoring the flag register in which the operation result is stored. The first return instruction is an instruction requiring a 2-byte program capacity, and the second return instruction is an instruction requiring a 1-byte program capacity. By executing the return instruction in the game program, it is possible to call the value of the register saved from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the game program and set and return to the corresponding register. By executing the return instruction in the non-game program, the value of the register saved from the non-game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the non-game program is called, and It is possible to set and return.

[Relationship between game area and non-game area]
As shown in FIG. 6, the main CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 calls the non-game program in the process based on the game program and executes the process based on the non-game program. It returns to the processing based on.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the main CPU 41a executes the processing based on the game program with reference to the game data in the game data area and uses the game RAM area as a work when executing the processing based on the game program in principle. Then, it is possible to refer to and update the contents of the game RAM area. In addition, when executing the processing based on the non-game program in principle, the main CPU 41a executes the processing based on the non-game program with reference to the game data in the non-game data area and uses the non-game RAM area as a work. , It is possible to refer to and update the contents of the non-game RAM area.

  In executing the processing based on the game program, the main CPU 41a does not refer to the non-game data area and does not update the non-game RAM area, but can refer to the non-game RAM area. In performing the process based on the non-game program, the game data area is not referred to and the game RAM area is not updated, but the game RAM area can be referred to.

  In addition, the processing based on the game program can refer only to a specific area (for example, an error flag setting area indicating abnormality detection) of the non-game RAM area necessary for the game program. In the processing based on the game RAM area, only a specific area required for the non-game program (for example, an internal winning flag setting area, a game state setting area, an RT setting area, and the like) can be referred to. In addition, a specific area in the non-game RAM area where processing based on the game program can be referred to, and a specific area in the game RAM area where processing based on the non-game program can be referred to may be assigned to consecutive address areas. Although preferred, a configuration in which a part or the whole is allocated to a discontinuous address area may be used.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a game program area in which a game program relating to the progress of a game is stored, a game data area in which game data referred to by the game program is readablely stored, and work data referred to by the game program. Are stored in a readable and writable manner, a non-game program area which is a program called by the game program, and stores a non-game program irrespective of the progress of the game, and a non-game which is referred to by the non-game program. Since a non-game data area in which data is stored in a readable manner and a non-game RAM area in which work data referenced by the non-game program is stored in a readable and writable manner are separately allocated, a game program, Game data and game program work data, Game program, the workpiece data of the non game data and non-game program, can be easily identified according to a difference in the storage area.

  Also, by dividing the game program area and the game data area from the non-game program area and the non-game data area, the area occupied in the ROM 41b can be compactly managed according to each function. It becomes even easier to identify the relevant data.

  Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to refer to the non-game RAM area when executing the game program, and to refer to the game RAM area when executing the non-game program. In executing the game program, the data used by the non-game program can be easily used, and in executing the non-game program, the data used by the game program can be easily used. On the other hand, when the game program is executed, it is impossible to update the non-game RAM area, and when the non-game program is executed, it is impossible to update the game RAM area. Does not affect the processing of the non-game program, and the non-game program does not affect the processing of the game program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the processing based on the game program can refer only to a specific area required for the game program (for example, an error flag setting area indicating abnormality detection) in the non-game RAM area. In the processing based on the non-game program, only a specific area (for example, an internal winning flag setting area, a game state setting area, an RT setting area, etc.) necessary for the non-game program in the game RAM area can be referred to. Since the data that can be referred to by the game program in the non-game RAM area and the data that can be referred to by the non-game program are limited to a specific area, the reference destination of the game program or the non-game program can be easily specified. be able to.

[About game status]
As shown in FIG. 7, the main control unit 41 sets the gaming state to any of RT0 (non-internal), RT1 (in BB1), RT2 (in BB2), and special state (BB1, BB2). It is possible to control. The gaming state is a state in which the type of the replaying game to be drawn by the internal lottery and the probability of the replaying game being won by the internal lottery are common. The probability of winning a re-gaming role differs for each gaming state (RT0, RT1, RT2, BB1, BB2), but the probability of winning a re-gaming role is uniform in the same gaming state.

  RT0 (non-internal) is a state in which the winning of the special combination (BB1, BB2) has not been carried over. When the slot machine 1 is started up in a state where the slot machine 1 is factory-shipped and a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which data relating to a gaming state is stored, the slot machine 1 is first controlled to a non-internal state. . Further, when the special states (BB1, BB2) are ended, the state is controlled to RT0. Then, in RT0, a special role is won by an internal lottery in the game of the RT0, and the special role is skipped, and is shifted to RT1 (inside BB1) or RT2 (inside BB2). Is terminated. In addition, in the game in which the special combination is won by the internal lottery, the special combination is won and the game is shifted to the special state (BB1, BB2).

  Further, in RT0 (during non-internal), it is possible to play a game by setting a bet number of two or three as a prescribed number. In a game in which two bets are set as a specified number, BB1 can be won as a special combination, while in a game in which three bets are set as a specified number, BB2 can be selected as a special combination. Has become. It is possible to shift to RT1 (within BB1) by playing the game with two bets at RT0 (inside of the inside), while it is possible to move to RT2 (within three insides of BB1) at RT0 by playing the game with three bets. (Inside of BB2).

  The predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the data on the winning status of the special combination (BB1, BB2) is stored is not initialized when shifting to the above-described setting change state. The winning situation before the start of the setting change state is inherited. In other words, if the setting is controlled to RT0 (non-internal medium) before the start of the setting change state, the control is continuously controlled to RT0 after the end of the setting change state, and RT1 or RT2 (non-internal medium) is set before the start of the setting change state. ), The control is continued to be the same RT1 or RT2 as before the start of the setting change state even after the end of the setting change state.

  Also, in RT0 (non-internal), the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in an operation mode advantageous to the player in the game within the predetermined period, so that the number of medals per game during the period is increased. While the payout rate exceeds 100%, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are not operated in an operation mode advantageous to the player, so that the payout rate of medals per game during the period does not exceed 100%. It has become. As will be described later, at RT0, an operation mode that is advantageous to the player is not notified, so that the payout rate of medals per game does not exceed 100%.

  RT1 (inside BB1) is a state in which the winning of the special role (BB1) is carried over. The process starts when the special combination (BB1) is won in the internal lottery at RT0 (non-internal), and ends when the carried over BB1 wins.

  In a game in which three bets are set as the specified number in RT1 (inside BB1), it is possible to shift a section state described later to an advantageous section that is advantageous to the player, while the specified number is set. In a game in which two bets are set, there is no transition to an advantageous section. Then, in the advantageous section, the control of the AT is performed so that an operation mode that is advantageous to the player can be notified. Thereby, in the RT1, the player is prompted to set a bet number of three as a specified number and play the game.

  In addition, in RT1 (inside of BB1), in the game within the predetermined period, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in an operation mode advantageous to the player, so that medals per game during the period are performed. The payout rate of medals per game does not exceed 100% during the period because the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are not operated in an operation mode advantageous to the player while the payout rate of the game exceeds 100%. In the period in which the operation mode advantageous to the player is notified, the payout rate of medals per game exceeds 100%, while in the period in which the operation mode advantageous to the player is not notified. The payout rate of medals per game does not exceed 100%. In addition, in the case of RT1 (inside BB1), the probability that the small win will be won in the internal lottery is the same as the probability of RT0 (inside of non-internal), while the predetermined replaying role (in this embodiment, the replaying The probability that the role will win in the internal lottery is set higher than that of RT0, and RT1 is in an advantageous state compared to RT0.

  In addition, as described above, the special combination (BB1) can win in a game in which the specified number of bets (two) is set equal to the specified number in the game that triggered the special combination, In a game in which a specified number of bets (three) is set which is different from the specified number in the game which triggered the special role, no prize is won, and once a transition is made to RT1, By setting the bet number of three as the prescribed number and playing the game, the special combination (BB1) does not win and the RT1 is continued. Further, in a game in which two bets are set as a specified number in RT1 as described later, the probability of being unsuccessfully won without any winning in the internal lottery is 0. It is difficult to win the winning BB1. As a result, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game is controlled to RT1 (inside of BB1) in most of the game, so that it is assumed that the game is controlled to RT1 and the set value (in the present embodiment, , 1 to 6), it is determined whether or not to control the AT at RT1, for example, whether or not to control the AT, so that the payout rate of medals according to each of the set values becomes a value determined according to each set value. By setting the winning probability of the AT lottery and the like, the payout rate of medals according to the set value is set. It is designed so that the payout rate of medals is appropriate at RT1 (inside BB1).

  In addition, since the payout rate of medals is set in accordance with the set value on the premise that the payout rate is controlled to RT1 (inside of BB1), the payout rate of medals is controlled in a game state other than RT1. Since the rate may deviate from the payout rate as designed, it is preferable to control the payout rate to RT1 as much as possible. For this reason, in this embodiment, the recommended operation mode recommended for the player and the special operation mode recommended for the player so that the player can easily shift to RT1 in a game state (RT0, RT2, BB1, BB2) other than RT1 (inside BB1). The operation mode for winning the role (BB1) is different. That is, as long as the player performs the stop operation in the recommended operation mode at RT1, the special combination (BB1) is not won.

  RT2 (inside BB2) is a state in which the winning of the special role (BB2) is carried over. The process starts when the special combination (BB2) is won in the internal lottery in RT0 (non-internal) and ends when the carried over BB2 wins.

  As described above, the special role (BB2) can be won in a game in which the specified number of bets (three) is set equal to the specified number in the game that triggered the special role, while the special role can be won. In a game in which a specified number of bets (two) different from the specified number in the game which triggered the winning of the role is set, no prize is won. By setting the bet amount and playing the game, it is possible to win the winning BB2 and shift to the special state (BB2).

  In RT2 (inside of BB2), in the game in which any of two or three bets is set as the specified number, the section state is not shifted to the advantageous section, and RT2 is ended. Then, it is urged to shift to RT1. As a result, the game is not played as much as possible in a game state other than the RT1 on which the setting value in the slot machine 1 is set as described above, and the payout rate of the medals becomes the payout rate as designed. ing.

  In RT2 (inside of BB2), it is possible to win the winning BB2 in a game in which three bets are set as the specified number. RT2 is ended, and BB2 and RT0 are replaced. By transitioning to RT1 after that, it is possible to control the gaming state in which the payout rate of medals becomes the payout rate as designed.

  The special state includes BB1 controlled in accordance with the winning of the special combination BB1, and BB2 controlled in accordance with the winning of the special combination BB2. The special states (BB1, BB2) continue to the RB until a predetermined predetermined end condition (in this embodiment, the total payout number of medals exceeds a specified number (for example, 50)). Is a gaming state controlled by The RB is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than other gaming states (non-internal medium (RT0), internal medium (RT1, RT2)) by increasing the winning probability of the small role in the internal lottery, This is a game state in which a predetermined number of predetermined games are consumed during RB, or a predetermined type of combination (any type is acceptable) wins a predetermined number of times, whichever comes first. . In the RB controlled during BB1 and BB2, the special combination and the replaying game are excluded from the lottery by the internal lottery, so that the winning probability of the small combination is smaller than the state in which the small combination is not controlled by BB1 and BB2. It has a high probability (1 / 1.0) and the payout rate of medals per game exceeds 100%.

  The special state BB1 is started by winning the BB1 in the game in which the special role BB1 is won by the internal lottery of RT0 (non-internal), or by BB1 winning in RT1 (inside BB1), The process is terminated when a predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, the total payout number of medals in the special state exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 50)). The special state BB2 is started by winning the BB2 in the game in which the special role BB2 is won by the internal lottery of RT0 (non-internal), or by the BB2 winning in RT2 (inside of BB2). Then, a predetermined end condition may be satisfied (for example, the total number of paid-out medals in the special state may exceed a predetermined number (for example, 50)). May be terminated). After the end of the special states BB1 and BB2, both are shifted to RT0 (non-internal).

  In the present embodiment, the special state (BB1, BB2) is a game state controlled continuously to the RB, but the special state is a general game in the BB where the probability of winning the RB is increased by an internal lottery, The winning combination is constituted by the RB which is shifted by stopping the symbol combination of the RB on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. In the special state, the RB is controlled to one of the general game during BB and the RB. But it is good.

  Since the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is controlled by RT1 (inside BB1) in most of the game as described above, it is assumed that the slot machine 1 is controlled by RT1, and the set value (this embodiment) Then, it is determined whether or not to control the AT at RT1, for example, whether or not to control the AT, so that the payout rate of the medals according to 1 to 6) becomes a value determined according to each set value. By setting the winning probability of the AT lottery to be performed, etc., the payout rate of medals according to the set value is set. It is designed so that the payout rate of medals is appropriate at RT1 (inside BB1). When the payout rate of medals is controlled to RT1 at which the payout rate is appropriate, the state display LED 17 is controlled to be turned on. Thus, by checking the lighting state of the state display LED 17, it can be confirmed that the slot machine 1 is in a state where the payout rate of medals is appropriate.

  In the status display LED 17 provided in the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, a predetermined value (1) different from the initial value (0) is set in an output buffer of the status display LED 17 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Thus, the lighting state is controlled by the LED dynamic display processing of the timer interrupt processing.

  The main control unit 41 sets a predetermined value (1) in the output buffer of the status display LED 17 when it is determined that the special combination (BB1) has been won in the internal lottery processing that is included in the main processing described below and performs an internal lottery. By doing so, the state display LED 17 is controlled to be turned on at the start of the game in which the special combination (BB1) has been won. Then, when the winning special role (BB1) wins, the output buffer of the status display LED 17 is initialized to set the initial value (0), so that at the end of the game in which the special role (BB1) wins. The status display LED 17 is controlled to be turned off. When the special role (BB1) does not win at the end of the game and the winning is carried over, the state where the predetermined value (1) is set is maintained without initializing the output buffer of the state display LED17. In a state (RT1) in which the winning of the special combination (BB1) is carried over, the state display LED 17 is always maintained in a lighting state.

  Further, when the special combination (BB2) is won by the internal lottery, or when the special combination (BB2) is carried over, the main control unit 41 stores the predetermined value (1) in the output buffer of the status display LED 17. Without setting, the state in which the initial value (0) is set is maintained, and the state display LED 17 is controlled to be turned off.

  Further, when controlling the setting value currently set in the slot machine 1 to the setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed, the main control unit 41 outputs the output buffer of the state display LED 17 in the state before shifting to the setting confirmation state. When the predetermined value (1) is set in the output buffer of the status display LED 17, the status display LED 17 is maintained in the lighting state even during the period in which the setting is confirmed. Is to be done.

  In addition, the output buffer of the state display LED 17 and the information on the game state are not included in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c which is initialized when the state is shifted to the setting change state or when the advantageous section is ended. When the game mode is shifted to the setting change state or when the advantageous section is ended, the gaming state is controlled to RT1, a predetermined value (1) is set in the output buffer of the state display LED 17, and the state display LED 17 is set. When the lighting state is controlled, the game state is maintained at RT1 and the state display LED 17 is maintained in the lighting state even after the transition to the setting change state or the end of the advantageous section. Has become.

  As described above, when the specific special role (BB1) is won and carried over, the status display LED 17 is controlled to be turned on and the status is displayed, whereby the two bets (the second bet) are performed. Is set, it is notified that the winning of the specific special combination (BB1) to be subjected to the internal lottery is carried over. Further, once started, the status display is continued even if it is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Therefore, even if the state display is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, a specific special role ( It is possible to confirm that the winning of BB1) has been carried over.

  Further, in a game in which a specific special role (BB1) is won in the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 starts the state display before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective, and the special control in the game is performed. When the role (BB1) wins, the status display is ended, while when the special role (BB1) does not win in the game, the status display is continued. As a result, in the game in which the specific special role (BB1) is won by the internal lottery, the status display is started before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective. After confirming, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R can be operated. Further, when the special combination (BB2) is won, the state display is ended in the game, so that it is possible to immediately confirm that the state where the special combination (BB2) has been won is completed. .

  The information on the advantageous section, such as the output buffer of the section display LED 19, is included in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c which is initialized when the setting is changed to the setting change state or when the advantageous section is terminated. Since the output buffer of the LED 17 and the information on the game state are not included in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c which is initialized when the state is shifted to the setting change state or when the advantageous section is ended, the setting operation is performed. When the power supply is started in the state or when the power supply is started while the initialization operation is being performed, the advantageous section and the section display can be ended, while the gaming state RT1 is Since it is maintained, it is not necessary to perform an operation for setting the gaming state to RT1 every time the display of the advantageous section and the section is completed. .

[About Roles for Internal Lottery]
An internal lottery target combination which is a lottery target in the internal lottery performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The internal lottery target combinations include a plurality of internal lottery target combinations. Each internal lottery target role includes one or more winning combinations, and when one internal lottery target role is won in the internal lottery, it means that the winning combinations included in the internal lottery target role have been simultaneously won. .

  As shown in FIGS. 8 to 25, the internal lottery targets include replay 1A, replay 1B, replay 1C, replay 1D, replay 1E, replay 1F, replay 2, cherry 1, cherry 2, cherry 3, and chance replay 1. , Chance Replay 2, Watermelon, Common 1-Piece, Common 3-Piece, Common Multiple-Piece, Multiple Bell 123A, Multiple Bell 123B, Multiple Bell 123C, Multiple Bell 123D, Multiple Bell 132A, Multiple Bell 132B, multiple bell 132C, multiple bell 132D, multiple bell 213A, multiple bell 213B, multiple bell 213C, multiple bell 213D, multiple bell 231A, multiple bell 231B, multiple bell 231C, multiple bell 231D, multiple bell 312A, multiple bell 312B, multiple bell 312C, multiple bell 312D, multiple bell 321A, multiple bell 321B, multiple bell 21C, multiple bell 321D, three bell 123A, three bell 123B, three bell 123C, three bell 123D, three bell 132A, three bell 132B, three bell 132C, three bell 132D, three bell 213A, 3 bells 213B, 3 bells 213C, 3 bells 213D, 3 bells 231A, 3 bells 231B, 3 bells 231C, 3 bells 231D, 3 bells 312A, 3 bells 312B, 3 bells 312C, three bells 312D, three bells 321A, three bells 321B, three bells 321C, three bells 321D, BB1, BB2.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 to 19, among the internal lottery target roles, each of the roles other than BB1 and BB2 has a set value set in the slot machine 1 in a game in which a predetermined number of three bets is set. Regardless of (1-6), when the gaming state is RT0, RT1, and RT2, the lottery is performed. On the other hand, when the gaming state is BB1, BB2, the lottery is not performed. Further, among the internal lottery targets, BB1 is a set value (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1 and a controlled gaming state ( (RT0, RT1, RT2), the lottery is not performed. In the game in which three bets are set as the prescribed number, BB2 among the internal lottery targets is set to a game state of RT0 regardless of the set values (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1. When it is controlled, it becomes a target of internal lottery. When the gaming state is controlled to RT1, RT2, BB1, BB2 other than RT0, it is not subjected to internal lottery. Further, among the internal lottery targets, replay 1B is controlled regardless of the set values (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1 in a game in which three bets are set as the specified number. The probability of winning in the internal lottery differs depending on the gaming state (RT0, RT1, RT2). Further, in a game in which three bets are set as the specified number, the probability (non-winning) that no internal lottery target role is won in the internal lottery is determined by a set value (1 to 1) set in the slot machine 1. 6) and a predetermined probability greater than 0 regardless of the game state (RT0, RT1, RT2, BB1, BB2).

  As shown in FIGS. 20 to 21, among the internal lottery target roles, replay 1B, replay 1C, replay 1D, replay 1E, replay 1F, cherry 1, cherry 2, cherry 3, chance replay 1, chance replay 2, BB1, In a game in which two bets are set as the specified number, each of the roles except BB2 has a gaming state of RT0, RT1, RT2 regardless of the set values (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1. When the game state is BB1 or BB2, the lottery is not performed. Also, among the internal lottery targets, Replay 1B, Replay 1C, Replay 1D, Replay 1E, Replay 1F, Cherry 1, Cherry 2, Cherry 3, Chance Replay 1, and Chance Replay 2 have a prescribed number of two bets. In the set game, the lottery is not performed regardless of the set values (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1 and the game state (RT0, RT1, RT2) being controlled. In a game in which two bets are set as the prescribed number, BB1 among the internal lottery targets is set to a game state of RT0 regardless of the set values (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1. When it is controlled, it becomes a target of internal lottery. When the gaming state is controlled to RT1, RT2, BB1, BB2 other than RT0, it is not subjected to internal lottery. BB1 is a set value (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1 and a controlled gaming state (RT0, RT1, RT2) in a game in which two bets are set as a specified number. Regardless of the lottery, it is not eligible for lottery. Replay 1A among the internal lottery targets is controlled regardless of the set values (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1 in a game in which two bets are set as the specified number. The probability of winning in the internal lottery differs depending on whether the gaming state is non-internal (RT0) or internal (RT1, RT2). In a game in which two bets are set as the prescribed number, the probability that no internal lottery target role is won in the internal lottery (non-winning) is determined by the set value (1 to 1) set in the slot machine 1. 6) and the game state (RT0, RT1, RT2, BB1, BB2).

  As shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, a predetermined combination number is assigned to each of the internal lottery target combinations in advance. Replay 1A, Replay 1B, Replay 1C, Replay 1D, Replay 1E, Replay 1F, Replay 2, Cherry 1, Cherry 2, Cherry 3, Chance Replay 1, Chance Replay 2, Watermelon, Common 1 role, Common 3 role, A value in the range of 1 to 16 is assigned as each combination number of the common multiple combination. In addition, multiple bell 123A, multiple bell 123B, multiple bell 123C, multiple bell 123D, multiple bell 132A, multiple bell 132B, multiple bell 132C, multiple bell 132D, multiple bell 213A, multiple bell 213B, multiple bell 213C, multiple bell 213D, multiple bell 231A, multiple bell 231B, multiple bell 231C, multiple bell 231D, multiple bell 312A, multiple bell 312B, multiple bell 312C, multiple bell A value in the range of 17 to 40 is assigned to each of the role numbers of 312D, multiple bell 321A, multiple bell 321B, multiple bell 321C, and multiple bell 321D. Also, three bells 123A, three bells 123B, three bells 123C, three bells 123D, three bells 132A, three bells 132B, three bells 132C, three bells 132D, three bells 213A, three bells 213B, 3 bells 213C, 3 bells 213D, 3 bells 231A, 3 bells 231B, 3 bells 231C, 3 bells 231D, 3 bells 312A, 3 bells 312B, 3 bells 312C, 3 bells Values within the range of 41 to 64 are assigned as respective role numbers of 312D, three bells 321A, three bells 321B, three bells 321C, and three bells 321D. The role number of BB1 is 65, and the role number of BB2 is 66.

  Among the internal lottery targets, Replay 1A, Replay 1B, Replay 1C, Replay 1D, Replay 1E, Replay 1F, Replay 2, Cherry 1, Cherry 2, Cherry 3, Chance Replay 1, and Chance Replay 2 are each re-selected as a winning combination. In a game in which a game combination is included and these internal lottery target combinations are won, a re-game combination is won and a re-game is provided. Hereinafter, Replay 1A, Replay 1B, Replay 1C, Replay 1D, Replay 1E, Replay 1F, Replay 2, Cherry 1, Cherry 2, Cherry 3, Chance Replay 1, and Chance Replay 2 may be collectively referred to as a replay role. .

  Among the internal lottery target roles, the watermelon, common one role, common three role, and common multiple role each include a small role as a winning role, and the winning role included in the internal lottery target role that has been won is By winning, a predetermined number of medals (for example, one watermelon, one common one-role, three common three-role, and eight common multi-role portions) are paid out.

  In addition, multiple bell 123A, multiple bell 123B, multiple bell 123C, multiple bell 123D, multiple bell 132A, multiple bell 132B, multiple bell 132C, multiple bell 132D, multiple bell 213A, multiple bell 213B, multiple bell 213C, multiple bell 213D, multiple bell 231A, multiple bell 231B, multiple bell 231C, multiple bell 231D, multiple bell 312A, multiple bell 312B, multiple bell 312C, multiple bell The 312D, the multi-bell 321A, the multi-bell 321B, the multi-bell 321C, and the multi-bell 321D are provided with stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R in a predetermined operation mode (in this embodiment, the operation order) assigned to each role. Is operated, among the winning combinations included in each combination, an increasing combination in which medals of a number larger than the bet number (3) (eight in this embodiment) are paid out wins. By operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in an operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode, the reduction role in which medals of the number equal to or less than the bet number are paid out of the winning combinations included in the respective roles. It is a role that may win a prize, but may not win any prize. Therefore, multiple bells 123A, multiple bells 123B, multiple bells 123C, multiple bells 123D, multiple bells 132A, multiple bells 132B, multiple bells 132C, multiple bells 132D, multiple bells 213A, multiple bells Bell 213B, Bell 213C, Bell 213D, Bell 231A, Bell 231B, Bell 231C, Bell 231D, Bell 312A, Bell 312B, Bell 312C, Bell When the bell 312D, the multi-bell 321A, the multi-bell 321B, the multi-bell 321C, and the multi-bell 321D are won, it is determined whether or not the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in an operation mode according to the type of the winning combination. The expected value of the number of medals paid out can be changed.

  Hereinafter, multiple bell 123A, multiple bell 123B, multiple bell 123C, multiple bell 123D, multiple bell 132A, multiple bell 132B, multiple bell 132C, multiple bell 132D, multiple bell 213A, multiple bell 213B, multiple bell 213C, multiple bell 213D, multiple bell 231A, multiple bell 231B, multiple bell 231C, multiple bell 231D, multiple bell 312A, multiple bell 312B, multiple bell 312C, multiple bell 312D, multi-bell 321A, multi-bell 321B, multi-bell 321C, and multi-bell 321D may be collectively referred to as a multi-push order small combination.

  An operation mode in which, when one of the multiple-sheet pressing small wins is won, an increasing role among the winning combinations included in the multiple-sheet pressing small combination can be won, that is, an operation mode that is advantageous to the player is In the multi-bell 123A, the multi-bell 123B, the multi-bell 123C, and the multi-bell 123D, the left reel 2L is stopped first, the middle reel 2C is stopped second, and the right reel 2R is stopped third. The left reel 2L is the first in the multi-bell 132A, the multi-bell 132B, the multi-bell 132C, and the multi-bell 132D. , The right reel 2R is stopped second, and the middle reel 2C is stopped third (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as left and right middle stop operation). Bell 213B, In the case of the single-bell 213C and the multi-bell 213D, the operation in the operation order of stopping the middle reel 2C first, stopping the left reel 2L second, and stopping the right reel 2R third (hereinafter, center left / right stop) In the case of multiple bells 312A, multiple bells 312B, multiple bells 312C, and multiple bells 312D, the middle reel 2C is stopped first and the right reel 2R is stopped second. , An operation in the order of operation for stopping the left reel 2L third (hereinafter, also referred to as a middle right left operation). The multi-bell 231A, the multi-bell 231B, the multi-bell 231C, and the multi-bell 231D. Then, the right reel 2R is stopped first, the left reel 2L is stopped second, and the middle reel 2C is stopped third (hereinafter, may be referred to as right / left middle stop operation). Yes, In the multi-bell 321A, the multi-bell 321B, the multi-bell 321C, and the multi-bell 321D, the operation of stopping the right reel 2R first, stopping the middle reel 2C second, and stopping the left reel 2L third. (Hereinafter, may be referred to as right middle left stop operation).

  Also, three bells 123A, three bells 123B, three bells 123C, three bells 123D, three bells 132A, three bells 132B, three bells 132C, three bells 132D, three bells 213A, three bells 213B, 3 bells 213C, 3 bells 213D, 3 bells 231A, 3 bells 231B, 3 bells 231C, 3 bells 231D, 3 bells 312A, 3 bells 312B, 3 bells 312C, 3 bells 312D, three bells 321A, three bells 321B, three bells 321C, and three bells 321D are provided with stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R in a predetermined operation mode (in this embodiment, operation order) assigned to each role. Is operated, among the winning combinations included in each combination, the combination for which three medals are paid out wins, but stops in an operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode. When the switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, a winning combination of less than 3 medals may be won among the winning combinations included in each combination, but none of the winning combinations may be won. It is a certain role. For this reason, in a game in which three bets are set as the prescribed number, three bells 123A, three bells 123B, three bells 123C, three bells 123D, three bells 132A, three bells 132B, Three bell 132C, Three bell 132D, Three bell 213A, Three bell 213B, Three bell 213C, Three bell 213D, Three bell 231A, Three bell 231B, Three bell 231C, Three bell 231D, Three The three bells 312A, the three bells 312B, the three bells 312C, the three bells 312D, the three bells 321A, the three bells 321B, the three bells 321C, and the three bells 321D are selected according to the type of the winning role. The expected value of the number of medals to be paid out can be changed depending on whether or not the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in a corresponding operation mode.

  Hereinafter, three bells 123A, three bells 123B, three bells 123C, three bells 123D, three bells 132A, three bells 132B, three bells 132C, three bells 132D, three bells 213A, three bells 213B, 3 bells 213C, 3 bells 213D, 3 bells 231A, 3 bells 231B, 3 bells 231C, 3 bells 231D, 3 bells 312A, 3 bells 312B, 3 bells 312C, 3 bells The 312D, the three bells 321A, the three bells 321B, the three bells 321C, and the three bells 321D may be collectively referred to as a three-sheet pushing order small combination.

  In a game in which three bets are set as the prescribed number, when the three-button press wins, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in an operation mode in which the part for which three medals are paid out wins. Thereby, the player can play the game without reducing the medals.

  An operation mode in which, when one of the three-sheet pushing small role is won, a role in which three medals are paid out of the winning combinations included in the multiple-sheet pushing small combination, that is, for the player, An advantageous operation mode is a left middle right stop operation with three bells 123A, three bells 123B, three bells 123C, and three bells 123D, and three bells 132A, three bells 132B, and three bells 132C. In the three bell 132D, the left and right middle stop operation is performed. In the three bells 213A, the three bell 213B, the three bell 213C, and the three bell 213D, the middle left and right stop operation is performed. 312B, 3 bells 312C, and 3 bells 312D are middle, right, and left stop operations, and 3 bells 231A, 3 bells 231B, 3 bells 231C, and 3 bells 231D are middle right and left stop operations. There, the three Bell 321A, 3 sheets Bell 321B, 3 sheets Bell 321C, 3 sheets Bell 321D, is in the right-to-left stop operation.

  As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the main control unit 41 can shift a later-described game section to an advantageous section when a predetermined internal lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery. In a game in which two bets are set as the prescribed number, even if any of the internal lottery target combinations is won in the internal lottery, the game section is not shifted to the advantageous section. Further, in a game in which three bets are set as the prescribed number, an advantageous section non-shifting combination is performed by an internal lottery (in this embodiment, replay 1A, replay 1B, replay 1C, replay 1D, replay 1E, replay 1F , Replay 2), the game section is not shifted to the advantageous section, while the internal section draws the advantageous section shift (in this embodiment, Cherry 1, Cherry 2, Cherry 3, Chance Replay 1, Chance Replay) 2, watermelon, common 1-sheet combination, common 3-sheet combination, common multiple-sheet combination, multiple-sheet pushing combination, 3-sheet pushing combination), the game section is shifted to the advantageous section. I have.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 shifts the game section to the advantageous section by winning a predetermined internal lottery target in the internal lottery. A configuration may be adopted in which a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is performed in response to the winning of the target combination, and the process is shifted to an advantageous section by winning the lottery.

  As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub control unit 91 an internal winning command including group information that can specify the type of the internal lottery target role won in the internal lottery. The group information includes special role information that can specify the winning status of the special role and general role information that can specify the winning status of the general role. The special combination information of the group information is set to 0 when the special combination (BB1, BB2) has not been won in the internal lottery, set to 1 when the special combination BB1 has been won, and set to the special combination BB2. When winning, 2 is set. The general role information of the group information is, by internal lottery, replay 1A, replay 1B, replay 1C, replay 1D, replay 1E, replay 1F, replay 2, cherry 1, cherry 2, cherry 3, chance replay 1, chance replay 2, When one of the watermelon, common one-sheet role, common three-piece role, and common multiple-piece role has been won, the role number of the winning role is set, and the multiple-sheet pushing role is won by internal lottery. Is set, a common 17 is set, regardless of which of the roles included in the multiple-sheet pushing role is won. When the three-sheet pushing role is won in the internal lottery, three-sheet pushing is performed. Regardless of which winning combination included in the winning combination is won, a common 41 is set, and when no general winning is won in the internal lottery, 0 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the main control unit 41 transmits a test signal capable of specifying the role number of the internal lottery target role that has been won by the internal lottery to the test device connected to the slot machine 1. It is possible that the test signal includes special role information that can specify the winning status of the special role and general role information that can specify the winning status of the general role. The special role information is set to 0 when the special role (BB1, BB2) is not won in the internal lottery, and is set to 1 when the special role BB1 is won, and the special role BB2 is won. Is set to 2. The general role information sets the role number of the winning role when any internal lottery target role has been won in the internal lottery, and when no general role has been won in the internal lottery, 0 is set.

  The test apparatus is connected to the slot machine 1 and automatically performs a simulation test, so that medals in specific games (for example, 400 games, 1600 games, 6400 games, and 17600 games) in the slot machine 1 are performed. It is possible to calculate the payout rate between the specific games by summing up the total number of payouts and the total payout number, and to check whether or not the payout rate falls within a predetermined range. Device.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the main control unit 41 can control the AT to perform the navigation notification, and in a game in which two bets are set as the specified number, as described later. In a game in which the navigation information is not executed by not performing the processing related to the navigation information, while a predetermined number of bets is set as a predetermined number in a game in which a predetermined navigation target is won as described later, the navigation information is not executed. The navigation information may be executed by performing the processing. In a game in which a bet amount of three is set, for example, a common multi-prize role, a multiple-pusher role, and a three-pusher role are executed by internal lottery as navigation target roles, and a navigation report is executed. There is.

  Further, in the processing related to the navigation notification, the main control unit 41 controls the ball-out state to either the ball-out state A or the ball-out state B in which the AT is controlled as described later, and the internal lottery. In the case where a navigation target combination (common multiple-sheet combination, multiple-sheet pressing combination, three-sheet pressing combination) is elected at, it is possible to specify a stop mode advantageous to the player according to the navigation target combination. It is possible to transmit the navigation number to the sub-control unit 91, while the ball-out state is controlled to a state other than the ball-out state A and the ball-out state B and the AT is not controlled. If the navigation target combination has not been won in the internal lottery, it is possible to transmit to the sub-control unit 91 a navigation number for which a stop mode advantageous to the player cannot be specified.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, for example, in the case where the ball-out state is controlled to the ball-out state A, the main control unit 41 performs a navigation target role (common multiple sheets) included in the first group by the internal lottery. In a game in which a role other than a role and a multiple-sheet press) has been won and in a game in which no role has been won in the internal lottery, 0 is set as the navigation number, and the ball-out state is changed to the ball-out state A. In a game in which a navigation target role (common multiple-sheet role, multiple-sheet pushing order) included in the first group is won by the internal lottery, navigation is performed between 1 to 6 according to the selected navigation target role. Set as a number. Further, for example, when the ball-out state is controlled to the ball-out state B, the navigation target role included in the second group by the internal lottery (common multiple-sheet role, multiple-sheet pressing role, three-sheet pressing role) In the game in which a role other than the winning has been won and in the game in which none of the roles have been won in the internal lottery, while the navigation number is set to 0, the outgoing state is controlled to the outgoing state B, and the internal lottery is performed. In the game in which the navigation target combination (common multiple-sheet role, multiple-sheet pressing role, three-button pressing role) included in the second group is won, 1 to 6 are set as navigation numbers according to the selected navigation target role. Set. The navigation target role to which the navigation number that can specify the stop mode that is advantageous to the player is transmitted differs depending on whether the throwing state is the throwing state A or the throwing state B, Even if the controlled ball-out state is the ball-out state A or the ball-out state B in which the control of the AT is performed, a medal to be paid out according to whether the ball-out state is the ball-out state A or the ball-out state B. The expected number of sheets can be changed.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 performs a process related to the navigation notification to display a navigation display that can specify a stop mode that is advantageous to the player according to the navigation target role that has been won by the internal lottery. 12, it is possible to perform navigation notification for notifying a stop mode advantageous to the player. As shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, for example, when the payout state is controlled to the payout state A, the navigation target combination (common multiple-sheet combination, multiple-sheet pushing order) included in the first group by the internal lottery During the game in which a role other than the role) has been won and in the game in which none of the roles have been won in the internal lottery, the game assist display 12 is controlled to be turned off so that the navigation display is not displayed. In the game in which the ball-out state is controlled to the ball-out state A, and the navigation target roles (common multiple-sheet role, multiple-sheet pushing role) included in the first group are won by the internal lottery, the game assistance is provided. The display 12 is controlled to a predetermined lighting state (for example, “12”) to display a navigation display corresponding to the winning navigation target combination. Further, for example, when the ball-out state is controlled to the ball-out state B, the navigation target role included in the second group by the internal lottery (common multiple-sheet role, multiple-sheet pressing role, three-sheet pressing role) During the game in which other roles have been won and in the game in which none of the roles have been won in the internal lottery, the navigation assist display 12 does not display the navigation display, but the ball-out state is the ball-out state. B, and during the game in which the navigation target combination (common multiple-sheet combination, multiple-sheet pushing combination, 3-sheet pushing combination) included in the second group is won by the internal lottery, the game assistance display device 12, a navigation display corresponding to the navigation target combination is displayed.

[About Navi Notification and Navi Direction]
The mode of the navigation notification performed by the main control unit 41 and the mode of the navigation effect performed by the sub control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main control unit 41 performs the internal lottery during the predetermined game (from when the rotation of the reels is started to when the rotation of all the reels is stopped) during the process of performing the processing related to the navigation notification. By displaying the navigation display corresponding to the target combination on the game auxiliary display 12, it is possible to perform a navigation notification for notifying a stop mode advantageous to the player according to the navigation target combination. Further, the main control unit 41 can transmit a command including a navigation number capable of specifying a stop mode advantageous to the player to the sub control unit 91 at the start of a predetermined game for performing a process related to the navigation notification. It is possible.

  On the other hand, in a game in which a stop mode advantageous to a player can be specified based on a command received from the main control section 41, the sub control section 91 controls the liquid crystal display 51 or the like to provide a navigation effect for notifying the stop mode. It can be performed using:

  As shown in FIG. 26 (a), the game auxiliary display 12 includes two displays 12L and 12R capable of turning on / off the first to eighth segments, respectively, and the main control unit 41 displays the respective segments. It is a display that can be turned on. By controlling a predetermined segment of each of the indicators 12L and 12R to a lighting mode, a predetermined number (“0” to “9”), a symbol (for example, “−”, “.”, Etc.), and an alphabetic character (for example, “E”) ) Is displayed in one or two digits, thereby displaying a number of paid-out medals (not shown), an error code capable of specifying the type of error that has occurred, and a navigation display informing by the navigation notification. It is possible.

  As shown in FIG. 26B, during a game in which the navigation number is set to “1” by performing a process related to the navigation notification, the main control unit 41 sets a stop mode that is advantageous to the player in the middle left. During the game in which the navigation display 1 (display indicating "12" is displayed on the game assistance display 12) indicating that the operation is the right stop operation is displayed on the game assistance display 12, and the navigation number is set to "2". Displays a navigation display 2 (displaying "13" on the game auxiliary display 12) indicating that the stop mode advantageous to the player is the left and right middle stop operation on the game auxiliary display 12, and displays the navigation number. During the game in which “3” is set as the “3”, the navigation display 3 (display indicating “21” on the game auxiliary display 12) indicating that the stop mode advantageous to the player is the middle left / right stop operation is performed. Game assistance display During the game in which the navigation number is set to “4”, the navigation display 4 (“23” is displayed on the game assistance display 12) suggesting that the stop mode advantageous to the player is the middle right left stop operation. Is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and during the game in which the navigation number is set to "5", the navigation suggesting that the stop mode advantageous to the player is the right-left center stop operation. The display 5 (display indicating "31" on the game assistance display 12) is displayed on the game assistance display 12, and during a game in which "6" is set as the navigation number, a stop mode advantageous to the player is provided. A navigation display 6 (display indicating "32" on the game assistance display 12) indicating that the operation is a right middle left stop operation is displayed on the game assistance display 12.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6B, the sub control unit 91 is advantageous to the player during the game in which the navigation number “1” is specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41. The navigation image 1 (for example, “1” is displayed in the display area corresponding to the stop switch 8L in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51, and the stop switch 8C is indicated) During the game in which "2" is displayed in the corresponding display area and "3" is displayed in the display area corresponding to the stop switch 8R) on the liquid crystal display 51, and the navigation number "2" is specified. In, the navigation image 2 indicating that the stop mode advantageous to the player is the left and right middle stop operation is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and during the game in which the navigation number “3” is specified, A navigation image 3 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 indicating that the stop mode that is advantageous for the user is the middle / left / right stop operation, and during the game in which the navigation number “4” is specified, the stop mode that is advantageous for the player is The navigation image 4 indicating that the operation is the center right / left left stop operation is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and during the game in which the navigation number “5” is specified, the stop mode advantageous to the player is the right / left center stop operation. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and during the game in which the navigation number "6" is specified, the navigation that suggests that the stop mode advantageous to the player is the right, middle, and left stop operation. The image 6 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  In this embodiment, in the navigation notification, the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, which is advantageous to the player, is configured to notify the operation order (correct answering order) as an operation mode. A configuration that suggests the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that is advantageous to the player may be used, or a configuration that suggests a combination of the operation order and the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that is advantageous to the player may be used. For example, when the operation mode of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is a predetermined operation timing for a predetermined reel, the game auxiliary display 12 displays a symbol number or the like corresponding to the predetermined operation timing on the predetermined reel. It is possible to indicate the operation mode by displaying the image with the corresponding number or the like, or displaying the image of the symbol corresponding to the predetermined operation timing on the liquid crystal display 51 at the position corresponding to the predetermined reel. is there.

[About game section]
The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can control a game section to be either a normal section or an advantageous section.

  The normal section is a game section where the navigation notification is not performed, and is started when the next game is started after the advantageous section is completed. Thereafter, in the normal section, as described above, the bet number of three is set as the prescribed number, and in the game in which the gaming state is controlled to a game state other than the special state (BB1, BB2), the advantageous section transfer part is obtained by the internal lottery. The game is ended in the winning game. In a normal section, the section display LED 19 is always controlled to be turned off.

  The advantageous section is a game section where the navigation notification may be performed, and is a game section that is advantageous compared to the normal section because the navigation notification can be performed. In the advantageous section, in the game in which the betting number of three is set as a prescribed number in the normal section and the game state is controlled to a game state other than the special state (BB1, BB2), the advantageous section transfer role is won by the internal lottery. Is determined to shift to the advantageous section, and is started when the next game is started. Thereafter, the process ends when predetermined advantageous section end conditions (end conditions 1 to 3 described later) are satisfied. In the advantageous section, at the start of a game in which the medal payout rate (payout number / bet number) can exceed 100% by performing navigation notification first after the start of the advantageous section, the output buffer of the section display LED 19 is initially set in the output buffer. When a predetermined value (1) different from the value (0) is set and the section display LED 19 is controlled to be turned on, the section display for notifying that the section is controlled to the advantageous section is started. The output buffer of the section display LED 19 is included in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c which is initialized when the mode is shifted to the setting change state, when the advantageous section is ended, or the like, and when the mode is shifted to the setting change state. When the advantageous section is terminated, the output buffer of the section display LED 19 is initialized and set to an initial value (0), so that the section display LED 19 is controlled to be turned off and the section display is terminated. Has become.

  In the advantageous section, a predetermined navigation condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, the AT state described later is controlled, a bet number of 3 is set as a prescribed number, and the navigation target role is won by an internal lottery. Is performed), the navigation notification is performed, and the operation modes of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are advantageous for the player are notified.

  The main control unit 41 performs an AT lottery for determining whether or not to control the AT by winning the AT lottery target combination in the internal lottery while controlling to the advantageous section. Then, by winning the AT lottery, the state is shifted to a ball-out state (in this embodiment, a ball-out state B, a ball-out state C, etc.) in which AT control is performed. In the case where the control is performed so that the AT is controlled in the ball-out state, when the navigation target combination is won by the internal lottery, the control of the navigation notification (the control for displaying the navigation display on the game auxiliary display 12). , Control for transmitting a command capable of specifying a navigation number corresponding to the navigation display, etc.) to notify the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that are advantageous to the player. Is a game section that is more advantageous to the player than the normal section.

  The end condition of the advantageous section includes an end condition 1 that is satisfied when the number of games in the advantageous section (the number of advantageous section games) reaches the upper limit game number (in the present embodiment, 1500 games), and the net number of medals in the advantageous section. Is the prescribed number (in the present embodiment, 2395 (the maximum value (8) of the number of payouts in the slot machine 1 is subtracted from the upper limit of 2400, and the maximum number (three) used for setting the number of bets) is added. Is an end condition that can be satisfied without being based on the number of advantageous section games and the net number of medals, and is a predetermined arbitrary condition (for example, AT control is performed). An end condition 3 that is satisfied when the remaining number of AT games becomes 0) is included, and the advantageous section is ended when at least one of the end conditions 1 to 3 is satisfied.

  In the present embodiment, when the game section is controlled to the normal section, the predetermined advantageous section shift combination is won to win the game section, thereby shifting the game section to the advantageous section. When controlled in the normal section, the advantage section shift lottery target is won by the internal lottery, thereby performing the advantageous section shift lottery, and by winning in the advantageous section shift lottery, the game section is changed to the advantageous section. It may be configured to shift to.

  Control contents of various processes performed by the main control unit 41 executing the game program and the non-game program will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Initial setting process]
The startup process and the initialization process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. The startup process and the initialization process are subroutines included in the game program.

  When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the main control unit 41 starts up in a state where the timer interrupt is set to be prohibited by the occurrence of the reset, and performs various processes according to the program stored in the ROM 41b. After the activation, first, a start-time setting process included in the game program is performed to initialize all output ports 0 to 9, and an internal register included in the main control unit 41 is preset in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b. An initialization process included in the game program and initialized based on the built-in register initialization table is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the initial setting process is started in a state where the timer interrupt is prohibited. In the initial setting process, first, a predetermined area of the input port is referred to (Sa1), and the output is outputted from the power interruption detecting circuit 48. It is determined whether the power interruption detection signal is in the ON state (Sa2). When the power interruption detection signal is in the ON state, the process stands by until the power interruption detection signal is turned off. Thereafter, after the power supply voltage of the slot machine 1 becomes normal and the power failure detection signal is turned off, the parity of a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is calculated (Sa3), and a predetermined initial address is set in the stack pointer. (Sa4). Then, it is determined whether or not the parity calculated in the step of Sa3 is normal (Sa5). If the parity is normal, the fixed data for RAM destruction diagnosis set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c at the time of power failure is obtained. Then, based on the RAM destruction diagnosis fixed data, it is determined whether or not the storage contents of the RAM 41c have been destroyed (Sa7).

  When it is determined in step Sa5 that the parity is normal, and when the storage contents of the RAM 41c are diagnosed in step Sa7, the RAM 41c is stored in the RAM 41c based on the parity of the RAM calculated in step Sa3 and the result of the diagnosis in Sa7. It is determined whether there is any abnormality (Sa8). The case where the RAM 41c has an abnormality is a case where the parity is not normal or a case where it is diagnosed that the parity is normal but the storage content is abnormal.

  If there is an abnormality in the RAM 41c, the value of the flag register storing the operation result among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 is stored in the game stack area of the game RAM area by using the above-mentioned second save instruction. After saving by storing in a predetermined order (Sa9), the non-game RAM area initialization process included in the non-game program is called using the CALL instruction described above (Sa10).

  In the non-game RAM area initialization process, first, the value of the address indicated by the current stack pointer SP is determined from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program using the aforementioned LD instruction. It is read out, stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area, and evacuated. Then, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program is read from a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is set for a non-game program. Then, the values of all the registers (accumulator register, flag register, general-purpose register, index register, interrupt register, refresh register, program counter, etc.) provided in the main control unit 41 including the flag register are described using the first save instruction. Are saved in a predetermined order in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP. When the non-game RAM area initialization process included in the non-game program is called from the game program, the LD instruction is used when changing the stack pointer SP from the game program to the non-game program. Thus, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the non-game RAM area initialization processing is called from the game program, the state of the register saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the non-game RAM area initialization processing is the game state. The state of the register when the program calls the non-game RAM area initialization processing may be different.

  After that, the start address (the first address of the unused area 4) and the end address (the last address of the non-game RAM area) of the initialization target RAM are designated, and the start address is used as the initial value of the designated address, and the data of the designated address is used. The process of updating the specified address to the next address after clearing is performed repeatedly until the specified address becomes the end address, so that the area from the start address to the end address of the initialization target RAM (in this embodiment, The area from the beginning of the unused area 4 to the end of the non-game RAM area) is initialized. In the non-gaming RAM area initialization process, by specifying the start address and the end address of the initialization target RAM, the capacity of the initialization target RAM is calculated, and the RAM area corresponding to the capacity is stored in the initialization target RAM. A configuration in which the area from the start address to the end address of the initialization target RAM is initialized by sequentially clearing from the start address may be adopted.

  Then, by using the above-mentioned first return instruction, the values of the registers stored and saved in the non-game stack area when the non-game RAM area initialization process is started are reset in the reverse order of the save. By sequentially reading from the game stack area and setting the registers corresponding to the order, all the registers are returned to the state at the time when the non-game RAM area initialization processing is started. Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area when the non-game RAM area initialization processing is started is read using the above-described LD instruction, and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is returned to the state at the time when the non-game RAM area initialization processing was started, and the non-game RAM area initialization processing is ended. In order to terminate the non-game RAM area initialization processing included in the non-game program and return to the game program, the values of all registers saved at the start of the non-game RAM area initialization processing are restored. After changing the stack pointer SP from the non-game program to the game program, the LD instruction is used, so that the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the execution of the LD instruction is performed. The state of the flag register may change before and after. That is, the state of the register when the non-game RAM area initialization processing is ended may be different from the state of the register saved when the non-game RAM area initialization processing is started.

  At step Sa10, the non-game RAM area initialization processing is performed, the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c is initialized, and when returning to the initial setting processing, the game is returned to at step Sa9 using the second return command described above. The value of the flag register saved in the stack area is sequentially read from the game stack area in the reverse order to the time of saving and set in the flag register, so that the flag register is in a state before the non-game RAM area initialization processing is performed. Is restored (Sa11). The non-gaming RAM area is initialized and saved in the non-gaming RAM area in the step Sa10, and the flag registers are saved and restored in the steps Sa9 and Sa11. After the initialization processing is performed, the states of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 are completely restored to the states before the processing is performed.

  When it is determined in step Sa8 that there is no abnormality in the RAM 41c, and when the register is restored in step Sa11, the RAM destruction diagnosis fixed data set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sa12), and the RAM 41c has an abnormality. If there is, a RAM destruction initialization start address for specifying the address of the game RAM area to be initialized is set (Sa13). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is ON with reference to the input port 2 (Sa14).

  If it is determined in step Sa14 that the setting key switch 37 is ON, a setting change process is performed. In the setting change processing, the setting value is determined by operating the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in a predetermined procedure, and it is detected that the setting key switch 37 is turned off. Is ended and the game is shifted to a state in which the game can proceed. In the setting change process, when the setting change process is started, a setting command (start) indicating that the setting change process is started is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. When the setting change process is ended, A setting command (end) indicating that the setting change processing is ended is performed. In the setting change processing, when the setting change processing ends, the start address of the initialization target RAM area at the time of setting change is specified, and the process returns to the step Sb47 of the main processing. Then, by performing the RAM initialization process in step Sb47, the area from the start address of the initialization target RAM area at the time of setting change to the end address of the game RAM area, that is, all the game RAM areas are initialized. It has become so. It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which all game RAM areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized. In the RAM initialization processing performed after the end of the setting change processing, the area to be initialized includes a storage area in which information on the advantageous section is stored, and the information on the advantageous section is initialized. The area to be initialized does not include a storage area for storing information on the carryover state in which the winning of the special combination (BB1, BB2) is carried over, and the information on the carryover state is not initialized. .

  If it is determined in step Sa14 that the setting key switch 37 is not ON, it is determined whether or not the RAM 41c is abnormal based on the parity of the RAM calculated in step Sa3 and the diagnosis result in Sa7 (Sa15). If it is determined that there is no abnormality in the RAM 41c, the output buffer for outputting the external output signal is cleared (Sa16). The reel error counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and counts the number of times a reel rotation error has been detected in the main processing described later, is cleared (Sa17). Thereafter, by setting an address at the time of power failure to the stack pointer SP based on the contents stored in the RAM 41c, the stack pointer is returned to the state at the time of power failure (Sa18), and port input processing is performed twice consecutively (Sa19). , Sa20).

  The port input processing includes input state data relating to input states such as detection signals of various switches input to the parallel input port 511 (input data indicating a current input state of various switches, and a state in which previous and current input data are the same). This is a process for updating the fixed data indicating that the fixed data has changed and the edge data indicating that the fixed data has changed from the previous time. In a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c, input buffers 0 to 2 for storing input state data of various switches are provided, and input state data of various switches updated by the port input processing (this embodiment In this case, input data, fixed data, and edge data) are stored in predetermined bits of an input buffer that are predetermined for each type of switches and each type of input state data. In the port input processing, the detection state (ON state or OFF state) of various switches among the input state data of various switches is stored in the input port 0 of the parallel input port 511 as input data, so that the input of various sensors is performed. The data is updated to the detection state at the execution timing of the current port input processing. Input data of various switches is stored in predetermined bits of input port 0 corresponding to each switch. In the port input processing, when storing input data in the input buffer 0, the input data stored in the input buffer by the previous port input processing and the input data stored in the input buffer by the current port input processing are compared. The current input data detection state (ON state) of various sensors in which the current and previous input data are the same (previous and current ON state or previous and current OFF state) are compared for each sensor. Or the determined data is stored in a predetermined bit of the input buffer 1 while the current and previous input data are different (previous ON state, current OFF state, or previous OFF state, current ON state). State), finalized data is created to maintain the detection state of the previous input data, and the input buffer By storing a first predetermined bit, and updates the determined data of the various sensors that are stored in the input buffer 1. Further, in the port input process, when storing the determined data in the input buffer 1, the determined data is compared with the previously determined data, and the determined data is changed to OFF for various sensors that have changed from the OFF state to the ON state. The ON edge data indicating that the state has changed from the ON state to the ON state is stored in a predetermined bit of the input buffer 2, and the final data changes from the ON state to the OFF state for the various sensors whose final data has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. The edge data of various sensors stored in the input buffer 2 is updated by storing the OFF edge data indicating that the operation has been performed in a predetermined bit of the input buffer 2. Input data, fixed data, and edge data of various switches stored in the port input buffers 0 to 2 can be referred to from a game program and a non-game program.

  In the initial setting process, the port input process is performed twice consecutively, and when the port input process is subsequently performed, the input states of the various switches after the initial setting process is performed, that is, the slot machine 1 Since input state data on input states such as detection signals of various switches is created based on input states of various switches after power supply to the power supply is resumed, an unintended input state may be specified. Can be prevented. Further, in the port input process, a configuration may be employed in which the finalized data is created based on the input data acquired by the port input process three or more times (for example, the input data this time, the last time, and the last two times before). In such a configuration, the initial setting process is performed by continuously performing the port input process in the initial setting process one time less than the number of times of the port input process required to generate the confirmed data. Then, when the port input processing is performed, the input state data can be created based on the input states of various switches after the initial setting processing is performed.

  After performing the port input processing in the steps of Sa19 and Sa20, it is determined whether the reset / setting switch 38 is ON (Sa22) by referring to a predetermined input port (Sa21), and the reset / setting is performed. When the switch 38 is in the ON state, that is, when the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on while the reset / setting switch 38 is pressed and kept in the ON state, the advantageous section information related to the advantageous section is initialized. A section information initialization process is performed (Sa23). In the advantageous section information initialization process, information on the advantageous section in the storage area of the RAM 41c (the output buffer for the advantageous section signal, the flag during the advantageous section, the output buffer of the section display LED 19, the number of advantageous section games, and the net increase of medals in the advantageous section). The area in which the number is stored is initialized. In the advantageous section information initialization processing, an area in which information on the internal winning flag of the special combination (0 at non-winning, 1 at BB1 winning, 2 at BB2 winning: 2), setting values (1 to 6), and the like are stored. Is not initialized, and the information on the internal winning flag of the special role, the set values (1 to 6), and the like are maintained as the contents when the power supply to the slot machine 1 was stopped last time. Will be done.

  In this embodiment, in the initial setting process, when the reset / setting switch 38 is in the ON state, that is, when the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on while the reset / setting switch 38 is depressed and turned on. Is a configuration in which the information on the advantageous section stored in the RAM 41c is initialized by the advantageous section information initializing process. However, the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on while the reset / setting switch 38 is depressed and turned on. In this case, among the information stored in the RAM 41c, the information about the internal winning situation and the information about the set value are maintained without being initialized, while at least the information about the advantageous section is initialized. Any information other than the information about the internal winning situation and the information about the set value is used as information about the advantageous section. It may be a monitor initialization possible configurations.

  When it is determined in step Sa22 that the reset / setting switch 38 is not in the ON state, and after executing the advantageous section information initialization process in step Sa23, a return command indicating that the control state has returned to the control state before the power interruption is issued. After the transmission to the sub-control unit 91 (Sa24), in the command transmission processing of the timer interrupt processing (main), a door command transmission flag indicating that the door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is transmitted is set to a predetermined value in the RAM 41c. The area is set (Sa25). In the command transmission process, the door command is normally transmitted when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes. However, when the door command transmission flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the door opening detection switch 25 is transmitted. Regardless of whether or not the detection state has changed, a door command indicating the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 is transmitted.

  Then, after setting the door command transmission flag in the step of Sa25, all the registers are returned to the state before the power failure stored in the RAM 41c (Sa26), and the timer interrupt is set to be enabled (Sa27). After terminating the initial setting process and shifting to the timer interrupt process (main), the process returns to the process of the main process that was being executed before the power supply to the slot machine 1 was stopped.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa15 that there is an abnormality in the RAM 41c, a game RAM initialization process is performed (Sa28), and the game RAM area of the RAM 41c is determined from the RAM destruction initialization start address set in step Sa13. The area up to the end of is initialized. After that, as in the processing from Sa9 to Sa11, the value of the flag register in which the flag is set among the registers is evacuated to the game stack area of the game RAM area (Sa29), and then the non-game program included in the non-game program is saved. A game RAM area initialization process is called (Sa30) to initialize all non-game RAM areas in the RAM 41c, and then returns to the caller and restores the register saved in the step of Sa29 (Sa31).

  After the register is restored in the step of Sa31, the door command transmission flag is set (Sa32), the timer interrupt is set to be enabled (Sa33), and the RAM abnormality error code (E8) indicating that the RAM 41c has an abnormality is set. A predetermined register is prepared (Sa34), the initial setting process is completed, and the process shifts to an error process.

  In the error processing, the game is controlled to an error state in which the progress of the game is disabled. Further, an error command capable of specifying an error code (E8) prepared in a predetermined register is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and the error code (E8) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c by other processing (for example, It is set as an error flag that can be referred to also in a sensor monitoring process described later. In addition, control is performed so that the error code (E8) is displayed on the game assistance display device 12. Thereafter, the control of the error state is performed until it is specified that the condition for canceling the error state according to the error code (E8) prepared in the predetermined register is satisfied. When the RAM abnormality error code (E8) is prepared in a predetermined register and the state is shifted to the error state, the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power switch 39 is turned on to shift to the setting change state. By initializing all the game RAM areas in this way, it is possible to reliably eliminate the data abnormality in the RAM 41c and release the error state. On the other hand, when the power switch 39 is turned on without setting the setting key switch 37 to the ON state, the abnormality of the RAM 41c is detected again, and the error state is set again.

  As described above, after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the main control unit 41 performs the initial setting process first. In the initial setting process, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped. In accordance with the state of the main control unit 41 at the time of the start, the processing shifts to any one of the timer interrupt processing (main), the setting change processing, and the error processing. At the time of shifting to these processes, a command capable of specifying the type of the process to be shifted is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. When the control state before the power supply to the power supply 1 is stopped is returned, a return command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and when the setting change process is started to shift to the setting change state, A setting command (start) is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and when an error process is started due to an abnormality in the RAM 41c and the state shifts to an error state, an error command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  In addition, after shifting from the initial setting process to the setting change process, the main control unit 41 returns to a state in which the game can proceed through a setting change state, and the game can proceed. When returning to the state, a setting command (end) that can specify that the setting change state is ended is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, but the return command is not transmitted. Further, after the process shifts to the error process due to the abnormality of the RAM 41c, the process is shifted to the setting change process as described above and the error state is released, thereby returning to a state in which the game can be advanced. Even when the error processing is terminated and the game returns to a state in which the game can proceed, the return command is not transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment is activated when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, performs the startup setting process included in the game program, and performs all the startup setting processes. The output ports 0 to 9 are initialized.

  After performing the startup setting process, the main control unit 41 performs an initialization process included in the game program. In the initial setting process, when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM 41c, a non-game RAM area initialization process included in the non-game program is called to initialize a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. In the initial setting process, a RAM initialization process included in the game program is called to initialize a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c, and the game RAM area is initialized by the game program, The RAM area is configured to be initialized by a non-game program.

  In the initial setting processing, when the reset / setting switch 38 is in the ON state, the advantageous section information initialization processing is executed to initialize the information on the advantageous section stored in the RAM 41c. . As a result, the output buffer of the section display LED 19 set in the RAM 41c is initialized as information on the advantageous section, and the slot machine 1 can be started in a state where the section display LED 19 is turned off. I have. In the initial setting process, by executing the advantageous section information initialization processing, the output buffer of the advantageous section signal and the advantageous section flag during the advantageous section are also initialized as information about the advantageous section. Until the condition for shifting to the advantageous section is satisfied, the game state is controlled to the normal section, and the section display LED 19 is maintained in the off state.

  Further, in the RAM initialization processing performed after the end of the setting change processing, the information regarding the advantageous section is initialized, but the information regarding the carryover state of the special role is not initialized. Even if is changed, the carryover state of the special role before the setting value is changed is maintained.

[Main processing]
The control content of the main process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. The main process is repeatedly executed for each game of one unit. One cycle of the main processing corresponds to one unit of the game. The main process is included in the game program and includes a plurality of processes. Hereinafter, processing not particularly indicated to be included in the non-game program is included in the game program. Some of the game programs called by the game program call a non-game program.

  As shown in FIG. 28, first, the main control unit 41 sets the timer interrupt to be disabled (Sb1), and then sets the final address value of a predetermined area of the RAM 41c to be initialized in the HL register (Sb2). Then, the address immediately before the final address value of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to be initialized is set in the DE register (Sb3). Then, 0 is written to the area of the RAM 41c specified based on the HL register value to initialize (Sb4), and the area is set by Sb58 or Sb87 described later from a predetermined area of the RAM 41c specified based on the HL register, the DE register, and the like. 0 is written to each storage area of the size of the RAM initialization target to be initialized (Sb5).

  Thereafter, by referring to the current game state set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, a value corresponding to the game state is read into the A register (Sb6), and a game end command for specifying that one game has ended is specified. The value is set in the D register (Sb7). Then, a communication data storing process is performed (Sb8). In the communication data storage processing, a command is generated based on the values set in the A register and the D register and set in the command queue. For example, when the game state is set in the A register and the value of the game end command is set in the D register, a game end command including information that can specify the current game state is generated and set in the command queue. I do. The commands set in the command queue are sequentially transmitted by a command transmission process included in the subsequent timer interrupt process.

  After performing the communication data storage process in step Sb8, the value of the flag register in which the operation result is stored among the registers is stored in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order by using the above-described second save instruction. After having been saved by storing (step Sb9), RT information output processing included in the non-game program is called using the CALL instruction described above (Sb10).

  In the RT information output process, first, the value of the address indicated by the current stack pointer SP is read from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program, using the above-described LD instruction. It is stored and saved in a predetermined area of the game RAM area. Then, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program is read from a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is set for a non-game program. Then, the values of all the registers (accumulator register, flag register, general-purpose register, index register, interrupt register, refresh register, program counter, etc.) provided in the main control unit 41 including the flag register are described using the first save instruction. Are saved in a predetermined order in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP. Similarly to the case where the non-game RAM area initialization process is called, the RT pointer output process included in the non-game program is called from the game program, and the stack pointer SP is changed from the game program to the non-game game. When the LD instruction is used, the second zero flag of the flag register is changed by using the LD instruction, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the RT information output process is called from the game program, the state of the register saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the RT information output process is determined by the RT information output process. May be different from the state of the register when.

  Thereafter, by referring to the information relating to the gaming state of the slot machine 1 set in the predetermined area of the gaming RAM area, the information relating to the gaming state (for example, the state of the RT) is transmitted to the test apparatus connected to the slot machine 1. The output port 7 is set to output the test signal to be output. Then, the value of the register stored and saved in the non-gaming stack area when the RT information output process is started is sequentially read from the non-gaming stack area in the reverse order of the saving to correspond to the order. By setting the registers, all the registers are returned to the state when the RT information output process was started. Thereafter, by using the above-described LD instruction, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area when the RT information output process is started is read and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. The stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the RT information output processing was started, and the RT information output processing is terminated. Note that, similarly to the case where the above-described non-game RAM area initialization processing is ended, the RT information output processing included in the non-game program is ended and the RT information output processing is started to return to the game program. When the stack pointer SP is changed from the non-gaming program to the gaming program after restoring the values of all the registers saved at the time, the LD instruction is used, and the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is reset. Therefore, the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, the state of the register when the RT information output process ends may be different from the state of the register saved when the RT information output process starts.

  After performing the RT information output processing in the step of Sb10, the value of the flag register saved in the step of Sb9 is sequentially read from the game stack area in the reverse order to the saving when the second return instruction is used. It is restored by reading and setting it in the flag register (Sb11). The RT information output process is performed by performing the save and restore processes of all the registers inside the RT information output process in step Sb10 and the save and restore processes of the flag registers in steps Sb9 and Sb11. After that, the states of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 are completely restored to the states before the processing is performed.

  After the flag register is restored in step Sb11, a value corresponding to a predetermined test signal standby time is set in the BC register (Sb12), and the process waits until a timer interrupt is performed the number of times in the BC register. The interrupt BC times waiting process is performed (Sb13). In the interrupt BC wait process, the timer interrupt is set to be enabled, the process waits until the timer interrupt process is performed, and the process of subtracting 1 from the BC register every time the timer interrupt process is performed is performed. Repeat until 0 is reached. Then, when the value of the BC register becomes 0, the interrupt BC times waiting process is terminated. In the step Sb12, a value (29) corresponding to 16.24 ms is set in the BC register as a value corresponding to the test signal standby time. In the step Sb13, the interrupt BC times waiting process is performed. As a result, at least a test signal standby time (16.24 msec) is secured after the RT information output processing of Sb10 and before the next processing is performed.

  Further, by performing the interrupt BC wait processing, the processing performed after the interrupt BC wait processing can be performed in a state where the time until the next timer interrupt processing is performed is maximized. A timer interrupt does not occur unintentionally during a series of processes performed after the interrupt BC waiting process. By performing the interrupt BC wait process in step Sb13, the timer interrupt is performed unintentionally during the process from Se1 to Se10 of the game start wait process performed after the interrupt BC wait process. In this way, the processing from the step of Se1 to the step of Se10 can be performed as a series of processing.

  In addition, by performing the interrupt BC times wait process, the timer interrupt process is reliably performed at least once, and after the processes included in the timer interrupt process are performed, the interrupt BC times wait process is performed. A series of processes to be performed can be performed. For example, by performing the interrupt BC times waiting process in the step of Sb13, the port input process described later included in the timer interrupt process is performed, and the game starts with the input data of various switches and sensors updated. The processing from the step of Se1 to the step of Se10 of the waiting processing can be performed.

  Then, after the timer interrupt process is performed, a game start waiting process is performed (Sb14), and a process from the end of the control of the previous one game to the start of the next game is performed. In the game start waiting process, a process of setting the number of bets according to insertion of medals and the like is performed, and when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in a state where the specified number of bets is set, the next one game is started. Perform the process to start.

  Then, an internal lottery process is performed to determine whether or not a winning is allowed (internal lottery) (Sb15). In the internal lottery process, generation of a prize is permitted based on a preset value (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1 or a random number for the internal lottery acquired at the same time as the start of the game upon detection of the start switch 7. An internal lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform the display result (that is, whether or not to derive the display result). Then, a winning number (including a winning number and a loss) corresponding to the winning combination is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c so that the winning result in the internal lottery can be specified. In addition, a group information (general role) that can specify the type of the general role winning based on the role number (winning number) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c by performing a group information setting process (general role) described later. I do. In addition, if the special role is won in the internal lottery (including the case of winning in the internal lottery of the game and the case of being won and carried over in the internal lottery of the game before this game), An internal winning flag indicating that the special combination (BB1, BB2) has been won is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. When a special combination (BB1, BB2) has been won in the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not BB1 has been won. A predetermined value (ON state value: 1) for controlling the lighting state is set in an output buffer for controlling the lighting state of the state display LED 17 (output buffer of the state display LED 17). I do.

  By setting the value of the ON state in the output buffer of the state display LED 17, the state display LED 17 is controlled to be turned on by the LED dynamic display processing of the timer interrupt processing performed thereafter. After performing the internal lottery process, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment starts the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R by performing a reel rotation process (Sb45) described later, and all the reels are in a constant speed state. The operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is validated on condition that the interruption has occurred, and during the period from the time when the internal lottery processing is performed to the time when the reel rotation processing is performed, the interruption BC times waiting processing (Sb28) )I do. As a result, the timer interrupt process is performed at least once during the period, and when the value of the ON state is set in the output buffer of the status display LED 17, that is, when BB1 is won, the stop switch 8L , 8C, and 8R, the state display LED 17 is controlled to be turned on before the operation is enabled, and the state notification is reliably started before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is enabled. You can do it. Also, when the special combination (BB1) is won by the internal lottery, a predetermined value (ON state value: 1) is set in the output buffer of the state display LED 17, and the state display LED 17 is turned on by the subsequent timer interrupt processing. Since the status display is started immediately after the special role (BB1) is won, the operation time of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective for checking whether or not the status display is being performed. Before they can be secured.

  Then, after performing the internal lottery process, a payout control process of performing a process relating to a game section and a process relating to navigation notification is performed as described later (Sb16). In the payout control process, a process of determining whether or not a section is an advantageous section based on a value of an output buffer of a signal during an advantageous section, and a case where it is determined that the section is not an advantageous section, three bets are set as a bet amount. Advantageous section shift-related processing (for example, processing to determine whether or not an advantageous section shift combination has been won in an internal lottery, or an advantage in an internal lottery) performed on the condition that the gaming state is not the special state (BB1, BB2). When it is determined that the section shift combination has been won, the processing to shift to the advantageous section by setting the advantageous section in-flag flag indicating that the section is controlled to the advantageous section by the continuous data processing. Processing to make various settings, etc.), and when it is determined that the game is an advantageous section, regardless of whether three or two bets are set as the bet amount, the game after the advantageous section is started. Number is advantageous Processing for adding and updating the advantageous section game number counter for counting the number of inter-games for one game, and processing for navigation notification performed on condition that the number of bets is two or a game state other than RT1 (for example, Processing to update an ED transition game number counter for specifying a game to be shifted to ED control in which navigation control is performed over a period until the advantageous section ends, and a predetermined ball-out state (ball-out state A, ball-out state) Processing for setting ON data (predetermined value: 1) for controlling the lighting state in the output buffer of the section display LED 19 on the condition that the ball state is controlled to the ball state B), based on the navigation number based on the general winning number The navigation number corresponding to the winning combination is specified, and a process of setting the navigation number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, a process of performing various processes according to a currently controlled payout state, and the like are performed.The navigation number set in the payout control process is referred to in a game start command transmission process (Sb22) described later, and a command capable of specifying the navigation number is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. The navigation number is also referred to in the reel stop control process (Sb48), and corresponds to the navigation number before the reel stop control process validates the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. Display data for displaying the navigation display is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and the navigation display is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. In the advantageous section game number counter updated during the advantageous section by the payout control processing, the number of advantageous section games reaches the prescribed game number (second prescribed number) in the later-described AT state management processing (Sb60). It will be referred to when determining whether or not.

  Then, similarly to the step of Sb11, the value of the flag register in which the operation result is stored among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 is stored in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order by using the above-mentioned second save instruction. After the timer interrupt is set to prohibit (Sb18), an operation information signal output process included in the non-game program is performed by using the above-mentioned CALL instruction (Sb19), and described later. In such a manner, a process of outputting an operation information signal for specifying an operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R according to a winning result of the internal lottery from the output port to the test apparatus is performed.

  In the operation information signal output processing, first, in the same manner as in the above-described RT information output processing, the value of the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is read out using the above-described LD instruction, and the non-game RAM area is read. To a predetermined area. Thereafter, by using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program is read, and is set as the value indicated by the current stack pointer SP. Set for non-gaming programs. Then, the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 including the above-described flag register are stored in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area in a predetermined order by using the above-mentioned first save instruction, thereby saving. Let it. Note that, when the operation information signal output process included in the non-game program is called from the game program, when the stack pointer SP is changed from the game program to the non-game program, the LD instruction is used. The second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the operation information signal output processing is called from the game program, the state of the register that is saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the operation information signal output processing is determined by the operation information of the game program. The state of the register when the signal output processing is called may be different.

  Thereafter, the process of referring to the lottery result of the internal lottery set in the predetermined area of the game RAM area and outputting a work information signal designating the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R according to the result of the internal lottery winning is performed. Do.

  Then, similarly to the above-described RT information output processing, by using the above-mentioned first return instruction, the value of the register saved at the time of starting the operation information signal output processing is sequentially read from the non-game stack area, All registers are returned to the state when the operation information signal output processing was started. Thereafter, when the operation information signal output processing is started using the above-described LD instruction, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area is read, and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. The stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the operation information signal output processing was started, and the operation information signal output processing is terminated. In addition, in order to terminate the operation information signal output process included in the non-game program and return to the game program, after restoring the values of all the registers saved at the start of the operation information signal output process, When changing the stack pointer SP from the non-game program to the game program, the use of the LD instruction changes the second zero flag TZ of the flag register, and the flag is changed before and after the execution of the LD instruction. The state of the register may change. In other words, the state of the register when the operation information signal output processing is ended may be different from the state of the register saved when the operation information signal output processing is started.

  The operation information signal output processing is performed after the predetermined condition is satisfied, the section display LED 19 is turned on, the section is displayed, and the ball output control processing for setting the navigation number is performed. In the signal output process, an operation information signal is output to the test device after the section display has been started.

  After performing the operation information signal output processing in step Sb19, the timer interrupt is set to be enabled (Sb20). Then, similarly to the step of Sb11, the value of the flag register saved in the game stack area in the step of Sb17 is sequentially read from the game stack area in the reverse order of the saving using the second return instruction described above. Then, the flag register is restored to the state before the operation information signal output processing is performed (Sb21). The saving and restoring processes of all the registers inside the operation information signal output process in step Sb19 and the saving and restoring processes of the flag registers in steps Sb17 and Sb21 are performed, so that the operation information signal output process is performed. After the operation is performed, the states of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 are completely restored to the states before the processing is performed.

  After restoring the register in step Sb21, a game start command transmission process is performed (Sb22) to specify that one game has started, and to specify various control states at the start of the one game. A control status command group including a plurality of commands is set in the command queue, and is sequentially transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  After performing the game start command processing in step Sb22, the number of the external output signal to be output at the start of the game is read into the A register (Sb25), and the external output signal is output to an external device such as a calling lamp or a hall computer. The external output signal processing is performed (Sb26). In the external output signal processing, an external output signal corresponding to the value set in the A register at the start of the external output signal processing is output from a predetermined output port.

  After the external output signal processing is performed in step Sb26, a value corresponding to a predetermined game start waiting time is set in the BC register (Sb27), and the process waits until a timer interrupt is performed the number of times in the BC register. The interrupt BC times wait process is performed (Sb28). In the interrupt BC wait process, the timer interrupt is set to be enabled, the process waits until the timer interrupt process is performed, and the process of subtracting 1 from the BC register every time the timer interrupt process is performed is performed. Repeat until 0 is reached. Then, when the value of the BC register becomes 0, the interrupt BC times waiting process is terminated. In the step Sb27, a value (238) corresponding to 133.28 msec is set in the BC register as a value corresponding to the game start waiting time. Thus, at least a game start waiting time (133.28 msec) is secured after the external output signal processing of Sb26 and before the next processing is shifted.

  After performing the interrupt BC times waiting process in the step of Sb28, a waiting time effect determination process for performing control relating to a freeze state that delays the progress of the game for a predetermined period is performed (Sb29). In the waiting time effect determination process, it is determined based on a freeze flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c whether or not it is determined that the start switch 7 is operated to start the game when the game is started when the start switch 7 is operated. If it is determined that the control to the freeze state has been determined, a predetermined value is set in the BC register and the interrupt BC times wait process is performed to delay the progress of the game for a predetermined period. The freeze flag is set, for example, so as to be able to specify that the state is controlled to the freeze state when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the payout control processing. On the other hand, in the waiting time effect determination processing, if it is determined that the control to the freeze state has not been determined based on the freeze flag, the processing does not perform the setting of the BC register, the processing of waiting for the number of times of the interrupt BC, and the like. The time effect determination process ends.

  After performing the waiting time effect determination processing in the step of Sb29, an external output signal processing of outputting an external output signal from a predetermined output port to an external device such as a call lamp or a hall computer is performed (Sb30). Then, it is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and it is determined whether or not it is determined to generate a short freeze (a freeze state in which the progress of the game is delayed for a predetermined short period, hereinafter sometimes referred to as SF). The identifiable SF flag value is read into the A register (Sb31), and it is determined whether or not generation of an SF is determined based on the SF flag value (Sb32). The SF flag is set, for example, so as to be able to specify that a SF is generated when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the payout control processing.

  If it is determined in step Sb32 that generation of SF has been determined, the start address of the SF time setting table in which the SF control period is registered in advance is set in the HL register (Sb33). , An addition process is performed (Sb34). In the addition process, the address value (HL) is added to the address value (HL) by adding the addition value (A) set in the A register at the start of the addition process to the address value (HL) set in the HL register. A) Perform processing to advance by the amount. In the addition process, data stored in the storage area of the ROM 41b specified by the address value (HL) after adding the addition value (A) is acquired and set in the A register. . By setting the SF flag value in the A register, setting the address of the SF time setting table in the HL register, and performing an addition process, the period during which the SF is controlled based on the SF flag value and the SF time setting table is set. The set value to be set is obtained in the A register.

  After performing the addition process in step Sb34, the set value of the period controlled by the SF acquired in the A register is set in the B register (Sb35). Then, a reel effect number capable of specifying the type of the lure effect is set in the A register (Sb36), and a reel rotation start process is executed (Sb37). In the reel rotation start process, rotation control of the reel is started in a rotation mode specified based on the A register value. Thereafter, the B register value is reset in the A register, and the waiting time execution process is performed (Sb37). The waiting time execution process waits until the timer interrupt process is performed a predetermined number of times specified based on the A register value, and ends the wait time execution process when the timer interrupt process is performed a predetermined number of times.

  In step Sb32, it is determined that it is determined that SF is to be generated, and a waiting time execution process is performed. The address of the one game time management timer set in the predetermined area is set in the HL register (Sb39), and the one game time management timer is referred to based on the HL register value to refer to the one game time management timer. It is determined whether or not is operating (Sb40). After an initial value (a value corresponding to the specified time (4.1 seconds) of one game) is set in the one game time management timer, the timer is decremented by a predetermined value each time a timer interrupt process is performed. Until the specified time (4.1 seconds) of one game elapses from the set time, the value is 1 or more, while the specified time (4.1 seconds) of one game has elapsed since the initial value was set. Thereafter, it is set to 0.

  In step Sb40, when the timer value for one game time management is not 0, it is determined that the timer for one game time management is in operation, and when the timer value for one game time management is 0, the timer for one game time management is determined. It is determined that the timer is not running. When it is determined based on the one game time management timer that the specified time has not elapsed since the previous game was started, the specified time of one game has elapsed based on the one game time management timer. Wait until (Sb40).

  As shown in FIG. 29, after the specified time of one game has elapsed based on one game time management timer, the timer interrupt is set to prohibit (Sb41), and the predetermined index data at the start of the game is set. Is set in the A register (Sb42), and continuous data processing is performed (Sb43). In the continuous data processing, as described later, predetermined data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c specified based on the value (A) set in the A register at the start of the continuous data processing and a continuous data processing table described later. This is a process for performing a process. By performing continuous data processing in a state where the setting index data at the start of the game is set in the A register, the timer for managing one game time is set to an initial value (a value corresponding to the specified time (4.1 seconds) of one game). ), A process of setting an initial value (3 in this embodiment) to a stop switch operation counter for counting the number of times the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated effectively during one game, Processing such as setting an initial value to a stop switch operation state flag capable of specifying the operation states of 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed.

  The initial value set in the timer for one game time management by performing the continuous data processing in the step of Sb43 is referred to in the timer interrupt processing performed thereafter, and the initial value is set in the timer for one game time management. Based on the fact, the measurement of the predetermined time by the test signal output timer for managing the output time of the test signal is newly started. Further, the timer for one game time management is decremented every time the counter update process (Sv20) performed by the timer interrupt process is performed so that the value becomes 0 after the time corresponding to the initial value has elapsed. Will be updated. When the initial value is set in the one game time management timer based on the fact that the one game time management timer is 0, that is, when the reel rotation start process is started in the previous game, one game time It is possible to specify that the specified time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed.

  After performing the continuous data processing in the step of Sb43, the reel effect no-data indicating that the effect using the reel is not performed is set in the A register (Sb44), and the reel rotation start process is performed (Sb45). In the reel rotation start processing, the reel rotation control is started in a rotation mode specified based on the A register value, that is, in a normal game rotation mode. After that, the timer interrupt is set to be permitted (Sb46), and then a reel rotation start command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 to specify that the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started. Processing is performed (Sb47). On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa40 that the specified time of one game has elapsed based on the one game time management timer, the processing of steps Sb41 to Sb47 is immediately performed.

  After performing the reel rotation start command transmission processing in the step of Sb47, a reel stop control processing for performing a reel stop control is performed (Sb48). In the reel stop control processing, first, a navigation number set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and display data for performing a navigation display according to the navigation number (when the navigation number is 0, a non-display data is displayed). If the navigation number is 1 or more, the navigation display data corresponding to the navigation number is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. As a result, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to a display mode corresponding to the display data by the subsequent timer interrupt processing. After setting the display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, it is determined whether the reel being controlled for rotation is rotating at a predetermined constant speed, and if there is a reel that is not rotating at a constant speed. , An excitation pattern for detecting a reel error and accelerating the corresponding reel to constant speed rotation is set, and control is performed so that all the reels under rotation control are rotated at constant speed rotation. On the other hand, when all the reels under rotation control are being rotated at a constant speed, the reception of the stop operation of the reels under rotation control is enabled, and until the player performs the stop operation of the reels by the stop switch. stand by. By enabling the reception of the stop operation, the stop enable LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R of the corresponding stop switch are controlled to be turned on by a timer interrupt process performed thereafter. Then, when a valid stop operation is detected for a reel for which the stop operation is enabled (ON edge data is detected for a stop switch for which the stop operation is enabled), the reel on which the valid stop operation is performed is performed. , Reel stop control for stopping at a predetermined stop position is performed based on information set in the reel stop initial setting process. Such reel stop control is repeatedly performed on the reels under rotation control to stop the rotation of all reels, thereby terminating the reel stop processing.

  Then, after finishing the reel stop processing, a winning determination processing (Sb49) is performed. In the winning determination process, it is determined whether or not an illegal winning has occurred based on the internal lottery result and the symbol combination stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R.

  Then, after performing the winning determination processing in the step of Sa49, a one-interrupt wait processing is performed (Sb50), and a standby is performed until the timer interrupt processing is performed. Then, on the condition that the timer interrupt process has been performed once, the wait process for one interrupt is terminated.

  After performing the single-interrupt wait process in step Sb45, the operation result is stored in the register included in the main control unit 41 by using the above-described second return instruction, as in step Sb9 and step Sb17. The value of the flag register is saved in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order to be saved (Sb51), and after the timer interrupt is set to be disabled (Sb52), the non-game is executed using the above-mentioned CALL instruction. Data processing for the duty ratio monitor included in the program is performed (Sb53).

  In this way, by performing the waiting ratio monitoring data process (Sb53) after performing the one-time interrupt process in the step of Sb50, the maximum time until the next timer interrupt process is performed is ensured. In such a state, the data processing for the role ratio monitoring can be performed, and it is possible to prevent the timer interrupt from being performed unintentionally during the data processing for the role ratio monitoring. Further, the timer interrupt is set to prohibit in the step Sb52, the duty ratio monitoring data processing is performed in a state where the timer interrupt is prohibited, and the timer interrupt prohibition setting is released in the subsequent step Sb54, whereby the timer interrupt is disabled. It is possible to reliably prevent the timer interrupt from being performed unintentionally during the processing of the duty ratio monitoring data. In addition, in the step Sb50, the timer interrupt is prohibited by performing a one-time interrupt process before setting the timer interrupt to the disabled state and performing the timer interrupt process in order to perform the duty ratio monitoring data process. In the state (Sb52 to Sb54), it is possible to prevent the timing of performing the timer interrupt, and in the state (Sb52 to Sb54) in which the timer interrupt is prohibited, the timing is to perform the timer interrupt. Thus, when the prohibition of the timer interrupt is released, the timer interrupt is performed, and the timer interrupt process is not performed at an unintended timing.

  In addition, by setting the timer interrupt to be disabled in the step Sb52, similarly to the case where the timer interrupt is set to be disabled in the above-described step Sb18, since the flag register is saved in the step Sb51, During the period from the start of data processing until the processing of saving all register values is performed, the state of the register is changed from the state at the time of saving the flag register by performing the timer interrupt processing. It does not get lost.

  In the duty ratio monitoring data processing, first, in the same manner as the above-described RT information output processing and the like, the value of the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is read using the aforementioned LD instruction, and the non-game It is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM area. Thereafter, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program is read out using the LD instruction, and is set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Set for the program. Then, by using the above-mentioned first save instruction, the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register are saved in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area in a predetermined order to save. When the stack pointer SP is changed from a game program to a non-game program, an LD instruction is used when the stack ratio SP is changed from a game program to a non-game program in accordance with the calling ratio monitor data processing included in the non-game program being called from the game program. , The second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the data processing for ratio monitoring is called from the game program, the state of the register that is saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the data processing for ratio monitoring is determined by the game program. It may be different from the state of the register at the time of calling the duty ratio monitoring data processing.

  Thereafter, each state counting process included in the non-game program is performed to perform a predetermined period (for example, a period from the current game to 6000 games ago, a period from the current game to 175000 games ago, The data on the number of paid out medals in a section (an advantageous section) controlled to be in an advantageous state is updated.

  Then, by using the above-mentioned first return instruction, the value of the register stored and saved in the non-game stack area at the time of starting the duty ratio monitoring data processing is changed to the non-game By sequentially reading from the stack area and setting the registers corresponding to the order, all the registers are returned to the state at the time of starting the ratio monitoring data processing. Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer SP evacuated to a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area at the time of starting the duty ratio monitoring data processing is read using the aforementioned LD instruction, and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Then, the stack pointer SP is returned to the state at the time when the data processing for the combination ratio monitoring is started, and the data processing for the combination ratio monitoring is ended. In addition, in order to terminate the data processing for the role ratio monitoring included in the non-game program and return to the game program, the values of all the registers saved at the start of the data processing for the role ratio monitoring were restored. Later, when the stack pointer SP is changed from the non-game program to the game program, the LD instruction is used, so that the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and before and after the execution of the LD instruction May change the state of the flag register. In other words, the state of the register when the data processing for the role ratio monitoring is terminated may be different from the state of the register saved when the data processing for the role ratio monitoring is started.

  After the processing of the duty ratio monitoring data in the step Sb53, the timer interrupt is set to be permitted (Sb54). Then, similarly to the step of Sb11 and the step of Sb21, the value of the flag register saved in the step of Sb51 is sequentially read from the game stack area in the reverse order to the saving using the second return instruction. Then, the flag register is returned to the state before performing the duty ratio monitoring data processing (Sb55). The saving and restoring processes of all registers within the combination ratio monitor data process in step Sb53 and the saving and restoring processes of flag registers in steps Sb51 and Sb55 are performed, so that the combination ratio monitor data is processed. After the processing is performed, the states of all registers included in the main control unit 41 are completely restored to the states before the processing is performed.

  After restoring the flag register in step Sb55, a door command indicating the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 is set in the command queue (Sb56), and the door command is set as a sub-command in the timer interrupt processing (main) command transmission processing. It is transmitted to the control unit 91.

  Thereafter, an unauthorized winning check process is performed (Sb57). In the illegal prize check process, it is determined whether or not an illegal prize has occurred based on the combination of symbols stopped on the reel prize line LN and the result of the internal lottery. In this example, an error code is set in the A register and the illegal winning check process is terminated. On the other hand, if no illegal winning has occurred, the illegal winning check process is performed without setting an error code.

  After performing the illegal prize check processing in Sb57, a combination end check processing is performed (Sb58). In the winning combination end check process, it is determined whether or not the game is in the special state (BB1, BB2). . When it is determined that the special condition end condition is satisfied, a process of setting a BB end flag indicating the end of the special state in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is performed.

  After performing the winning combination end check processing in Sb58, a gaming state setting processing is performed (Sb59). In the game state setting process, it is determined whether or not BB1 or BB2, which has been won by the internal lottery, has won. If it is determined that BB1 or BB2 has been won, the game state is determined to be the winning BB. For example, processing for shifting to a special state corresponding to the state is performed.

  After performing the game state setting process in Sb59, an AT state management process for performing a process relating to a game section and a process relating to navigation notification is performed as described later (Sb60). In the AT state management process, a process for determining whether or not the above-described advantageous section game number counter is in the advantageous section based on whether or not the value is other than the initial value (0). If it is determined, the net increase counter that counts the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section is updated regardless of whether three bets or two bets are set in the game. The processing for setting the advantageous section end flag indicating that the advantageous section is ended when it is determined that the net number of medals exceeds the first prescribed number based on the updated net additional number counter. A process of setting an advantageous section end flag when it is determined that the number of advantageous section games identified based on the second predetermined number has been reached, a state where the number of bets is two, or a gaming state other than RT1 (For example, a process of setting an ED transition flag indicating that ED control is to be performed when it is determined that the net increase in number specified based on the net increase counter has exceeded the third specified number). Processing for setting an ED transition flag indicating that ED control is to be performed when it is determined that the number of ED transition games identified based on the ED transition game number counter has reached the fourth prescribed number, Various processes).

  The advantageous section end flag set by the AT state management processing is referred to in a later-described processing (Sb70) of the main processing, and when the advantageous section end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the storage area of the RAM 41c is determined. Among them, information relating to an advantageous section (for example, an advantageous section game number counter, a net increase counter, an ED shift game number counter, payout state information, an output buffer of the section display LED 19, an output buffer of an advantageous section in-section signal, etc.) is stored. By performing the advantageous section data initialization processing (Sb71 to Sb79) for initializing the given predetermined area, a series of advantageous sections is completed. The advantageous section data initialization process is performed based on the setting of the advantageous section end flag, and the output buffer of the section display LED 19 is initialized, so that the section display LED 19 is controlled to be turned off, and the section display LED 19 is turned off. Is terminated. In addition, the advantageous section data is initialized, and the output buffer of the advantageous section signal is initialized, so that the advantageous section signal is controlled to the OFF state.

  After performing the AT state management processing in Sb60, a batch transmission data storage processing is performed (Sb61), and a plurality of commands to be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 at the end of one game are collectively set in a command queue. . The plurality of commands set by the batch transmission data storage processing are sequentially transmitted by the subsequent timer interrupt processing.

  After performing the batch transmission data storage processing in the step of Sb61, the freeze processing during stop is performed (Sb62). In the freeze process during stoppage, it is determined whether or not it is determined to control to the freeze state when the third stop operation is performed based on a freeze flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. If it is determined that the control is to be performed, a predetermined value is set in the BC register, the interruption BC times wait processing is performed, and the progress of the game is delayed for a predetermined period. The freeze flag is set, for example, so as to be able to specify that the state is controlled to the freeze state when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the payout control processing. On the other hand, in the stop-time freeze process, if it is determined that the control to the freeze state is not determined based on the freeze flag, the BC register setting, the interrupt BC time waiting process, and the like are not performed. The freeze processing ends.

  After performing the pause-in-freeze processing in the step of Sb62, a medal payout processing of paying out a number of medals according to a winning generated as a result of the game is performed (Sb63). In the medal payout process, a predetermined number of medals predetermined for each winning combination are awarded to the player in accordance with the generated prize, the number of medals to be awarded is added to the credit, and the upper limit of the credit ( In the present embodiment, when 50) is reached, the hopper motor 34b is driven to pay out medals not added to the credits from the medal payout exit 9.

  After the medal payout process is performed in step Sb62, transmission data indicating that the medal payout process has been completed is set in the A register (Sb64), and the value of the payout end command is set in the D register (Sb65). A communication data storage process is performed (Sb66). In the communication data storing process, a command is generated based on the values set in the A register and the D register and set in the command queue. Is set and the value of the payout end command is set in the D register, a payout end command indicating that the medal payout processing has ended is generated and set in the command queue.

  After the communication data storing process is performed in step Sb66, an address for setting a freeze at the end of the game is set in the HL register (Sb67), and a waiting time effect process is performed (Sb68). In the waiting time effect processing, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the game is to be controlled to be in the freeze state at the end of the game based on the data set in the address for setting the freeze in the game in the RAM 41c at the end of the game, and the state is controlled to the freeze state. If it is determined that the game is to be performed, a predetermined value is set in the BC register, and an interrupt BC times waiting process is performed to delay the progress of the game for a predetermined period. In the address for setting the freeze at the end of the game in the RAM 41c, for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the payout control process, data that can specify that the game is controlled to the freeze state is set. On the other hand, in the waiting time effect processing, when it is determined that the data for specifying the control of the freeze state is not set in the address for setting the freeze at the time of the game end in the RAM 41c, the setting of the BC register and the interrupt BC The waiting time effect process is terminated without performing the round waiting process or the like.

  After performing the waiting time effect in the step of Sb68, a setting process at the end of the game is performed (Sb69). In the setting process at the end of the game, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination of the re-game combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Processing for setting the number of bets for performing a replay (in the present embodiment, the same number of bets as the specified number of the game is set as a replay medal in a replay medal counter set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c) And a process of setting a replaying flag in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, a process of controlling the LED 20 during replay to an ON state (lighting state), and the like.

  After performing the setting process at the end of the game in the step of Sb69, it is determined whether or not an advantageous section end flag indicating that the advantageous section is to be ended is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb70). When it is determined that the section end flag has been set, the advantageous section data initializing section initializes a predetermined area in the storage area of the RAM 41c in which data related to control in the advantageous section is stored and ends the advantageous section. (Sb71 to Sb79).

  In the advantageous section data initialization processing, first, the number of sections of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized in the processing (2 in this embodiment) is set in the predetermined register (D) as the number of initialization area sections (Sb71). . Then, the RAM initialization table (the value of the start address of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized and the number of storage areas to be initialized (capacity, the number of included addresses) correspond to the value indicated by the number of sections. The address of the storage area of the ROM 41b in which the (set table) is stored is set in a predetermined register (HL) (Sb72). Thereafter, the number of storage areas corresponding to the value indicated by the number of sections of the predetermined register (D) is obtained from the storage area of the ROM 41b specified based on the address of the RAM initialization data table set in the predetermined register (HL). Then, the number of addresses of the initialization target area is set in the predetermined register (B), and the value of the leading address corresponding to the value indicated by the number of divisions of the predetermined register (D) is acquired, and the RAM address is set as the initialization target RAM address. It is set in a predetermined register (C) (Sb73, Sb74).

  After setting the initialization data (for example, 0) in the predetermined register (A), the predetermined register (A) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the initialization target RAM address set in the predetermined register (C). By setting the initialization data set in ()), a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is initialized with the initialization data (Sb75). Thereafter, the value of the predetermined register (C) is incremented by one to advance the initialization target RAM address by one (Sb76).

  Then, after subtracting 1 from the value of the predetermined register (B) to subtract 1 from the number of remaining addresses, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining addresses is greater than 0 to determine whether or not the initialization target range has ended. Is determined (Sb78). If it is determined in step Sd78 that the initial number of remaining addresses is larger than 0 and the initialization target range is not completed, the process returns to step Sb75, and the processes of Sb75 to Sb78 are performed until the number of remaining addresses becomes 0. The process is repeated until the initialization target determination is completed. As a result, a storage area (initialization target range) of the number of storage areas to be initialized (the number of addresses) from the start address of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized, which is predetermined in the RAM initialization data table, is set. , With initialization data.

  When it is determined in step Sb78 that the number of remaining addresses is not greater than 0 and the initialization target range has ended, that is, when all the predetermined areas of the RAM 41c specified based on the RAM initialization data table have been initialized, By subtracting 1 from the value of the predetermined register (D), 1 is subtracted from the value indicated by the number of sections of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized (Sb78), and whether or not the value indicated by the number of sections after subtraction is 0 (Sb79), and if the value indicated by the number of sections is not 0, the process returns to step Sb73, and based on the value indicated by the number of sections, the number of storage areas to be initialized next is stored in the RAM initialization table. And sets the number of addresses of the initialization target area in the predetermined register (B), and sets the value of the leading address corresponding to the value indicated by the number of sections of the predetermined register (D) to RA After being obtained from the initialization table and set in the predetermined register (C) as a RAM address to be initialized (Sb73, Sb74), initialization data (for example, 0) is set in the predetermined register (A), and the predetermined register (A) is set. The predetermined area of the RAM 41c is initialized by setting the initialization data set in the predetermined register (A) in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the initialization target RAM address set in (C). After the initialization with the data for use (Sb75), the value of the predetermined register (C) is incremented by 1 to advance the RAM address to be initialized by one (Sb75), and the number of addresses becomes 0 in the step of Sb79. The storage area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the value indicated by the number of sections of the storage area of the predetermined register (D) is initialized To. By repeating the respective processes in steps Sb73 to Sb78 until the number of sections of the storage area becomes 0, a predetermined storage area of the RAM 41c specified by the number of sections is initialized. Then, when the value indicated by the number of sections of the storage area of the predetermined register (D) becomes 0, the AT state management processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the main processing. The data related to the control during the advantageous section includes data related to the control of the AT state, and the predetermined area in the RAM 41c in which the data related to the control during the advantageous section is stored by the advantageous section data initialization process. Is initialized, the data relating to the control during the advantageous section and the data relating to the control of the AT state are initialized, and the advantageous section is terminated and the AT state is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, in the advantageous section data initialization processing, the storage area in the predetermined two sections in the RAM 41c is initialized by setting the initial value of the number of sections to 2, but by the advantageous section data initialization processing. A configuration in which a predetermined storage area of one section or a storage area of three or more sections in the RAM 41c may be initialized.

  As shown in FIG. 30, after determining that the advantageous section end flag has been set in step Sb70 and performing the advantageous section data initialization processing (Sb71 to Sb79), and in step Sb70, the advantageous section end After it is determined that the flag has not been set, the currently controlled gaming section is determined based on whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c indicating that the control is being performed on the advantageous section. It is determined whether or not the vehicle is in the advantageous section (Sb80). During the advantageous section flag, the predetermined number of bets is set by the internal lottery in the game in which the predetermined number of three bets is set and the BB is not controlled by the payout control processing in the above-described step Sb16. By winning, the game section is set to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c on condition that the game section is shifted to the advantageous section.

  If it is determined in step Sb80 that the advantageous section end flag is set, the data (1) indicating the ON state is set in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb81). ), And proceed to step Sb82. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb80 that the advantageous section end flag is not set, the process proceeds to step Sb82 without setting the data indicating the ON state in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section. When the data indicating the ON state is not set in the output buffer of the advantageous section signal, the value of the output buffer of the advantageous section signal is set to 0 (OFF state) when initialized by the above-described advantageous section data initialization process. ).

  After that, in step Sb82, referring to the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section, the value of the data set in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section is the initial value (0: data indicating the OFF state). Determine whether or not. If it is determined in step Sb82 that the value of the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section is the initial value (0), that is, if it is determined that the gaming section is not controlled to the advantageous section, the section display LED is turned off. The data number at the time is set in the A register (Sb83), and after performing the continuous data processing (Sb84), the process proceeds to step Sb85. In the continuous data processing in Sb84, processing for setting the output state of the signal during the advantageous section to the OFF state is performed based on the data number when the section display LED is turned off and a continuous data processing table described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb82 that the value of the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section is not the initial value (0), that is, the predetermined value (1) is set and the gaming section is controlled to the advantageous section. If it is determined, the process proceeds to step Sb85 without performing the processes of steps Sb83 and Sb84.

  In step Sb85, after setting the capacity of a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (RAM initialization target size) to be initialized each time one game ends, in the BC register (Sb85), a BB end flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not the special state (BB1, BB2) has been completed in the game based on whether or not there is (Sb86). The BB end flag is a flag that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c when it is determined that the special state (BB1, BB2) has been ended in the game by the above-described winning combination end check processing.

  If it is determined in step Sb86 that the special state has ended in the game, the capacity of a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (RAM initialization target size) to be initialized each time the special state ends is set in the BC register. (Sb87), the process returns to the step Sb1. On the other hand, if it is not determined in step Sb86 that the special state has ended in the game, the process returns to step Sb1 without performing step Sb87.

  Thereafter, the steps of Sb1 to Sb87 are repeatedly performed. When the main process completes, the process related to control of one unit of the game is completed, and the main process is repeatedly executed for each unit of the game.

  As described above, the initial setting processing and the main processing performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment include the processing included in the game program to the processing included in the non-gaming program, such as the non-gaming RAM area initialization processing and the RT information output. The processing, the medal sensor processing, the data processing for the combination ratio monitoring, and the like are called. When the process included in the non-game program is called, each time the process of the corresponding non-game program is called, the calling game program changes the value of the flag register among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 to the game. The value of the stack pointer SP used in the game program is stored and saved in the non-game RAM area on the call destination non-game program side. Is stored in the non-gaming stack area and saved. Then, processing according to the called non-gaming program (for example, processing for initializing the non-gaming RAM area in non-gaming RAM area initialization processing, medal sensor check processing in medal sensor processing described later, Each state count processing in data processing) is performed.

  Further, after performing the processing of the non-game program, the main control unit 41, on the non-game program side, saves the values of all the registers saved in the non-game stack area at the start of the non-game program to the corresponding register. And the register is returned to the state at the start of the non-game program, and the value of the stack pointer SP stored in the non-game RAM area at the start of the non-game program is set in the stack pointer SP. The stack pointer SP is returned to the state at the time of the start of the game program, and the value of the flag register stored in the game stack area before the call of the non-game program on the calling game program side is stored in the corresponding flag register. Processing to read and restore the register to the state before calling the non-game program It is made as to do.

  In addition, when performing various processes according to the non-game program, the main control unit 41 performs various processes according to the non-game program by calling the non-game program from the game program using the above-described CALL instruction or the like. When each process corresponding to the non-game program ends, the game program returns to the calling game program.

  The main control unit 41 (main CPU 41a) of the present embodiment can call RT information output processing, operation information signal output processing, hand ratio monitoring data processing, and the like included in the non-game program from the main processing included in the game program. The processing (RT information output processing, operation information signal output processing, hand ratio monitoring data processing, etc.) included in the non-game program called by the main processing is called when starting a predetermined processing. First, by using the LD instruction, the value of the stack pointer SP is read out by using the main processing which is the game program of the caller and is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The value of the stack pointer SP saved at the end of the non-game program is read and the current stack pointer S is read. By setting the value indicated, and sets the stack pointer SP for non game program.

  Further, the non-game program called by the main processing sets the stack pointer SP for the non-game program using the LD instruction, and then uses the first save instruction (PUSH ALL) to reset all the registers of the RAM 41c. A process for retreating to a predetermined area is performed. At this time, by using the LD instruction to set the stack pointer SP for the non-game program, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the flag register is set before and after the execution of the LD instruction. May change, and the state of the flag register when the non-game program stack pointer SP is set may be different from the state when the main process calls the non-game program. That is, on the non-gaming program side, the registers other than the flag register among all the registers saved by using the first save instruction are in the same state as the state when the main process calls the non-gaming program, The flag register may be different from the state when the main process calls the non-game program.

  The non-game program called by the main process uses the first return command (POP ALL) to terminate the non-game program and return to the main process included in the game program. After the values of all the registers saved at the start of the process are restored, the stack pointer SP is set for the game program using the LD instruction, and the process returns to the main process. At this time, by using the LD instruction, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and before and after the execution of the LD instruction, the state of the flag register changes, and the game program shifts from the main program to the main processing. The state of the flag register when returning may be different from the state when the main process calls the non-game program. That is, the registers other than the flag registers among all the registers at the time of returning to the main processing from the non-gaming program are in the same state as when the main processing calls the non-gaming program. The main processing may be different from the state when the non-game program is called.

  As described above, the state of the flag register saved and restored on the non-game program side using the first evacuation instruction and the first return instruction is the state when the main processing calls the non-game program, that is, the main processing May be in a state different from the state of the flag register used, and the non-game program protects the state when the main processing calls the non-game program for all registers including the flag register provided in the main control unit 41. Is difficult to do.

  On the other hand, in the main processing of the present embodiment, when the processing (RT information output processing, operation information signal output processing, data processing for winning ratio monitoring, etc.) included in the non-gaming program is called, the corresponding non-gaming program is executed. Every time the process is called, the main processing side of the caller uses the second save instruction (PUSH AF) to store the state of the flag register among the registers included in the main control unit 41 in the game stack area and save the state. When returning from the processing included in the non-game program to the main processing, the main processing uses the second return instruction (POP AF) to change the state of the flag register to the state of being saved to the game stack area. Let it return. With this, in the main process, when returning from the process included in the called non-game program, the state of the flag register can be returned to the state saved when the non-game program is called on the main process side. Of the registers restored by the non-gaming program, the registers other than the flag register are in the same state as the state in which the main processing calls the non-gaming program, while the main processing of the flag register is the non-gaming program. Even when the state may be different from the state at the time of calling, when returning from the non-game program to the main processing, the state of all registers can be returned to the state when the main processing called the non-game program. It has become.

  Also, the processing included in the non-game program called from the main processing included in the game program uses the first save instruction (PUSH ALL) to store the states of all registers provided in the main control unit 41 in the non-game stack area. Using the first return instruction (POP ALL), the state of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 is restored to the state saved in the non-game stack area, while the main processing is performed using the second save instruction (POP ALL). Using PUSH AF), the state of only the flag register among the registers included in the main control unit 41 is saved in the game stack area, and the state of the flag register is saved in the game stack area using the second return instruction (POP AF). It is designed to return to the evacuated state. Thus, in the game program, the state of the flag register is saved and restored using the 1-byte second save instruction and the second return instruction. Therefore, the 2-byte first save instruction and the first return used in the non-game program. The capacity of the game program can be reduced as compared with the case where the state of the register is saved and restored using the instruction. Also, in the game program, the state of only the flag register among the plurality of registers is saved in the game stack area using the second save instruction, so that the state of all registers is saved using the first save instruction used in the non-game program. Can be reduced as compared with the case of saving the game stack area.

  In the processing included in the game program such as the main processing of the present embodiment, the value of the second zero flag in the flag register is not used for the determination for performing various processes based on the program.

  In the main processing of the present embodiment, when the processing (RT information output processing, operation information signal output processing, data processing for the duty ratio monitoring, etc.) included in the non-game program is called, the timer interrupt is set to be prohibited and called. When the process returns to the main process, the timer interrupt is set to be enabled, so that the timer interrupt is set to the disabled state during the period in which the process included in the non-game program is being executed.

  In the main process of the present embodiment, when calling the processes (operation information signal output process, hand ratio monitor data process, etc.) included in the non-game program, the timer interrupt is set to disable after the flag register is saved. Then, when the process returns from the called process to the main process, the timer interrupt is set to be enabled, and then the flag register is returned.

  In the main processing and the like included in the game program of the present embodiment, it is possible to call the operation information signal output processing, the medal sensor processing, the data processing for the duty ratio monitoring and the like included in the non-gaming program. Is executed by the main control unit 41 in a state where the time until the next timer interrupt process is performed is sufficient, the process is performed within the time until the next timer interrupt process is performed. If the main control unit 41 executes all the processes included in the process, but the time until the next timer interrupt process is not sufficiently ensured, the next timer Timing at which all processing included in the processing is not completed within the time until the interrupt processing is performed, and the next timer interrupt processing is performed during the execution of the processing. It is constituted by the capacity of a program that may be.

  In the game program (main processing, game start waiting processing, etc.) of the present embodiment, when a non-game program is called, a one-time interruption process is performed and a timer interrupt process is performed. A series of processes including a process of calling a program are performed, and a non-game program is called. In other words, by calling and executing the non-game program triggered by the one-time interrupt processing, the non-game program is executed in a state where the time until the next timer interrupt processing is performed is sufficiently ensured. ing.

  As described above, in the main processing of this embodiment, the advantageous section end flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and when the advantageous section is ended, the signal output during the advantageous section stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is performed. After performing the advantageous section data initialization processing (Sb71 to Sb79) for initializing information on the advantageous section including the buffer and initializing the advantageous section signal output buffer to control the advantageous section signal to the OFF state, Continuous data processing is performed based on the initial value (0) of the signal output buffer during the advantageous section (Sb82 to Sb84), and OFF state data is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 19 to display the section. Is to be terminated. Thereby, the section display is terminated after the signal during the advantageous section is turned off, so that the section display can be prevented from being terminated in a state in which the advantageous section related information has not been initialized, and the advantageous section can be prevented. Since the middle signal output buffer is not initialized, it is possible to prevent the section display from ending even though the advantageous section middle signal is output to the test apparatus.

  In the main processing of the present embodiment, the advantageous section data initialization processing (Sb71 to Sb79) for initializing information on the advantageous section is performed, and the OFF state is indicated to the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section by the timer interrupt processing performed thereafter. When the initial value (0) is set, the signal during the advantageous section is controlled to the OFF state. Thus, by initializing the signal during the advantageous section when the advantageous section is ended, the signal during the advantageous section can be turned off without individually setting the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section to the OFF state.

In the main process of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in the advantageous section based on the flag during the advantageous section set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb80). A predetermined value (1) indicating the ON state is set in the buffer (Sb81). If the predetermined value is set in the advantageous section signal buffer by a timer interrupt process performed thereafter, the advantageous section signal is set to the ON state. Is controlled. With this, it is determined whether or not the game is in the advantageous section every time the game ends, and if it is determined that the game is in the advantageous section, the ON state is set in the output buffer of the signal in the advantageous section. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the signal during the advantageous section from being turned off.
The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can execute a main process repeatedly executed for each game of one unit and a timer interrupt process for interrupting the main process at regular time intervals and executing the process. In the main process, it is possible to perform a specific process (process by a game program) and a special process (process by a non-game program), and to manage one game time for measuring a minimum time of one game in a timer interrupt process. It is possible to perform timer processing (Sv20) for updating the timer value for use. During the execution of the specific process (game program), the timer interrupt process may be executed, and while the timer value for one game time management is updated, the timer is executed during the execution of the special process (non-game program). The interruption process is not executed, and the timer value for one game time management is not updated. Thereby, by updating the timer value for one game time management as much as possible, the progress of the game can be performed smoothly, but the timer value for one game time management is not updated during the period in which the special processing is performed. Thus, the process of updating the timer value for one game time management and the special process are not mixed.

  In the main process of this embodiment, it is determined whether the timer value for one game time management is a specific value (0) before the reel rotation of one game is started (Sb40), and the timer value for one game time management is determined. If it is determined that is not the specific value (0), the game waits without proceeding until the one game time management timer value is determined to be the specific value (0), and the one game time management timer value Is determined to be a specific value (0), the game is advanced. Thereby, the game is not advanced until it is specified that the minimum time has elapsed based on the timer value for one game time management, and the game is advanced when the minimum time has elapsed. Can be secured.

  In the main process of this embodiment, when it is determined that the timer value for one game time management is the specific value (0) (Sb40), the execution of the timer interrupt process is prohibited (Sb41), and then the continuous data process is performed. By doing so (Sb43), an initial value (a value equivalent to 4.1 seconds) is set in the one game time management timer. As a result, the timer interrupt processing is prohibited when setting the initial value in the one game time management timer, and the one game time management timer is set while the initial value is set in the one game time management timer. It is possible to prevent the value from being updated.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes a medal sensor process (Sg9) for monitoring the passing status of medals flowing down the medal receiving flow path 29b as a special process (non-game program). Accordingly, during the period in which the medal sensor process to be monitored is being performed, the timer value for one game time management is not updated, so that the process for updating the timer value for one game time management is related to the detection of fraud. There is no mixture of the medal sensor processing.

  As a special process (non-game program), the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment performs a total payout number, a total cumulative payout number, and a total It is designed to execute data processing for a winning ratio monitor for updating the number of consecutive payouts. Thereby, during the period in which the role ratio monitoring data processing for updating the data for calculating the role payout ratio and the continuous position ratio is performed, the timer value for one game time management is not updated. Processing for updating the timer value for gaming time management and data processing for the duty ratio monitoring related to performance display of the gaming machine are not mixed.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment performs, as a special process (non-game program), an operation information signal output process (Sb19) of outputting a stop execution position signal to a test device that tests the slot machine 1. Has become. Thus, during the period in which the operation information signal output process of outputting a test signal to the test device that tests the slot machine 1 is performed, the timer value for one game time management is not updated. Processing for updating the game time management timer value and operation information signal output processing relating to the test of the slot machine 1 are not mixed.

  In the main process of the present embodiment, when the timer value for one game time management is determined to be the specific value (0) (Sb40), the setting index data at the start of the game is set in the A register (Sb42), and the continuous data By performing the process (Sb42), by setting the initial value to the timer value for one game time management by the continuous data processing, the time measurement of the minimum time is started, and the timer value for one game time management is initialized to the initial value. Is set, a test signal is output. As a result, the test signal is output when the initial value is set to the timer value for one game time management. By specifying the time interval at which the test signal is output, the test apparatus can set the minimum time for one game. It is possible to specify whether time is secured.

[About group information setting processing in internal lottery processing]
The group information setting process performed by the main control unit 41 in the internal lottery process will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main control unit 41 performs an internal lottery in the internal lottery process of the main process, and sets, in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, a role number (winning number) capable of specifying a role (including a loss) won in the internal lottery. Then, the group information setting process (general role) is performed in the internal lottery process, and the group information (general role) that can specify the type of the general role won by the internal lottery is specified based on the role number (winning number). Then, the group information is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The group information is thereafter referred to by a game start command transmission process performed in the main process, and includes an internal winning command that includes the group information and can specify a type of a general combination (including a loss) that has been won by an internal lottery. Is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  As shown in FIG. 31, in the group information setting process (general role), first, an internal lottery process is performed to set a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and an internal lottery target role that has been won by the internal lottery in the game can be specified. The (winning number) is read into the A register (Sc1). Thereafter, the head address value of the RAM 41c in which the group information setting table is set is set in the HL register (Sc2), and the group information conversion process is performed (Sc3). In the group information conversion process, the group information (0, 16, 17, 41) corresponding to the role number (winning number, 0 to 64) is specified based on the group information setting table and the A register value, and Set. If the role number (winning number) is in the range of 0 to 15, 0 is set as the group information, and if the role number (winning number) is 16, 16 is set as the group information. If the number (winning number) is in the range of 17 to 40, 17 is set as the group information, and if the role number (winning number) is in the range of 41 to 64, 41 is set as the group information. Is set.

  After performing the group information conversion process in step Sc3, it is determined whether or not the group information set in the A register is 0 (Sc4). If it is determined that the group information is 0, The role number is read into the A register (Sc5), the value of the A register is corrected to the value of the role number, and the corrected value of the A register is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as group information (general role) (Sc6). . On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc4 that the group information is not 0, the value of the A register set by the group information conversion processing is stored as it is as group information (general combination) in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sc6). After performing the processing of the step of Sc6, the group information setting processing (general combination) is ended.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 performs the group information setting process (general role), thereby performing the internal lottery with the internal lottery target role (loss, replay 1A) in which the role number (winning number) is in the range of 0 to 16. , Replay 1B, Replay 1C, Replay 1D, Replay 1E, Replay 1F, Replay 2, Cherry 1, Cherry 2, Cherry 3, Chance Replay 1, Chance Replay 2, Watermelon, Common 1 role, Common 3 role, Common many When a winning combination is won, the internal lottery target winning combination number (winning number, 0 to 16) is set as the group information (general role), and the internal lottery role number (winning number) is set. In the case where an internal lottery target role (multiple-push pressing role) within the range of 17 to 40 is won, a common 17 is set as group information (general role), and a role number (winning number) is set in the internal lottery. But If the internal lottery subject role in the range of 1 to 46 (order officers Press 3 sheets) was elected sets a common 41 as a group information (general officer).

  Then, an internal winning command including the group information (general role) is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 as a result of the internal lottery, and the sub-control unit 91 causes the individual internal lottery to be won by the internal lottery. Although it is not possible to specify the target combination, it is possible to specify the type of the internal lottery target combination that has been won.

  Although not particularly shown, the main control unit 41 performs an internal lottery in the internal lottery process of the main process, and stores a role number (winning number) capable of specifying a winning (including a loss) in the internal lottery in the RAM 41c. After determining that the special number (winning number) is a number corresponding to the special combination (BB1, BB2), it is determined that the combination number is a number corresponding to the special combination (BB1, BB2). If it is determined, the value (1 in the case of BB1, 2 in the case of BB2) corresponding to the winning special combination is stored as group information (special combination) in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the special combination (BB1 , BB2), 0 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as group information (special combination) when it is determined that the number does not correspond to the number.

  In addition, after performing the internal lottery in the internal lottery process, the main control unit 41 determines that the role number (winning number) indicating the winning result of the internal lottery is within the range of 0 to 64. ) Is set as a general role winning number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and when the role number (winning number) is 65 or more, that is, when the special role (BB1, BB2) is won, the general role winning number is set. The value (0) indicating the loss is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets a common bet regardless of whether three bets (first bet) or two bets (second bet) are set. Performs the group information setting process (general role), and if either one of the multiple bells or three roles is won by the internal lottery, it can be specified that the multiple bells or three roles are won by the internal lottery However, an internal winning command capable of specifying the group of the winning combination is transmitted so that the type of the winning combination cannot be specified. Thus, regardless of whether the three bets (first bet) are set or the two bets (second bet) are set, the multi-bell and the three are set by the internal lottery. If any of the winning combinations is a lottery, and if any of the winning combinations is won, the operation mode that is advantageous to the player changes according to the type of winning combination. Even if the bet amount (first bet number) is set or the two bet amount (second bet number) is set, the multi-bell or three-piece role is won by the internal lottery Can be specified, but the internal winning command that can specify the group of the winning combination is transmitted so that the type of the winning combination cannot be specified. Therefore, the three bets (the first bet) are set. Even if two bets have been set (the second bet), the internal Advantageous operation mode can be prevented from being specified for the user.

  In addition, when three bets (first bet) are set or two bets (second bet) are set, a multi-bell or an internal lottery is performed. When the third winning combination is won, the internal winning command is created by the common group information setting process, so that the program capacity for creating the command can be reduced.

[About continuous data processing]
The control contents of the continuous data processing performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The continuous data processing is a subroutine that is included in the game program and is called in main processing and the like included in the game program. The continuous data processing is called from the main processing or the like with the data number set in the A register. The data number is data indicating the type of processing performed in the continuous data processing.

  As shown in FIG. 32, in the continuous data processing, first, it is determined whether or not the data number set in the A register when starting the continuous data processing is a number indicating that the data setting processing is to be performed. The determination is made (Sd1). If it is determined in step Sd1 that the data number set in the A register is a number indicating that processing other than the data setting processing is to be performed, the process proceeds to step Sd18, where 1-byte data lottery processing is performed. The one-byte data lottery process is a process of performing a predetermined lottery specified based on the data number of the A register. After performing the 1-byte data lottery process in step Sd18, the continuous data process is terminated, and the process returns to the calling source process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1 that the data number set in the A register is a number indicating that the data setting process is to be performed, the reference address of the index data of the continuous data processing table is set in the HL register. (Sd2), an addition process is performed (Sd3). In the addition process, the A register value is added to the HL register, and the data stored at the address specified by the added HL register value is obtained in the A register. In the index data table, the relative distance from the reference address to the start address of the setting data table corresponding to the data number is stored in the address area of the index data table corresponding to the data number (see FIG. 34). By performing the addition process in the step of Sd3, the address area of the index data table corresponding to the data number is set in the HL register, and the address area up to the start address of the setting data table corresponding to the data number is set in the A register. The relative distance will be set. For example, when the data number 1 is set in the A register and the addition processing is performed, as shown in FIG. 34, the address m2 + 1 (reference address m2 + data number 1) of the index data in the continuous data processing table is set in the HL register. Then, the relative distance data α (m6- (m2 + 1)) stored at the address m2 + 1 is set in the A register.

  After performing the addition process in step Sd3, the value of the A register is added to the HL register (Sd4), and the address specified by the HL register value is advanced by the A register value. Thus, for example, when the data number is 1, the head address m6 of the setting data table corresponding to the data number 1 is set in the HL register.

  Thereafter, the total number of times of setting stored in the area of the address specified by the HL register value, which is an area in the setting data table, is read into the B register, and the number of initializations is read into the C register (Sd5). After the HL register value is updated by adding 1 (Sd6), the HL register value is updated by adding 1 (Sd7). Thereafter, the setting destination address value stored at the address of the HL register value is read into the E register (Sd8).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the number of initializations of the C register is 0 (Sd9). If it is determined that the number of initializations of the C register is 0, the HL register value is updated by adding 1 to the value ( Sd10) The setting data value stored at the updated address of the HL register value is read into the A register (Sd11), and it is determined whether or not the value of the A register is 0 (Sd12). If it is determined in step Sd12 that the A register value is not 0, the setting data set in the A register is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c at the address specified by the E register value (Sd13).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd9 that the C register value is not 0, the number of initializations of the C register is decremented by 1 (Sd16), and the exclusive OR of the A register value is calculated. Initialization data (0) is set in the register (Sd17). Then, data for initialization is set in the A register in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c at the address specified by the E register value (Sd13), whereby the predetermined area of the RAM 41c at the address specified by the E register value is initialized. The Rukoto.

  After the A register value is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c at the address specified by the E register value in the step of Sd13, the B register is decremented by one to update the total set count by one (Sd14). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the remaining set number is 0 based on the B register value (Sd15).

  If it is determined in step Sd15 that the value of the B register is 0 and the remaining total number of settings is 0, the continuous data processing ends and the process returns to the caller. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd15 that the B register value is not 0 and the remaining total number of settings is not 0, the process returns to step Sd7, and the processing of each step of Ad7 to Sd15 is specified based on the B register value. This operation is repeated until the total number of set times reaches zero.

  As shown in FIG. 33, when it is determined that the value of the A register is 0 in the step of Sd12, after subtracting 1 from the total number of times of setting of the B register (Sd19), the BC register value is stored in the RAM 41c. The area is saved (Sd20). Thereafter, the setting destination address value specified based on the HL register value is read into the DE register (Sd21). Then, it is determined whether or not the E register value is a predetermined waiting time setting code value (Sd22). If it is determined that the E register value is not a predetermined wait time setting code value, port output processing is performed (Sd29). In the port output processing, the output signal from the output port specified by the HL register is set to the state (ON state or OFF state) specified by the A register.

  If it is determined in step Sd22 that the E register value is a predetermined waiting time setting code value, the determination code set in the predetermined bit of the E register value is deleted (Sd23). After the register value is set in the BC register as the waiting time (Sd24), the interrupt BC times waiting process is performed (Sd25). As a result, the process waits for the number of times set in the BC register until the timer interrupt process is performed.

  After performing the interrupt BC number waiting process in the step Sd25, the entire set number of the BC register saved in the step Sd20 is restored (Sd26). If it is determined in step Sd22 that the E register value is not the waiting time code, and the port output process has been performed in step Sd29, the processes in steps Sd23 to Sd25 are not performed, and the process proceeds to step Sd26. , All the set times of the BC register saved in the step of Sd20 are restored.

  After restoring the total number of times set in the BC register in step Sd26, the B register is decremented by one and the total number of times set is decremented by one (Sd27). Then, it is determined whether or not the remaining total set number specified based on the B register value is 0 (Sd28). If it is determined that the remaining total set number is not 0, the process returns to step Sd20, The processes in steps Sd20 to Sd28 are performed until it is determined that the remaining set number is 0. Then, in the step Sd28, when it is determined that the remaining total set number is 0, the continuous data processing is terminated, and the process returns to the calling source processing.

  As described above, in the continuous data processing, the process of initializing the predetermined area specified based on the data number and the continuous data processing table, and the processing of initializing the data number and the predetermined area specified based on the continuous data processing table A process of setting predetermined data specified based on a data processing table, and setting an output signal (ON state or OFF state) from a predetermined output port specified based on a data number and a continuous data processing table. Perform processing, etc.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 34, when the data number is 1 (setting data at the time of operating the start switch), the maintenance permission flag is displayed based on the setting data table, and the number of payouts displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed. (Upper digit) and payout number display (lower digit) are initialized. When the data number is 4 (setting data when the section display LED is turned off), output port processing is performed based on the setting of the port output code, and the external output signals 1 and 2 are turned off. Then, the signal during the advantageous section is set to the OFF state. If the data number is 27 (setting data at the time of shifting to the advantageous section), the advantageous section (01) is set in the section state information that can specify the game section being controlled, and the payout is controlled. The high-accuracy state flag indicating the state is set to the high-accuracy state (1).

[Game start waiting process]
The control content of the game start waiting process performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the game start waiting process is a subroutine included in the game program and called in the main process included in the game program.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in the game start waiting process, first, a medal insertion number display process is performed (Se1), and the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 corresponding to the number of medals already inserted into the slot machine 1 are turned on (lit state). To control. Thereafter, an error number corresponding to the error code (E1) that can specify that the hopper tank 34a is full is prepared in a predetermined register (A) (Se2), and by referring to a predetermined port input buffer, It is determined whether or not the hopper tank 34a is full based on the determined data of the full tank sensor 35a (Se3).

  If it is determined in step Se3 that the hopper tank 34a is full, an error process described later is performed (Se4). In the error processing, the game is controlled to an error state in which the progress of the game is disabled. Further, an error command capable of specifying the error code (E1) prepared in a predetermined register is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, and the error code (E1) can be referred to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c for other processing. Set as an error flag. In addition, control is performed so that the error code (E1) is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Thereafter, control of the error state is performed until it is specified that the condition for releasing the error state corresponding to the error code (E1) prepared in the predetermined register is satisfied. When the error code (E1) is set in the register and shifted to the error state, the process waits until the confirmed data of the full tank sensor 35a is turned off, and the confirmed data of the full tank sensor 35a is turned off. Then, an error command (cancellation) for canceling the error state is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, the error processing is terminated, and the process proceeds to Se5.

  If it is determined in step Se3 that the hopper tank 34a is not full, or if the error processing in step Se4 has been completed, the value of the replay medal counter set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set to a predetermined value. The data is read into the register (Se5). In the replay medal counter, a value according to the result of the previous game is set by the game end setting process in the previous main process, and the replay game is won in the previous game and replay is given. When the game has been performed, a numerical value (for example, 3) corresponding to the prescribed number of bets required to play the game is set, while if no re-game has been given in the previous game, 0 is set. Is set.

  Thereafter, the replay medal counter in the RAM 41c is cleared (Se6), and it is determined whether the value of the replay medal counter read in the step of Se5 is larger than 0, that is, whether a replay is provided. (Se7) If a replay has been awarded, a medal insertion execution process is performed (Se8). In the medal insertion execution processing, the value of the replay medal counter is set to the number of bets, and the first to third BET LEDs 14 to 16 are set to the ON state (lighting state) to set a predetermined number of bets (three in this embodiment). Is set. In addition, an insertion number command capable of specifying the number of medals used for setting the bet amount is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  When the value of the replay medal counter is 0 in step Se7, that is, when it is determined that no replay is provided, and after the medal insertion execution process is performed by the replay provided in step Se8. Performs a medal care permission setting process (Se9). In the medal maintenance permission setting process, the credit value set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and when the credit value does not reach the maximum value (50 in the present embodiment), the medal insertion unit 4 A medal care permission flag indicating that the insertion of a medal is permitted is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

  After performing the medal maintenance permission setting process in the step of Se9, a wait process for one interruption is performed (Se10). By performing the interrupt once wait processing, the timer interrupt processing (main) is performed, and the detection state of various switches, the lighting state of the LEDs, various timers, and the like are updated, and the detection state of these various switches is updated. In the state where is updated, the subsequent processing (for example, a medal insertion / payout error check processing, a medal insertion signal processing, and an operation input reception processing described later) can be performed.

  After performing the one-time interrupt processing in the step of Se10 and performing the timer interrupt once, the same input / output error check processing as in the above-described step Sb32 of the main processing is performed (Se11). Then, based on whether or not an error execution flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, it is determined whether or not error processing has been executed in the error check processing (Se12).

  If it is determined in the step of Se12 that the error processing has been executed in the error check processing, the process returns to the step of Se10, and the processing of the steps of Se10 to Se12 is performed again. Thereafter, in a state in which no abnormality is detected in the transition of the medal payout signal or the transition of the medal insertion signal, each processing of the steps Se10 to Se12 is performed. Processing will be performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se12 that the error execution flag is not set, a medal insertion signal process is performed (Se13). In the medal insertion signal processing, the medal insertion state is determined based on the transition of the medal insertion signal. Then, when normal insertion of medals is detected, medals are accepted for bet setting and credits, and the medal insertion signal processing ends. On the other hand, when abnormal medal insertion is detected, an error code (E5) is prepared and error processing is performed. After that, the error state is released and the error processing is ended, thereby finishing the medal insertion signal processing.

  After the medal insertion signal processing is performed in the step of Se13, the operation of accepting the operation of various switches is enabled, and the operation of the switch whose operation is enabled is performed. Is performed (Se14).

  In the operation input accepting process, when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, the sum of the credit set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c and the already set bet amount (set bet number). Is greater than or equal to the value (3) necessary for setting the bet number of three. When it is determined that the sum of the credit and the set bet amount is equal to or more than the value (3) necessary for setting the three bet numbers, the edge data of the MAXBET switch 6 is referred to and the ON edge is set. It is determined whether data has been set. When it is determined that the ON edge data is set, the operation by the MAXBET switch 6 is effectively accepted, the number of medals is set to bet so that the number of bets is three, and the number of medals set is set. Of the number of medals is subtracted from the credit. When it is determined that the ON edge data is not set, the process of controlling the BET switch valid LED 21 to the ON state (lighting state) is performed by setting ON state data in the output buffer of the BET switch valid LED 21. On the other hand, the total value of the credit set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c and the set bet amount (set bet number) is not more than the value (3) necessary for setting the three bet numbers. If it is determined that the ON edge data of the MAXBET switch 6 has been set, neither the process of determining whether the BET switch valid LED 21 is turned on nor the process of determining whether the ON edge data of the MAXBET switch 6 is set. If it is determined that the total value of the credit and the already set bet amount (set bet amount) is not more than the value (3) necessary for setting the three bet amount, the BET switch valid LED 21 Is kept off. Accordingly, in a situation where the remaining number of credits is sufficient to set the bet number of three, the MAXBET switch 6 is operated by the player or the like to set the bet number of three (first bet number). On the other hand, in a situation where the number of remaining credits is insufficient to set the three bets, the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not effectively received, and only two bets (the second bet) can be set. Even if the MAXBET switch 6 is operated, two bets are not set, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being played with the second bet as much as possible.

  In the operation input receiving process, when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal and the bet number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is the specified number (2 or 3), the start is started. The acceptance of the operation by the switch 7 is validated. In addition, when a medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, acceptance of operations by the settlement switch 10 and the setting key switch 37 is enabled.

  In the operation input receiving process, when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected while the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, a start flag indicating that the start switch 7 has been operated is set in a predetermined register. Thereafter, a process of switching the flow path of medals to the medal payout port 9 side by turning off the flow path switching solenoid 30 is performed. When the operation of the setting key switch 37 is detected in a state where the operation of the setting key switch 37 is valid, a setting value display process of displaying the setting value on the setting value display 24 is performed. In addition, when the operation by the settlement switch 10 is detected in a state where the operation by the settlement switch 10 is valid, a settlement process for returning the medal stored in the credit to the player is performed. After performing a process corresponding to the switches for which the operation has been detected, the operation input reception process is terminated.

  After performing the operation input receiving process in the step of Se14, it is determined whether or not a valid operation by the start switch 7 is detected based on the start flag (Se15). If the start flag is not set in the predetermined register and it is determined that a valid operation by the start switch 7 has not been detected, the process proceeds to step Se16, and an LED display process for controlling the lighting state of the start valid LED 18 is performed. .

  In the LED display process, when the operation of the start switch 7 is set to be enabled by the operation input reception process of Se14 and the operation of switches other than the reset switch 23 is not detected, the start valid LED 18 is turned on. (Lighting state), in the state where the operation by the start switch 7 is set to be valid, when the operation of switches other than the reset switch 23 is detected, and when the operation by the start switch 7 is set to be valid. If not, the start valid LED 18 is controlled to be in the OFF state (light-out state), and whether the operation by the start switch 7 is valid or invalid is notified according to the lighting state of the start valid LED 18.

  In step Se15, a start flag is set in a predetermined register, and when it is determined that a valid operation by the start switch 7 has been detected, a random number value for internal lottery is obtained from the random number circuit 42, and A predetermined area is set (Se17). Thereafter, medal insertion state data that can specify the set bet amount is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Se18), the start valid LED 18 is set to an OFF state (light-out state) (Se19), and a medal maintenance permission flag is set. The game is cleared from a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Se20), and the display of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be cleared (Se21), the game start waiting process is ended, and the process returns to the main process. Thereafter, in the main process, the internal lottery is performed using the random number value obtained in the step of Se17, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is started in response to the detection of the operation of the start switch 7. Thus, one game is started.

  As described above, in the game start waiting process included in the game program, it is possible to call the medal insertion signal process included in the game program. When calling the medal insertion signal process, the timer interrupt process (main) is performed by one. After performing the one-time interruption process of waiting until it is performed twice, the medal insertion signal process is called. As will be described later, in the timer interrupt process (main), a port input process for updating input data of sensors including the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is performed. After performing step 1, by calling and executing the medal insertion signal processing, in the medal sensor processing called by the medal insertion signal processing, processing based on the latest input data updated by the timer interrupt processing (main) is performed. It has become possible.

  Further, in the operation input receiving process performed in the game start waiting process, the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is effectively received when three bets can be set by adding the already set bet and credit. ing. Accordingly, in a situation where the remaining number of credits is sufficient to set the bet number of three, the MAXBET switch 6 is operated by the player or the like to set the bet number of three (first bet number). On the other hand, in a situation where the number of remaining credits is insufficient to set the three bets, the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not effectively received, and only two bets (the second bet) can be set. Even if the MAXBET switch 6 is operated, two bets are not set.

  In the operation input accepting process performed in the game start waiting process, when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, the bet number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is a specified number (2 or 3). In some cases, the reception of the operation by the start switch 7 is enabled, and the start operation is performed regardless of whether three bets are set or two bets are set. The game can be started by operating the switch 7.

[About error handling]
The control content of the error processing performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The error process is a subroutine included in the game program and called in the main process included in the game program. The error processing is called in a state where an error number corresponding to an error code capable of specifying the type of error that has occurred is set in a predetermined register (A register in this embodiment).

  As shown in FIG. 36, in the error processing, first, at the start of the error processing, the error number set in the A register is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf1). Then, an error command value indicating that error processing is being performed is set in the D register (Sf2), and communication data storage processing is performed (Sf3). In the communication data storage processing, a command is generated based on the values set in the A register and the D register and set in the command queue. For example, if the error number corresponding to the error code is set in the A register and the value of the error command is set in the D register, an error command including an error number that can identify the type of error that has occurred is transmitted. Generate and set to command queue. The commands set in the command queue are sequentially transmitted by a command transmission process included in the subsequent timer interrupt process.

  After the communication data storage processing is performed in step Sf3, a determination whether to determine whether or not the occurring error is a releasable error (cancellation determination value) is defined. The start address of the value table is set in the HL register (Sf4), and the release enable / disable determination value defined in the address obtained by adding the A register value (error number) to the HL register value is read into the E register (Sf5). ).

  Thereafter, the value of the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is read into the HL register, and the value of the HL register is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 1c (Sf6).

  After that, the address of the output buffer corresponding to the first place (lower order) of the game auxiliary display 12 is set in the C register (Sf7), and the 7-segment display data storage processing is performed (Sf8). In the 7-segment display data storage processing, display data for displaying numbers (0 to 9 and non-display in this embodiment) on the 7-segment display used in the game auxiliary display 12 and set in the ROM 41b in advance is stored. The display data is specified based on the specified 7-segment display data table and the value set in the A register at the start of the 7-segment display data storage processing, and the specified data is output to the output buffer of the address set in the C register. Set the display data. Thereafter, E display data for displaying a predetermined character (“E” in the present embodiment) is set in an output buffer corresponding to the tens place (upper rank) of the game auxiliary display 12 (Sf9). The display data is set in the output buffers of the ones place and the tenth place of the game auxiliary display 12, and then the timer interrupt processing is performed, so that the game auxiliary display 12 displays in a display mode (for example, according to the display data) , “E1”, etc.).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the error that has occurred based on the release determination value set in the E register is an error that can be released without initializing the RAM 41c of the slot machine 1 (Sf10). If it is determined in step Sf10 that the error that has occurred cannot be canceled, the process is stopped and the process waits. When the processing is stopped, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is temporarily stopped, the setting key switch 37 is turned on to restart the power supply, and the mode is changed to the setting change state, so that the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is changed. It is possible to initialize and release the error state. If the cause of the error has not been eliminated, the error state is temporarily canceled by shifting to the setting change state when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, but thereafter, the error again occurs. The error is detected and error processing is performed. An error that cannot be cleared without initializing the RAM 41c of the slot machine 1 is, for example, a RAM abnormality error that shifts when a data abnormality in the RAM is detected. On the other hand, an error that can be released without initializing the RAM 41c of the slot machine 1 is, for example, an abnormality (error code E5) related to a medal insertion signal detected by a medal sensor process included in a non-game program described later.

  If it is determined in step Sf10 that the error that has occurred can be canceled, a one-interrupt wait process is performed (Sf11), a timer interrupt process is performed once, and the output state of various sensors and the like is changed. Wait for the update.

  After performing the one-time interrupt process in step Sf11, the input buffers 0 to 2 in which input state data of various switches (input data, fixed data, and edge data in this embodiment) are stored. The input data of various sensors stored in the input buffer 0 is read into the A register (Sf12), and the input data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 3c is extracted (Sf13). Further, the determined data of various sensors stored in the input buffer 1 is read into the A register (Sf14), and the determined data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 3c and the determined data of the full tank sensor are extracted (Sf15). Then, based on the input data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 3c, the determined data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 3c, and the determined data of the full tank sensor, it is determined whether or not the error has been canceled (Sf17).

  When it is determined in step Sf17 that any one of the input data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 3c, the fixed data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 3c, and the fixed data of the full tank sensor is not a normal value and the error has not been released. Returns to the step of Sf11, and repeats the processing of Sf11 to Sf17. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sf17 that the input data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 3c, the fixed data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 3c, and the fixed data of the full tank sensor are all normal values and the error is released. Reads the edge data of various sensors stored in the input buffer 2 into the A register (Sf18), and determines whether or not the reset operation by the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 has been performed (Sf19).

  If it is determined in step Sf19 that the reset operation has not been performed, the process returns to step Sf11, and the processes in Sf11 to Sf19 are repeatedly performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sf19 that the reset operation has been performed, the value of the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is returned to the value saved in step Sf6 (Sf20).

  Thereafter, clear data (0) is set in the A register as transmission data (Sf21), and the error number stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set to 0 and cleared using the value of the A register (Sf22). ). Then, a communication data setting process is performed (Sf23).

  When the communication data setting process is performed in step Sf23, the value of the error command set in step Sf2 is set in the D register. In the communication data setting process in step Sf23, 0 is set as the error number. Generate an error command that can specify that the error has been released, and set it in the command queue.

  After performing the communication data setting process in the step of Sf23, a wait process for one interrupt is performed (Sf24), and the error command set in the command queue is transmitted by the timer interrupt process. Then, the error processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the processing performed before the error processing was started.

  As described above, in the error processing of the present embodiment, the timer interrupt processing can be performed during the execution of the error processing, and the timer value for one game time management is updated. As a result, the timer value for one game time management is updated during the execution of the error processing, so that the elapsed time of the minimum time is counted even during the error processing, and the game is smoothly performed after the error processing is completed. be able to.

  In the error processing of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the reset operation by the reset switch 23 has been performed while the power supply to the slot machine 1 is continued (Sf19), the error processing is terminated. It is possible to terminate without interrupting the power supply. Thus, the game can be smoothly restarted even if the error processing is performed.

[Medal insertion signal processing]
Next, control contents of a medal insertion signal process which is called from the game start waiting process by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The medal insertion signal processing is a subroutine included in the game program and called in the game start waiting process included in the game program.

  As shown in FIG. 37, in the medal insertion signal processing, first, a medal maintenance permission flag indicating that the insertion of medals from the medal insertion section 4 is permitted in the medal maintenance permission setting processing of the game start waiting processing is set. It is determined whether or not there is (Sg1). If the medal maintenance permission flag has not been set, the medal insertion signal process is terminated, and the process returns to the calling source game start waiting process. On the other hand, when the medal maintenance permission flag is set, the CPU refers to the medal insertion signal state transition data set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sg2). The medal insertion signal state transition data is data that can specify the transition of the state of the detection signals of the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a medal insertion signal), and includes a medal sensor check included in the non-game program. The processing is updated at a predetermined timing based on the input data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and the like, and is set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c.

  Then, based on the medal insertion signal state transition data referred to in step Sg2, the detection range A (see FIGS. 4 and 5) of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c in the medal selector 29 is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4. It is determined whether or not a medal is passing (Sg3). When it is determined that the medals are not passing through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is controlled to the ON state (Sg4), and the medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 are set to the medal selector. A hopper provided inside the housing 1a is provided with a channel for medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 so as to flow down the medal inflow channel 29a and the medal receiving channel 29b in the 29 and guided to the hopper tank 34a. Control is performed to switch to the tank 34a side. Thereafter, the medal insertion signal disregard timer is cleared (Sg6).

  Here, the medal insertion signal ignoring timer sets the output of a control signal for turning off the flow path switching solenoid 30 at least when setting the flow path switching solenoid 30 to the OFF state, and then sets the control signal output to the flow path switching solenoid. 30 is operated to measure the passage of the switching time until the flow path of the medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4 is actually switched to the medal payout port 9 side. This is a timer for controlling the input signal to be ignored. When the control signal output of the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set in the medal insertion signal ignoring timer to switch the medal flow path, at least the control signal output setting of the flow path switching solenoid 30 is performed and then the actual setting is performed. A predetermined time (504 milliseconds in this embodiment) until the channel of the medal is switched is set. After that, the medal insertion signal ignoring timer is decremented and updated by the counter updating process of the timer interrupt process, and when it becomes 0, it is possible to specify that the switching time has elapsed.

  When it is determined in step Sg3 that a medal is passing through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and after the medal insertion signal ignore timer is cleared in step Sg6, the above-described second evacuation instruction is used. After saving the value of the flag register, in which the operation result is stored, of the registers provided in the main control unit 41 in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order (Sg7), the timer interrupt is executed. Prohibition is set (Sg8), and the medal sensor process included in the non-game program is called and executed using the above-mentioned CALL command (Sg9).

  In the medal sensor process, first, in the same manner as the above-described RT information output process, the current stack pointer is read from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program by using the above-described LD instruction. The value of the address indicated by the SP is read, stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area, and evacuated. Then, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program is read from a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is set for a non-game program. Then, the values of all the registers (accumulator register, flag register, general-purpose register, index register, interrupt register, refresh register, program counter, etc.) provided in the main control unit 41 including the flag register are described using the first save instruction. Are saved in a predetermined order in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP. When the medal sensor process included in the non-gaming program is called from the gaming program, when the stack pointer SP is changed from that for the gaming program to that for the non-gaming program, the LD instruction is used and the flag register is used. Is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the medal sensor process is called from the game program, the state of the register that is evacuated after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the medal sensor process is determined by the game program calling the medal sensor process. May be different from the state of the register.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the medal insertion signal state transition data is normal. When the medal insertion signal state transition data is normal, the medal passing state reference data (normal passage) indicating that the medal has passed the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c normally or the medal is inserted. The medal passing state reference data (medal detection) indicating that it has started to pass through the detection range A of the sensors 31a to 31c, and the passing state of the medals in the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is the previous determination. The medal passing state reference data indicating no change from the time (no change) is set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. Thereafter, the medal insertion signal state transition data is updated based on the input data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the medal insertion signal state transition data, medal-related error data that can specify an error code (E5) indicating that an abnormality related to the medal insertion signal has been detected is stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area. Perform processing such as setting.

  Then, in the same manner as in the RT information output process described above, the value of the register saved at the time of starting the medal sensor process is sequentially read from the non-game stack area using the first return command described above, and the medal sensor is read out. All registers are restored to the state when the processing was started. Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer SP saved to a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area when the medal sensor processing is started is read out using the above-described LD instruction, and is set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP, thereby obtaining the medal. The stack pointer SP is returned to the state at the time when the sensor processing was started, and the winning information output processing ends. Incidentally, in order to terminate the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program and return to the game program, after restoring the values of all the registers saved at the start of the medal sensor processing, the stack pointer SP is reset. When changing from the non-game program to the game program, the use of the LD instruction changes the second zero flag TZ of the flag register, and the state of the flag register before and after the execution of the LD instruction is changed. May change. In other words, the state of the register when the medal sensor processing is ended may be different from the state of the register that has been saved when the medal sensor processing is started.

  After the medal sensor process is performed in step Sg9, the timer interrupt is set to be enabled (Sg10), and the value of the register saved in step Sg7 is saved using the above-described second return instruction. By sequentially reading from the game stack area in the reverse order and setting it in the flag register, the flag register is returned to the state before performing the winning information output process (Sg11). After the medal sensor processing is performed by performing the evacuation processing and restoration processing of all the registers inside the medal sensor processing in step Sg9 and the evacuation processing and restoration processing of the flag register in steps Sg7 and Sg11. In, the states of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 are completely restored to the states before the processing is performed.

  Thereafter, the medal-related error data is read into a predetermined register with reference to a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area (Sg12), and it is determined whether or not an error code (E5) is set by a medal sensor process (medal sensor check process). A determination is made (Sg13). When the error code (E5) is set, that is, when the medal-related error data is read into a predetermined register and the error code (E5) is prepared in the predetermined register, error processing is performed. (Sg14), the game is controlled to an error state that disables the progress of the game.

  In the error processing, the error processing is controlled to an error state where the progress of the game is disabled. Further, an error command capable of specifying an error code (E5) prepared in a predetermined register is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, and the error code (E5) can be referred to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c for other processing. Error flag. In addition, control is performed so that the error code (E5) is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Thereafter, control of the error state is performed until it is specified that the error state release condition corresponding to the error code (E5) prepared in the predetermined register is satisfied. When the error code (E5) is prepared in a predetermined register and the state is shifted to the error state, the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are OFF and the reset / setting switch Until 38 or the ON state of the reset switch 23 is established, the control waits without performing the control to advance the game. Then, when the cancellation condition is satisfied, an error command (cancellation) for canceling the error state is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, the error processing ends, and the process returns to the medal insertion signal processing.

  When it is determined in step Sg13 that the error code (E5) is not set as the medal-related error data, or after the error processing in step Sg14 is completed, the error code is set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. The contents of the medal passing state reference data are determined with reference to the medal passing state reference data (Sg15) (Sg16, Sg17).

  If it is determined in step Sg16 that the medal passing state reference data (no change) has been set, the medal insertion signal processing ends, and the processing returns to the game start waiting processing. If it is determined in step Sg17 that the medal passing state reference data (medal detection) has been set, the process proceeds to step Sg18, where the medal passing state reference data (normal passing) has been set in step Sg17. If it is determined that the medal passing state reference data (medal detection) has not been set, the process proceeds to step Sg21.

  If it is determined in step Sg17 that the medal passing state reference data (medal passing) has been set, the insertion state determination process is performed (Sg18). In the insertion state determination process, the credit counter that counts the current number of credits set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and the value of the credit counter is set to the maximum value of the credits of the slot machine 1 (50 in this embodiment). It is determined whether or not the situation is one less, that is, the situation where the next medal to be accepted is the last medal that can be added to the credit. Then, a final reception flag that can specify whether or not the next medal to be received is the last medal that can be added to the credit is set in a predetermined register, and the insertion state determination process ends.

  After the insertion status determination process is performed in step Sg18, if it is determined that the next medal to be accepted is the last medal that can be added to the credit based on the final acceptance flag set in the predetermined register, By performing the medal blocker off process (Sg20) and setting the flow path switching solenoid 30 to the OFF state, the flow path of the medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4 is moved from the hopper tank 34a to the medal payout port 9 side. Switching is performed so that medals inserted into the medal insertion unit 4 after the medals detected by the inserted medal sensor 31c are returned from the medal payout port 9 through the medal return flow path 29c. In the medal blocker off process, after setting the flow path switching solenoid 30 to the OFF state, referring to the medal insertion signal state transition data set in the game RAM area, the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. It is determined whether or not a medal is passing through the detection range A. If the medal is passing through the detection range A, the above-described medal insertion signal disregard timer is set to a predetermined value (in this embodiment, a value corresponding to 504 milliseconds). ) Is set to start measuring a predetermined time by the medal insertion signal ignoring timer. Thus, in a sensor monitoring process to be described later for a predetermined time after the end of the medal blocker off process, regardless of the state of the medal insertion signal, the abnormality of the medal insertion signal is determined and the sensor error reference data (inserted medal sensor) is set. It is not going to be done.

  After performing the medal blocker off process in step Sg20, the medal insertion signal process is terminated, and the process returns to the game start waiting process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the next medal to be accepted is not the last medal that can be added to the credit based on the final acceptance flag, the medal insertion signal process is terminated without performing the medal blocker off process, and the game start waiting process is performed. Return to

  If it is determined in step Sg17 that the medal passing state reference data (normal passing) has been set and the medal passing state reference data (normal passing) has not been set, the predetermined area of the port input buffer is referred to. Then, the finalized data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is acquired (Sg21), and it is determined whether or not the finalized data is in the ON state (Sg22). If it is determined that the finalized data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is in the ON state, the input data of the inserted medal sensor 31c is acquired with reference to a predetermined area of the port input buffer (Sg23), and the input data is turned off. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (Sg24).

  When it is determined in step Sg19 that the finalized data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is not in the ON state, and when the finalized data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is in the ON state, and in step Sg20, the input data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is If it is determined that the medals are not in the OFF state, that is, if medals are passing through the medal receiving flow path 29b or if there are no medals in the medal receiving flow path 29b, the medal insertion signal processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sg22 that the determined data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is in the ON state, and in step Sg24, it is determined that the input data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is in the OFF state, ie, in the medal receiving flow path. At 29b, when the medal has passed the detection position where the inserted medal sensor 31c can detect the medal, the medal insertion process is performed (Sg25).

  In the medal insertion process, it is determined whether or not a specified number of bets has been set with reference to the currently set bet number stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. If the specified number of bets has not been set, one is added to the current number of bets, and if the specified number of bets is already set, one is added to the credit counter.

  After the medal insertion processing is performed in step Sg25, a medal maintenance permission setting processing is performed (Sg26), and when the credit value has not reached the maximum value (50 in the present embodiment) based on the credit counter. Then, a medal maintenance permission flag indicating permission of medal insertion from the medal insertion unit 4 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

  After the medal maintenance permission setting process is performed in step Sg26, if the medal maintenance permission flag is not set, a predetermined value (corresponding to 504 milliseconds in the present embodiment) corresponding to the medal insertion signal ignoring timer is set. After setting the value) and starting the counting of a predetermined time by the medal insertion signal ignoring timer (Sg28), the medal insertion signal processing is ended. On the other hand, if the medal care permission flag is set, the medal insertion signal processing is terminated without setting the medal insertion signal disregard timer. Note that the medal insertion signal ignoring timer is set to a predetermined value (a value corresponding to 504 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in step Sg28, and thereafter is decremented every predetermined time to obtain a predetermined predetermined time ( When 4.1 seconds have elapsed in this embodiment), the value is set to 0, and it is possible to determine whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed based on whether or not the medal insertion signal disregard timer is 0. ing.

  As described above, in the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program, it is possible to call the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program, and when calling the medal sensor processing, the value of the flag register is stored in the game stack of the RAM 41c. When the game is returned to the area and the process returns from the medal sensor process to the medal insertion signal process, the value of the flag register is returned to the value saved in the game stack area of the RAM 41c.

  In the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program, when calling the medal sensor processing included in the non-gaming program, the timer interrupt is set to be prohibited and the medal sensor processing is performed. When the process returns to the input signal process, the timer interrupt is set to be enabled, so that the timer interrupt is disabled during the execution of the medal sensor process included in the non-game program.

  In the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program, when calling the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program, the value of the flag register is evacuated, and then the timer interrupt is set to be prohibited, and the medal sensor processing is performed. It is supposed to do.

  In the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program, after performing the medal sensor processing included in the non-gaming program in a state where the timer interrupt is set to be prohibited, when returning from the medal sensor processing to the medal insertion signal processing, the timer After the interrupt is set to be enabled, the value of the flag register is returned to the value saved in the game stack area of the RAM 41c.

  The medal insertion signal process is a process called by the game start waiting process. As described above, in the game start wait process, the interrupt one-time wait process that waits until the timer interrupt process (main) is performed once is performed. After the execution, the medal insertion signal processing is called. In the medal insertion signal processing, the medal insertion signal processing is started, and after performing a predetermined processing, the timer interrupt is set to be prohibited, and the medal sensor processing included in the non-gaming program is called and performed. I have. As described above, in the gaming machine start waiting process and the medal insertion signal process, the medal insertion signal process is called after the game start waiting process performs the interrupt once wait process, and the medal sensor process is performed in the medal insertion signal process. In a state in which the timer interrupt processing (main) is performed by at least one interrupt wait processing in the game start wait processing, and the input data of the sensors is updated by the port input processing included in the timer interrupt processing (main), A medal sensor process is performed.

[Medal sensor processing and medal sensor check processing]
Control contents of the medal sensor process and the medal sensor check process performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The medal sensor process is a subroutine included in the non-game program and called in the medal insertion signal process included in the game program. The medal sensor check process is a subroutine included in the non-game program and called in the medal sensor process included in the non-game program.

  As shown in FIG. 38, in the medal sensor process, first, using the above-mentioned LD instruction, the value of the address indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area. And retracted (Sh1). Thereafter, by using the above-described LD instruction, a predetermined value of the non-gaming stack area (a value stored at the end of the previous non-gaming program) is set as the value of the stack pointer SP, thereby setting the stack pointer SP to the non-gaming mode. Set for the program (Sh2). Then, using the above-described first save instruction, the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 are saved by storing them in a predetermined order in the non-game stack area (Sh3). Thereafter, a medal sensor check process included in the non-game program is performed (Sh4).

  After the medal sensor check process is performed in the step of Sh4, the values of the registers saved in the step of Sh3 are sequentially read from the non-game stack area by using the above-described first return instruction, and the winning information output process is performed. After restoring all registers to the state at the time of the start (Sh5), the value of the stack pointer SP stored and saved in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area in the step of Sh1 using the LD instruction is set to By setting the stack pointer SP, the stack pointer SP is returned to the state at the time when the medal sensor processing was started (Sh6), the medal sensor processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the caller's medal insertion signal processing.

  As shown in FIG. 39, in the medal sensor check processing, first, medal passing state reference data and medal-related error reference data set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c are cleared (Si1, Si2). The medal passing state reference data is data that can specify the passing state of medals in the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c as a result of the medal sensor check processing. Based on the input data of 31c and the like, it is determined that the medal has passed the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c normally, or the medal has started to pass the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. That is, it is possible to specify that it has been detected that it has been detected, and that it has been determined that the state of detecting medals by the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c has not changed since the previous determination. The initial value of the medal passing state reference data is medal passing state reference data (no change) indicating that the medal detection state has not changed from the previous determination. In the medal-related error reference data, as a processing result of the medal sensor check processing, an abnormality (error code E5) related to a detection signal (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a medal insertion signal) of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is detected. It is data that can specify the effect. The medal passing state reference data and the medal-related error reference data are set in the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c, so that they can be referred to and updated by the non-game program, but can only be referred to from the game program. is there.

  After clearing the medal passing state reference data and the medal-related error reference data in the steps of Si1 and Si2, the current data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are acquired by referring to a predetermined area of the port input buffer (Si3), and the medal is inserted. Correct / incorrect data for determining whether or not the transition of the signal state is normal is obtained by referring to a predetermined area of the ROM 41b (Si4), and the medal center check processing before the previous time is performed by referring to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. To acquire the medal insertion signal state transition data stored in (5) (Si5).

  Then, the medal insertion signal state transition data acquired in the step of Si5 is compared with the correct / incorrect data acquired in the step of Si4 to determine whether or not the medal insertion signal state transition data is correct (Si6).

  If it is determined in step Si6 that the medal insertion signal state transition data is correct, the medal insertion signal state transition data is updated based on the current data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c acquired in step Si3, so that a new medal insertion signal state transition data is obtained. Medal insertion signal state transition data is created and stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c (Si7).

  Then, with reference to a medal passing time timer set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c (Si8), based on the medal insertion signal state transition data updated in the step of Si7, the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are determined. It is determined whether the current and previous detection states are OFF (Si9, Si10). The medal passing time timer is a timer that measures the duration of a period during which it is determined that the medals are passing through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. As described later, based on the medal insertion signal state transition data, the timer is started and then updated by the timer interrupt processing (main) when the medal insertion signal is turned on.

  In the steps of Si9 and Si10, when it is determined that the present detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is OFF and the previous detection state is not OFF, that is, within the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. If there is a possibility that the detected state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c has changed from the ON state to the OFF state due to the medal that has been in the detection range having exited from the detection range, the medal passing time referred to in the step of Si8. The timer determines whether or not the time is less than the shortest value (in this embodiment, 10.08 milliseconds) of a normal passage time range required for a medal to pass normally through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. (Si11). Note that the normal passage time range includes the measured value of the time required for the medal to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the shape of the medal receiving channel 29b of the medal selector 29, and the insertion in the medal receiving channel 29b. It is determined in advance based on the arrangement of the medal sensors 31a to 31c, the characteristics of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and the like (in the present embodiment, the range is 10.08 to 99.68 milliseconds).

  If it is determined in step Si11 that the medal passing time timer is not less than the shortest value of the normal passing time range, the medal insertion signal state transition data stored in step Si7 is cleared (Si12), and the medal passing time timer is cleared. Is cleared (Si13), medal passing state reference data (normal passing) indicating that the medal has normally passed the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is set in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c. Then, the medal sensor check processing ends. On the other hand, if the medal passing time timer is not less than the shortest value of the normal passing time range, the process proceeds to Si19 described later.

  When it is determined in the steps of Si9 and Si10 that both the current and previous detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are OFF, that is, the medals do not pass through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, If the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c have not changed from the time of the previous determination, the medal passing state reference data is initialized in the step of Si1, that is, the medal passing state reference data (no change) is changed. The state set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is maintained, and the medal sensor check processing ends.

  In the step of Si9, when it is determined that the current detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is not the OFF state, that is, the medal has passed the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c If it is in the ON state, it is determined whether or not the medal passing time timer referred to in the step of Si8 has exceeded the maximum value of the normal passing time range (99.68 milliseconds in this embodiment) (Si15).

  If it is determined in step S15 that the medal passing time timer has not exceeded the maximum value of the normal passing time range, it is determined whether the medal passing time timer is operating (Si16). When the medal passing time timer is not operating, that is, when a medal newly enters the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c changes from the OFF state to the ON state. If the time has not yet started to be measured by the medal passing time timer, the medal passing time timer is set to 0 and started (Si17), and then the medals are detected by the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. The medal passing state reference data (medal detection) indicating that it has been detected that the vehicle has started to pass the detection range A is set in a predetermined area of the non-game area of the RAM 41c, and the medal sensor check processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S15 that the medal passing time timer has exceeded the maximum value of the normal passing time range, the process proceeds to step S19 described below. When it is determined in step S16 that the medal passing time timer is operating, that is, the medal has passed the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and the ON state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is continued. If the medal passing state reference data is initialized in the step of Si1, that is, the medal passing state reference data (no change) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the medal is maintained. The sensor check processing ends. Note that the medal passing time timer is set to 0 in the step of Si17 and started, and thereafter is added at predetermined intervals by a timer interrupt process, and is set to 0 in the step of Si17. The elapsed time, that is, the elapsed time from when it is determined that the medal insertion signal state transition is correct and the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are turned on is measured by a medal passing time timer.

  If it is determined in step Si6 that the medal insertion signal state transition data is not correct, if it is determined in step Si11 that the medal passing time timer is less than the minimum value of the normal passing time range, in step Si15, the medal passing time timer is determined. Is determined to exceed the maximum value of the normal passage time range, medal-related error reference data (E5) indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the medal insertion signal is set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. At step (Si19) and step Si7, the medal insertion signal state transition data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is cleared (Si20), and the medal passing time timer is cleared to stop measuring the time (Si21). And returns to the medal sensor process. If the medal-related error reference data (E5) is set in the step of Si19 and the process returns to the medal sensor check process, then the medal-related error reference is performed in the medal insertion signal process of the game start waiting process included in the game program. By referring to the data (E5), an error state is controlled.

  As shown in FIG. 40, in determining whether or not the medal insertion signal state transition in the step of Si6 of the medal sensor check processing included in the non-game program is correct, the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 (inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c). When it is detected that the medals have started to pass through the detection ranges of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3, the inserted medal sensor 1 (inserted medal sensor 31a) changes from the OFF state to the ON state, and then the inserted medal A transition in which the sensor 2 (insertion medal sensor 31b) changes from the OFF state to the ON state and then the insertion medal sensor 3 (insertion medal sensor 31b) changes from the OFF state to the ON state is specified based on the medal insertion signal transition state data. In this case, the medal insertion signal state transition is determined to be correct.

  When it is detected by the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 that the medal has passed through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3, the inserted medal sensor 1 changes from the ON state to the OFF state. When the transition of the sensor 2 from the ON state to the OFF state, and then the transition of the inserted medal sensor 3 from the ON state to the OFF state is specified based on the medal insertion signal transition state data, and the transition from the ON state to the inserted medal sensor 1 When the inserted medal sensor 3 changes from the ON state to the OFF state after the OFF state, and thereafter, the transition from the ON state to the OFF state is specified based on the medal insertion signal transition state data. The medal insertion signal state transition is determined to be correct.

  In the medal sensor check process, the medal insertion signal transition state data is determined to be correct, and one of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 is determined to be in the ON state, so that the medal passing state reference data ( Detection) is set. That is, when the inserted medal sensor 1 among the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 first changes from the OFF state to the ON state, it is determined that the medal insertion signal transition state data is correct. Is determined, and when the inserted medal sensor 1 is turned on, medal passing state reference data (detection) is set.

  When it is determined that the medal insertion signal transition state data is correct and all of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 are ON, the medal passing state reference data (normal passing) is set. It will be. That is, when the inserted medal sensor 2 of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 finally changes from the ON state to the OFF state, and when the inserted medal sensor 3 finally changes from the ON state to the OFF state, the medal insertion signal transition occurs. Since the state data is determined to be correct, the medal insertion signal transition state data is determined to be correct, and when the inserted medal sensors 2 and 3 are turned off, the medal passing state reference data (normal passing) is Will be set.

  In the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program, after it is determined that the medal passing state reference data (normal passing) is set in steps Sd16 and Sd17, the input of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 is performed in steps Sd21 to Sd24. When it is specified that the data has changed from the ON state to the OFF state, the process proceeds to the subsequent medal insertion processing and the like. In other words, when the medal passing state reference data (normal passing) is set by the medal sensor check processing, the falling of the inserted medal sensor 2 or 3 from the ON state to the OFF state is detected, and the normal medal of the medal is detected. Injection is detected.

[About payout control processing]
The control content of the payout control process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. The payout control process is a subroutine included in the game program and called in the main process included in the game program.

  As shown in FIG. 41, in the payout control processing, first, the output buffer value of the signal during the advantageous section is set to the initial value (OFF) with reference to the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not the state is 0) (Sj1). If it is determined in step Sj1 that the output buffer value of the signal during the advantageous section is the initial value (0) and the signal is not being output during the advantageous section, that is, the state is not controlled in the advantageous section, Then, the bet amount in the game set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired in the A register (Sj2), and it is determined whether or not the bet amount in the game is three (Sj3).

  If it is determined in step Sj3 that the number of bets in the game is three, a game state determination process for determining the game state is performed (Sj4), and after the currently controlled game state is obtained, It is determined whether or not the controlled gaming state is a special state (BB1, BB2) (Sj5). If it is determined that the special state is not the special state (BB1, BB2), the general register winning number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c and capable of specifying the winning result of the general role in the internal lottery is acquired in the A register ( Sj6), it is determined whether or not the general role winning number is equal to or more than a predetermined value (Sj7), and it is determined whether or not the advantageous section shifting combination for shifting the game section to the advantageous section has been won by the internal lottery.

  If it is determined in step Sj7 that the general role winning number is equal to or greater than the predetermined value and the advantageous section shifting combination has been won, the data number for setting the advantageous section winning time is set in the A register (Sj8). , And continuous data processing (Sj9). By performing the continuous data processing with the data number for setting at the time of the advantageous section winning set in the A register, processing such as setting the advantageous section in-flag indicating that the control to the advantageous section is in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is performed. It has become to be. By setting the flag during the advantageous section in step Sj9, the flag during the advantageous section is referred to in the main processing (Sb80), and a predetermined value (1 indicating the ON state) is output to the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section. This is set and the output of the signal during the advantageous section is started.

  After performing the continuous data processing in the step of Sj9, after performing the advantageous section shift related processing for performing various settings related to the shift to the advantageous section (Sj10), the payout control processing is terminated and the main processing is performed. Return to

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj3 that the number of bets in the game is three and internal lottery is determined, and if it is determined in step Sj5 that the currently controlled gaming state is the special state (BB1, BB2), Sj7 If it is determined in step that the general role winning number is less than the predetermined value and the advantageous section shifting combination has not been won by the internal lottery, processing related to shifting to the advantageous section in steps Sj8 to Sj10 is performed. Instead, the payout control process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  In the step Sj1, the output buffer value of the signal during the advantageous section is not the initial value (0 indicating the OFF state) but a predetermined value (1 indicating the ON state), and the state in which the signal during the advantageous section is output, that is, the advantageous section If it is determined that the game is in the controlled state, it is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the number of advantageous section games, which is the number of games since the start of the advantageous section, is counted by the advantageous section game number counter. One is added (Sj11). The predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the advantageous section game number counter is set is included in the predetermined area which is initialized when it is determined that the advantageous section end flag is set by the main processing described above. The section game number counter is initialized at the end of the advantageous section and is set to an initial value (0).

  After adding 1 to the advantageous section game number counter in the step Sj11, a bet number and a game state determination process are performed (Sj12) to obtain the bet number set in the game and the currently controlled game state. . Then, it is determined whether the number of bets set in the game is two or the currently controlled gaming state is a gaming state other than RT1 (Sj12).

  If it is determined in step Sj12 that the number of bets set in the game is two or the currently controlled gaming state is a gaming state other than RT1, the payout control processing is terminated and the main processing is performed. Return. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of bets set in the game is two or the currently controlled gaming state is not a gaming state other than RT1, that is, the number of bets set in the game is three, If it is determined that the currently controlled gaming state is RT1, the CPU adds 1 to the ED transition game number counter set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sj14).

  The ED transition game number counter is performed in a predetermined state (a state in which the number of bets set in the game is three and the currently controlled gaming state is RT1) since the start of the advantageous section. This is a counter for counting the number of games played. The predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the ED transition game number counter is set is included in the predetermined area that is initialized when it is determined that the advantageous section end flag is set by the main processing described above. The ED transition game number counter is initialized at the end of the advantageous section and set to the initial value (0), similarly to the above-described advantageous section game number counter. The ED transition game number counter is referred to in an AT state management process described later, and when the ED transition game number counter value reaches a specified value, the ED state in which navigation control is performed over a period until the advantageous section ends. Has been migrated to.

  After adding 1 to the ED transition game number counter in step Sj14, a freeze setting process is performed (Sj15), and a freeze control for delaying the progress of the game for a predetermined period based on the payout state, the winning state of the small role, and the like is performed. It is determined whether or not to perform the freeze control, and when it is determined that the freeze control is to be performed, a setting for performing the freeze control is performed.

  After performing the freeze setting process in the step of Sj15, the predetermined region of the RAM 41c in which the next ball-out state information set by the ball-out state state process and the ball-out state related process in the AT state management process described later is stored. The address is set in the HL register (Sj16), and the next payout state information stored in the address is acquired in the A register (Sj17). Then, the current ball appearance state information indicating the ball emergence state controlled in the game is updated to the next ball appearance state information acquired in step Sj17 (Sj18), and the ball emergence state controlled based on the current ball appearance state information is updated. It is determined whether or not the ball is in the ball-out state A or the ball-out state B in which navigation notification is performed (Sj19). The value of the ball appearance state information is assigned a value of 1 or more for the ball appearance state A and the ball appearance state B, and 0 is assigned for the ball appearance state other than the ball appearance state A and the ball appearance state B, By judging whether or not the current ball appearance state information is 1 or more, it is possible to determine whether or not the ball emergence state to be controlled this time is the ball emergence state A or the ball emergence state B.

  If it is determined in step Sj19 that the payout state is the payout state A or the payout state B, the output buffer of the section display LED 19 that indicates by lighting that the game section is being controlled to the advantageous section is turned on. After the status data is set (Sj20), the process of waiting for one interruption is performed (Sj21). By setting the ON state data to the output buffer of the section display LED 19 and performing the one-time interrupt wait processing, the timer interrupt processing is performed by the one-time interrupt wait processing. Is controlled to be turned on.

  After performing the one-time interrupt processing in the step of Sj21, the payout state information is acquired in the A register (Sj22), and the initial value (1) of the external output signal number is set in the B register (Sj23). An external output signal number correction process is performed (Sj24). In the external output signal number correction processing, the value of the B register is corrected to the external output signal number corresponding to the ball ejection state information set in the A register.

  Thereafter, the corrected external output signal number set in the B register is set in the external output signal output buffer (Sj25). The external output signal number set in the external output signal output buffer is referred to when performing the external output signal processing in the above-described main processing (Sb25), and according to the external output signal number by the external output signal processing (Sb26). An external output signal is output, and when the control of the AT is started, the output of the AT signal indicating that the AT is controlled is started.

  After setting the external output signal number in the external output signal output buffer in step Sj25, the payout state information is obtained again in the A register (Sj26), and the general role winning number is obtained in the B register (Sj27). Then, the navigation number specifying process is performed (Sj28). In the navigation number specifying process, a predetermined navigation number (see FIG. 24 and FIG. 25) is specified according to the payout state information and the general role winning number (winning number).

  After performing the navigation number specifying process in step Sj28, the navigation number specified by the navigation number specifying process is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sj29). Also, when it is determined in step Sj19 that the payout state is not the payout state A or the payout state B, the process proceeds to step Sj29, and the value of the payout state information, that is, 0 is stored as the navigation number. By setting 0 as the navigation number, the navigation notification is not performed and the navigation display is not displayed. By setting 1 to 6 as the navigation number, the navigation display indicating the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the navigation number is performed. The navigation number stored in the step Sj29 is referred to in the game start command transmission processing (Sb22) in the main processing described above, and a pressing order command capable of specifying the navigation number is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. Becomes

  After the navigation number is stored in the step Sj29, a payout state process is performed (Sj30). In the betting state processing, processing according to the presently-disclosed state specified based on the outgoing state information, processing for determining whether or not to shift the outgoing state based on the winning result of an internal lottery, and so forth. When it is determined that the ball state is to be shifted, processing for setting the next ball-out state information in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is performed.

  When the payout state process ends in step Sj30, the payout control process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  As described above, in the payout control processing (first processing) called from the main processing at the start of the game from the main processing, the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous section is the predetermined value (1). If it is determined that the section is a section (Sj1), the advantageous section game number counter is updated by adding one game regardless of whether three or two bets are set (Sj11). ). Then, in the AT management processing (second processing) called from the main processing at the end of the game, the value of the advantageous section game number counter updated by the payout control processing in the game is changed to the specified game number (second specified number). It is determined whether or not it has reached, and if it is determined that the specified number of games has been reached, an advantageous section end flag is set. Thereafter, in the main process, the advantageous section data initialization processing is performed based on the fact that the advantageous section end flag is set, thereby initializing information on the advantageous section and ending the advantageous section.

  When controlling to the advantageous section, the main control unit 41 updates the advantageous section game number counter, regardless of whether the three bets are set or the two bets, and The advantageous section is terminated when the value of the number-of-advantage-sections game counter reaches the prescribed number of games (the second prescribed number). The number of games in the advantageous section is limited so as not to be controlled in the advantageous section for a long period of more than the number (1,500 games in this embodiment). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the gambling property in the slot machine 1 from excessively increasing.

  In the payout control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment advantageously determines whether or not the signal during the advantageous section is being output based on whether or not the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous section is an initial value. It is determined whether it is during the section. Then, when it is determined that the game is in the advantageous section, the processing for updating the advantageous section game number counter or the state in which the number of bets is 2 is performed as processing (Sj11 to Sj30) relating to the advantageous section in the payout control processing. Processing related to navigation notification performed on condition that the game state is other than RT1 (for example, the number of ED shift games for specifying a game to be shifted to ED control in which navigation notification control is performed over a period until the advantageous section ends) The ON data (predetermined value) for controlling the lighting of the output buffer of the section display LED 19 on condition that the counter is updated and that the ball is in a predetermined ball-out state (ball-out state A and ball-out state B). 1) setting, specifying the navigation number corresponding to the winning combination based on the navigation number based on the general combination winning number, and setting the navigation number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Processing constant to, and performs the various processes processes for performing) corresponding to the payout state currently being controlled. Accordingly, it is possible to ensure that the process regarding the advantageous section is performed while the signal during the advantageous section is being output.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous section is not the predetermined value (1) and is not an advantageous section in the payout control processing called at the start of the game from the main processing ( Sj1) It is determined whether or not the advantageous section shift winning in the internal lottery has been established as the advantageous section start condition (Sj6, Sj7), and it is determined that the advantageous section start condition has been established. In this case, a flag during the advantageous section indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous section is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sj9). In the subsequent main processing, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb80), and if it is determined that the advantageous section flag is set and it is during the advantageous section, A predetermined value (data (1) indicating the ON state) is set in the signal buffer during the advantageous section. Then, by performing LED dynamic display processing in the timer interrupt processing, a signal during the advantageous section is output. This ensures that the process of shifting to the advantageous section (Sj8, Sj8) is performed when the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous section is not the predetermined value (1) and the signal during the advantageous section is not being output. it can.

  In the payout control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the vehicle is in the advantageous section based on the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous section. This signal is output to a test device that performs a performance test of the machine 1. Thereby, the process regarding the advantageous section is performed in a state where the signal during the advantageous section used in the performance test is output, and the processing of shifting to the advantageous section when the signal during the advantageous section is not output is performed. Can be guaranteed. Further, in the payout control process, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in the advantageous section in the payout control process by determining whether or not the vehicle is in the advantageous section based on the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous section. There is no need to separately provide a flag, and the data capacity can be reduced.

  In the payout control processing, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that it is not an advantageous section based on the signal buffer during the advantageous section (Sj1), and determines that three bets are set. (Sj3), while performing the process of shifting to the advantageous section (Sj7, Sj8), while it is determined that the section is not an advantageous section based on the signal buffer during the advantageous section (Sj1), the three bet number is not set. When it is determined (Sj3), the payout control processing is terminated without performing the processing (Sj7, Sj8) for shifting to the advantageous section, and the processing returns to the main processing. In this way, in the payout control process, if the three bets (first bet) are not set, the process of shifting to the advantageous section is not performed, so that three bets are given to the player or the like. The user can be prompted to play the game with the number (first bet number).

  In the payout control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that it is not an advantageous section (Sj1) based on the signal buffer during the advantageous section (Sj1) and determines that it is not controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2). In this case (Sj5), while processing to shift to the advantageous section (Sj7, Sj8) is performed, it is determined that the section is not an advantageous section (Sj1), but it is determined that the state is controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2). In this case, the payout control process is terminated without performing the process (Sj7, Sj8) for shifting to the advantageous section, and the process returns to the main process. With this, in the payout control processing, when the game state is controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2), the processing for shifting to the advantageous section is not performed, so that the special state (BB1, The user can be prompted to play a game other than BB2).

  In the payout control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the area is not an advantageous section based on the signal buffer during the advantageous section (Sj1), and determines that three bets are set (Sj3). In addition, when it is determined that the state is not controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2) (Sj5), the process of shifting to the advantageous section (Sj7, Sj8) is performed, while it is determined that the area is not the advantageous section (Sj1). If it is determined that the three bets are not set, or if it is determined that the bet is controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2), the process (Sj7, Sj8) for shifting to the advantageous section is performed. The payout control process is terminated without performing the process, and the process returns to the main process. Thereby, in the payout control process, if the three bets (first bet) are not set, or if the gaming state is controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2), the advantageous section is set. Since the process for shifting is not performed, it is possible to urge the player or the like to play a game in a game state other than the special state (BB1, BB2) and with three bets (first bet number).

  In the payout control processing, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous section is the predetermined value (1) and is the advantageous section (Sj1), and sets the bet number of three. If it is determined that the process has been performed (Sj13), the process related to the navigation notification (Sj14 to Sj30) is performed, while the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous section is determined to be the predetermined value (1) and the advantageous section is determined to be the advantageous section. However, if it is determined (Sj1) that the number of three bets is not set (Sj13), the payout control processing is terminated without performing the processing (Sj14 to Sj30) related to the navigation notification, and It returns to the processing. With this, in the payout control processing, when the three bets (first bet) are not set, the processing related to the navigation notification is not performed, so that three bets are given to the player or the like. The user can be prompted to play the game with the number (first bet number).

  In the payout control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous section is the predetermined value (1) and is the advantageous section (Sj1), and that the gaming state is BB1. When it is determined that RT1 is carried over (Sj13), processing related to navigation notification (Sj14 to Sj30) is performed, while the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous section is the predetermined value (1) and If it is determined that there is a game state (Sj1), but it is determined that the gaming state is a gaming state other than RT1 (Sj13), the payout control processing is performed without performing the processing related to navigation notification (Sj14 to Sj30). The processing is terminated and returns to the main processing. Accordingly, in the payout control processing, when the game state is a game state other than RT1, the processing related to the navigation notification is not performed, and therefore, it is possible to urge the player or the like to play the game at RT1. it can.

  In the payout control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous section is the predetermined value (1) and is the advantageous section (Sj1), and sets the bet number of three. If it is determined that the gaming state is RT1 in which the winning of BB1 has been carried over (Sj13), the processing related to the navigation notification (Sj14 to Sj30) is performed, while the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous section is changed. The predetermined value (1) is determined to be an advantageous section (Sj1), but it is determined that three bets are not set, or it is determined that the gaming state is a gaming state other than RT1. , The payout control process is terminated without performing the processes (Sj14 to Sj30) related to the navigation notification, and the process returns to the main process. Thereby, in the payout control processing, when the three bets (first bet) are not set, or when the gaming state is a gaming state other than RT1, processing related to the navigation notification is performed. Therefore, it is possible to urge a player or the like to play a game with three bets (first bet) and RT1.

  In the payout control processing of the present embodiment, in a game after the game in which the processing (Sj1 to Sj10) for shifting the game section from the normal section to the advantageous section is performed, the external output signal number is set to the external output signal. The processing of steps Sj11 to Sj30 including the processing (Sj25) of setting in the output buffer is performed, and when the output of the AT signal is started, the game in which the output of the AT signal is started In the game earlier than the above, the process of shifting to the advantageous section (Sj1 to Sj10) is performed, so that the output of the AT signal is started while the section is displayed.

  In the payout control processing of the present embodiment, when the output of the AT signal is started, the ON state data (predetermined value 1) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 19, and after the one-interrupt wait processing is performed. Since the processing for storing the external signal number in the output buffer (Sj25) is performed, the AT signal is output after the section display is started. Thus, it is possible to prevent the external device that has received the AT signal from specifying that it is controlled to be in the advantageous section before the section display is started.

  In the payout control process of the present embodiment, when the three bets (first bet) are set, the processes related to the navigation notification (Sj14 to Sj30) are performed, while the two bets (first bet) are performed. When the (second bet number) is set, the processing related to the navigation notification is not performed, and it is determined that one of the multi-bell and the three-course role has been won by the internal lottery in the advantageous section. In this case, when the number of bets of three (the first number of bets) is set, the operating mode (order of stopping correct answers) corresponding to the type of the winning multi-bell and the role of three is determined. When the number of two bets (the second number of bets) is set, the operation mode (the order of stopping correct answers) corresponding to the type of the winning multi-bell and the three-piece combination is not notified. ing. Accordingly, when the two bets (second bet) are set, the navigation mode does not indicate an advantageous operation mode for the player, so the three bets (second bet) are used. Encourage them to play the game.

[Operation information signal output processing]
The control content of the operation information signal output process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. The operation information signal output process is a subroutine included in the non-game program and called in the main process included in the game program.

  As shown in FIG. 42, in the operation information signal output processing, first, the current stack pointer SP is used from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program by using the aforementioned LD instruction. The value of the indicated address is read, stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area, and evacuated (Sz501). Thereafter, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program is read from a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is set for a non-game program (Sz502). Then, the values of all registers (accumulator register, flag register, general-purpose register, index register, interrupt register, refresh register, program counter, etc.) provided in the main control unit 41 including the flag register are described by using the above-mentioned first save instruction. Are saved in a predetermined order in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP (Sz503). When the non-game RAM area initialization process included in the non-game program is called from the game program, the LD instruction is used when changing the stack pointer SP from the game program to the non-game program. Thus, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the non-game RAM area initialization processing is called from the game program, the state of the register saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the non-game RAM area initialization processing is the game state. The state of the register when the program calls the non-game RAM area initialization processing may be different.

  After saving all registers in the step of Sz503, communication setting processing is performed (Sz504). In the communication setting process, a baud rate value of a communication signal is set, and a setting related to a signal transmission function of the main control unit 41 is performed.

  After performing the communication setting process in the step of Sz504, the navigation number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is read into the A register (Sz505). Then, it is determined whether the navigation number is 0 and the navigation notification is not performed (Sz506). When it is determined that the navigation number is 0, the winning status of the general role specified based on the general role winning number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is read into the flag register Z (Sz507). A value (0) indicating the operation mode (recommended operation mode) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for minimizing missing of the role is set in the A register (Sz508). Then, based on the winning status of the general combination read into the flag register Z in the step Sz507, it is determined whether or not the general combination has been lost (Sz509).

  If it is determined in step Sz509 that the general role has not been won and the game has been lost, the head address of the symbol stop signal pattern setting table is set in the HL register (Sz510), and the winning status of the special role can be specified. The value of the internal winning flag (non-winning: 0, BB1 winning: 1, BB2 winning: 2) is read into the A register (Sz11), and a symbol stop signal pattern setting data acquisition process is performed (Sz512). In the symbol stop signal pattern setting data acquisition processing, symbol stop signal pattern setting data is acquired in the A register based on the symbol stop signal pattern setting table and the value of the internal winning flag. The symbol stop signal pattern setting data is data for acquiring a reel number set value by an addition process (Sz516) described later according to the winning status of a special combination when no general combination has been won.

  When the symbol stop signal pattern setting data acquisition processing is performed in step Sz512, and when the navigation number is determined to be not 0 and the navigation notification is performed in step Sz506, the general role is won in step Sz509. If it is determined that the start address is present, the process proceeds to step Sz513, and the head address of the reel number signal data table is set in the HL register. Thereafter, the A register value is corrected by performing a predetermined correction process (Sz514), the values of the A register and the flag register are saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz515), and an addition process is performed (Sz516). In the addition processing, the value of the A register is added to the HL register value, and the reel number setting value stored at the address of the HL register value after the addition is acquired in the A register. Then, the A register value is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as a reel number signal (Sz517).

  When it is determined in step Sz506 that the navigation number is not 0, and the processing of steps after Sz513 is performed, the navigation numbers (1 to 6) are set in the A register, and in the step of Sz517, the navigation number is set. A reel number signal indicating the stop order according to the number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. When it is determined in step Sz509 that the general combination has been won, and the processing of steps after Sz513 is performed, the DDT point value is set in the A register, and the stop order corresponding to the DDT point is set. Is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In the case where the symbol stop signal pattern setting data acquisition processing is performed in the step of Sz512 and the processing of the steps after Sz513 is performed, and the special combination is won, the A register is The symbol stop signal pattern setting data for setting the reel number signal indicating the stop order in which the special role can be won can be set, and the stop can be made to win the winning special role. A reel number signal indicating the order is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In the case where the symbol stop signal pattern setting data acquisition processing is performed in step Sz512 and the processing in step Sz513 and subsequent steps is performed, and the special combination has not been won, the A register contains a DDT point. Is set for setting a reel number signal indicating a stop order corresponding to the DDT point, and a reel number signal indicating a stop order corresponding to the DDT point is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It has become.

  After setting the reel number signal in step Sz517, the values of the A register and the flag register saved in step Sz515 are restored (Sz518), and the start address of the stop execution symbol number table is set in the HL register (Sz519). . Then, an addition process is performed. In the addition processing, the value of the A register is added to the HL register value, and the stop execution symbol number stored at the address of the HL register value after the addition is acquired in the A register. Then, the A register value is set as a stop execution symbol number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz521).

  Thereafter, a stop execution step calculation process of calculating the stop execution step based on the stop execution symbol number is performed (Sz522), and the stop execution step obtained by the calculation is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as a stop execution position signal that can be specified. (Sz523).

  If it is determined in step Sz506 that the navigation number is not 0, and the processing of steps after Sz518 is performed, the navigation number (1 to 6) is set in the A register, and the navigation is performed in step Sz523. A stop execution position signal indicating a stop timing according to the number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. If it is determined in step Sz509 that the general role has been won, and the processing in steps Sz518 and thereafter is performed, the DDT point value is set in the A register, and the stop timing corresponding to the DDT point is set. Is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Also, in the case where the symbol stop signal pattern setting data acquisition processing is performed in the step of Sz512 and the processing of the steps after Sz518 is performed, and the special combination has been won, the A register has the winning. The symbol stop signal pattern setting data for setting the stop execution position signal indicating the stop timing at which the special role can be won can be set, and the winning special role can be won. A stop execution position signal indicating the stop timing is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In the case where the symbol stop signal pattern setting data acquisition process is performed in the step of Sz512 and the process of the steps after Sz518 is performed, and the special combination has not been won, the A register includes the DDT point. The pattern stop signal pattern setting data for setting the stop execution position signal indicating the stop timing corresponding to the DDT point is set, and the stop execution position signal indicating the stop timing corresponding to the DDT point is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It has become so.

  After the stop execution position signal is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in step Sz523, the value of the reel number signal set in step Sz517 is read into the A register (Sz524), and the reel number signal output process is performed (Sz525). In the reel number signal output process, a process of outputting a reel number signal capable of specifying the stop order of each reel specified based on the A register value from a predetermined output port to the test apparatus is performed.

  After performing the reel number signal output processing in step Sz525, the value of the stop execution position signal set in step Sz523 is read into the A register (Sz526), and the stop execution position signal output processing is performed (Sz527). In the stop execution position signal output process, a process of outputting a stop execution position signal capable of specifying a stop timing of each reel specified based on the A register value from a predetermined output port to the test apparatus is performed.

  After the stop execution position signal output processing is performed in step Sz527, the values of all registers saved in step Sz503 are restored (Sz528), and the value of the stack pointer saved in step Sz501 is restored. Then, the operation information signal output process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  As described above, in the operation information signal output processing of the present embodiment, the stop execution position signal and the stop execution position signal are output to the test apparatus as operation information signals for specifying the operation modes of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. It is possible. In the above-mentioned payout control processing, a predetermined value (1 indicating ON state) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 19 when the control of the AT is started, and the section display LED 19 is controlled to the lighting state by the timer interrupt processing. The operation information signal output process is called in the main process after starting the section display indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous section. In the operation information signal output process, the operation information is output after the section display is started. A signal is output to a test device. As a result, the operation information signal is output to the test apparatus after the section display is started, so that the test apparatus can specify the operation mode specified in the state where the section display is performed.

  In the operation information signal output processing of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the navigation notification for instructing the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is performed based on the navigation number set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. (Sz506) When it is determined that the navigation notification is to be performed, a process (Sz523) of outputting a stop execution position signal designating an operation mode instructed based on the navigation number is performed, and the navigation notification is not performed. When it is determined, a process (Sz509) of referring to the winning number indicating the winning result of the internal lottery (Sz509) and outputting the stop execution position signal designating the operation mode corresponding to the winning number is performed. I have. Accordingly, in the operation information signal output process, when it is determined that the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is instructed, the process of specifying the winning result of the internal lottery can be omitted, and thus the operation mode is specified. Processing for outputting the stop execution position signal can be simplified.

[Regarding data processing for role ratio monitoring]
The control contents of the data processing for the ratio monitoring performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. It should be noted that the role ratio monitoring data processing is a subroutine included in the non-game program and called in the main processing included in the game program. Further, the data processing for the winning ratio monitoring calls each state counting process which is a subroutine included in the non-gaming program, and the respective status counting processes are the updating process of the character ratio, which is a subroutine included in the non-gaming program. The property ratio updating process and the instruction-incorporated role ratio updating process are further called.

  The main control unit 41 uses the credit display unit 11 composed of a two-digit 7-segment display and the game auxiliary display, as a ratio display of the bonus payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the bonus payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number. Control to be displayed on the display 12. The credit display device 11 and the game auxiliary display device 12 are displays that display information according to the progress of the game, and cannot display the ratio display at all times. The ratio display is displayed when a predetermined operation is performed by a store clerk or the like.

  Specifically, when the game is not being played, the normally locked front door 1b is unlocked with a key possessed by the clerk of the game store to open it, and then provided inside the housing 1a. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, the main control unit 41 switches the current display contents on the credit display 11 and the game assistance display 12 to start displaying the ratio display.

  In addition, the ratio display is composed of four alphanumeric characters including upper two-digit alphanumeric characters constituting an abbreviation indicating the type of ratio display and lower two-digit numbers indicating the ratio. The display content is displayed on the credit display 11 and the lower two digits of the display content is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and the ratio display is switched at predetermined intervals in a predetermined display order from the start of the ratio display.

  With the ratio display displayed on the credit indicator 11 and the game assist indicator 12, the front door 1b is closed, a medal is inserted into the slot machine 1, an error occurs, the setting key switch 37 is operated, and the settlement switch 10 is set. , Or the stop of power supply to the slot machine 1 is detected, the display is switched to the original display content displayed before the ratio display is displayed, and the ratio display is terminated.

  The main control unit 41 determines whether or not a prize has occurred in the prize determination process (step Sb49 in FIG. 29) in the main process according to the display result derived on each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. After performing the one-interrupt wait processing (Sb50), save the flag register value (Sb51), disable the timer interrupt (Sb52), and process the data for the duty ratio monitor included in the non-game program. Execute

  As shown in FIG. 43, in the data processing for the duty ratio monitoring, first, by using the above-mentioned LD instruction, the value of the address indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is set to a predetermined value in the non-game RAM area. It is stored in the area and saved (Sk1), and then a predetermined value of the non-gaming stack area (the value stored at the end of the previous non-gaming program) is set as the value of the stack pointer SP using the LD instruction. Thus, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-game program (Sk2). Then, using the above-described first save instruction, the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 are saved by storing them in the non-game stack area in a predetermined order (Sk3). Then, after executing each state count process (Sk4) included in the non-game program, the values of the registers saved in the step of Sk3 are sequentially read from the non-game stack area by using the above-mentioned first return instruction. After restoring all the registers to the state at the time of starting the duty ratio monitoring data processing (Sk5), the data is stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and saved at step Sk1 using an LD instruction. By setting the value of the stack pointer SP set in the stack pointer SP, the stack pointer SP is returned to the state at the time of starting the data processing for the combination ratio monitoring (Sk6), and the data processing for the combination ratio monitoring is terminated. Returning to the main process of the calling source, the process proceeds to step Sb54. In step Sb54 of the main process, the timer interrupt is permitted, and the flag register value saved before the execution of the duty ratio monitoring data process is restored (Sb55).

  As shown in FIG. 44, in each state counting process, it is determined whether the total cumulative game number can be added (Sp1). The total cumulative number of games is stored in a 3-byte storage area, and can be counted up to 16777215 games as an upper limit.

  If the total number of games cannot be added, the process proceeds to Sp22. If the total cumulative number of games can be added, 1 is added assuming that the game has been played (Sp2 to Sp4). As described above, since the microcomputer used in the gaming machine can only perform an operation between two-byte values at the maximum, this addition is executed by calling the subroutine of the 3-byte data addition & storage processing (Sp4). Then, as a result of the addition, it is determined whether or not the total cumulative game number has reached the upper limit (Sp4). If the total number of games has not reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step Sp7. If the total cumulative number of games has reached the upper limit, a value indicating that the total cumulative count stop flag has reached the upper limit is set (Sp5, Sp6), and the flow proceeds to step Sp7. In the step Sp1 described above, it is determined whether or not the total cumulative game number can be added by referring to the total cumulative count stop flag.

  In the steps from Sp7, it is determined whether the total cumulative game number is in the range of 0 to 5999 games, 6000 to 174999 games, or 175,000 games or more (Sp7 to Sp20). In accordance with the results of the determination, values indicating that the respective ranges are present are set as lighting identification segments (Sp8, Sp18, Sp19). The set lighting identification segment is stored in the display monitor digestion game determination flag. Then, after sequentially executing the role ratio updating process (Sp22), the continuous ratio ratio updating process (Sp23), and the instruction ratio changing process (Sp24) included in the non-game program, the process returns to the role ratio monitoring data process. I do.

  As shown in FIG. 45, in the accessory ratio updating process, first, one is added to the number of games for determining the number of games (Sq1). Here, 1 is added to a determination game number counter described later. Next, the number of winning medals to be paid out when a prize is generated in this game is added (Sq2, Sq3). Here, the number of winning medals is added to the total payout counters of the total buffers 1 to 3, respectively.

  The total buffer 1 is provided with a 3-byte total payout counter and a 3-byte accessory payout counter. When a prize is generated in the game and medals are paid out, the respective counters count. When the game reaches 6000 games from the start of counting, the total payout counter and the accessory payout counter are updated to the initial values of 0, and the next game starts counting from the initial values.

  Like the cumulative buffer 1, the cumulative buffer 2 is provided with a 3-byte total payout counter and a 3-byte bonus item payout counter. Is performed. When the game reaches 6000 games from the start of counting, the total payout counter and the accessory payout counter are updated to the initial values of 0, and the next game starts counting from the initial values. However, the game whose counting is started is shifted from the total buffer 1 by 2,000 games.

  The total buffer 3 is provided with a 3-byte total payout counter and a 3-byte character payout counter similarly to the total buffer 1 and the total buffer 2, and when a prize is generated in the game and medals are paid out, respectively. Is counted by the counter of (1). When the game reaches 6000 games from the start of counting, the total payout counter and the accessory payout counter are updated to the initial values of 0, and the next game starts counting from the initial values. However, the game to start counting is shifted from the total buffer 1 to 4000 games, and the total buffer 1 is shifted from 2000 games.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether addition of the total accumulated payout number is possible (Sq4). If the total cumulative number of payouts cannot be added, the process proceeds to step Sq10. When the total cumulative payout number can be added, the winning medal number is added to the total cumulative payout number. Then, as a result of the addition, it is determined whether the total accumulated payout number has reached the upper limit (Sq7). If the total cumulative number of payouts has not reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step Sq10. When the total cumulative number of payouts has reached the upper limit, a value indicating that the total cumulative count stop flag has reached the upper limit is set (Sq8, Sq9), and the process proceeds to step Sq10. Whether the total cumulative payout number can be added is determined with reference to the total cumulative count stop flag, and when the total cumulative game number reaches the upper limit value and when the total cumulative payout number reaches the upper limit value. The same flag is used as when it is done.

  In the steps Sq10 and Sq11, it is determined whether or not the accessory is operating in the game, that is, whether or not the period is controlled by the RB. When the accessory is not operating, the process proceeds to Sq17. If the accessory is activated, the number of prize medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize in the current game is added as the number of payouts in the accessory activation period (Sq12, Sq13). At this point, the number of winning medals is added to each of the accessory payout counters of the cumulative buffers 1 to 3.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the total cumulative number of paid-out articles can be added (Sq14). If it is not possible to add the total accumulated number of payables, the process proceeds to step Sq17. If it is possible to add the total cumulative number of payables, the number of winning medals is added to the total cumulative number of payables (Sb15, 16), and the process proceeds to step Sq17. Whether or not the total cumulative number of bonus articles can be added is determined by referring to the total cumulative count stop flag.

  Based on the updated total cumulative number of payouts and the total cumulative number of payables as described above, the ratio of payouts to the total amount of payouts is calculated (Sq17, Sq18). Then, the calculated value is stored as the accessory payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number (Sq19).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the game is the updated game number by referring to the determination game number counter (Sq20 to Sq23). The determination game number counter is a counter that is counted cyclically between 1 and 6000 games, and is used to determine whether the number of games since the start of counting has reached 2000 games, 4000 games, and 6000 games. This is the counter used. The above determination is made based on whether or not a remainder has occurred by dividing the determination counter by 2000. If a remainder has occurred, it is determined that the game is not the updated game number, and the process returns to each state counting process.

  If there is no remainder after dividing the determination counter by 2000, it is specified from the quotient of the division result whether the game is an update game of 2000 games, 4000 games, or 6000 games (Sq24). Then, the value of the total payout counter is read out from the cumulative buffer corresponding to the specified updated game among the cumulative buffers 1 to 3, stored in the buffer for calculating 6000 times as the total payout number of 6000 games, and the total payout counter of the read source is read. Is updated to the initial value 0 (Sq25 to Sq27). Similarly, the value of the accessory payout counter is read from the cumulative buffer corresponding to the specified update game, stored as the 6000 game cumulative accessory payout number in the buffer for calculating 6000 times, and the read-out source accessory payout counter is initialized with the initial value. Update to a certain 0 (Sq28 to Sq30).

  Furthermore, a bonus item payout ratio with respect to the 6000 game total payout number is calculated from the 6000 game total payout number and the 6000 game total bonus item payout number stored in the 6000 times calculation buffer (Sq31, Sq32). Then, the calculated value is stored as the accessory payout ratio between the past 6,000 games (Sq33). Thereafter, the process returns to each state counting process.

  The gaming machine information display unit displays the accessory payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number and the bonus payout ratio between the past 6,000 games together with an abbreviation indicating the type of ratio display being referred to in a display monitor data selection process described later. 50 are sequentially displayed.

  Referring to FIG. 46, the update status of the cumulative buffers 1 to 3 and the buffer for calculating 6000 times, the total cumulative payout number, and the total cumulative calculation output buffer in which the total cumulative payout number and the total cumulative number of payables are stored by the combination ratio monitor data processing will be described. explain. The storage contents of the accumulation buffers 1 to 3 and the buffer for calculating 6000 times and the buffer for outputting the total accumulation are retained unless the data in the RAM 41c is initialized at the time of shipment from the factory or for some reason and is initialized.

  The counting in the accumulation buffer 1 and the buffer for outputting the total accumulation is started from the state where each buffer value is initialized. After 2,000 games have elapsed, counting in the total buffer 2 is started. The accumulation buffer 1 continues counting. Subsequently, when 2000 games have elapsed, counting in the accumulation buffer 3 is started. The accumulation buffer 1 and the accumulation buffer 2 continue counting.

  When 2000 games have elapsed, the counting period in the total buffer 1 reaches 6000 games. Here, the count contents of the total buffer 1 are stored in the calculation buffer 6000 times. Then, the counting contents of the accumulation buffer 1 are initialized and counting starts from the initial value (0).

  When the next 2000 games have elapsed, the counting period in the accumulation buffer 2 reaches 6000 games. Here, the count content of the accumulation buffer 2 is stored in the calculation buffer 6000 times. Then, the counting contents of the accumulation buffer 2 are initialized and counting is started from the initial value (0).

  In this way, the counting results for 6000 games counted in the cumulative buffers 1 to 3 are stored in the calculation buffer 6000 times every 2000 games. During this time, the counting result of the buffer for outputting the total cumulative calculation is counted without being initialized.

  Next, the control content of the continuous accessory ratio update process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 47, in the continuous role ratio updating process, first, when the gaming state is controlled during the special state (B1, BB2), BB indicating that the state is the special state (B1, BB2). Based on whether or not the output buffer of the output port that outputs the medium signal to the outside of the slot machine 1 has the initial value (0), it is determined whether or not the special state is being established (Sr1). If it is determined that the medal is in the special state, it is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and is a continuous character payout number counter (for addition) that counts the number of paid out medals in the special state (B1, BB2). Is set in the HL register (Sr2). After setting the payout number of medals in the game in the B register (Sr3), a 3-byte data addition process is performed (Sr4). In the 3-byte data addition process, a process of adding 1-byte payout number data to a 3-byte continuous accessory payout number counter (for addition) is performed.

  Thereafter, an upper limit is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and a payout number counter (total total) for counting the total payout number of medals paid out in the slot machine 1 has reached an upper limit value. The address of the determination flag is set in the HL register (Sr5), and it is determined whether or not the number-of-payouts counter (total total) has reached the upper limit based on the value of the upper limit arrival determination flag (Sr6). . The upper limit arrival determination flag is set to 0 when the number-of-payouts counter (total total) has not reached the upper limit value, and is set to 1 when the upper limit value has been reached.

  If it is determined in step Sr6 that the payout number counter (total total) has not reached the upper limit, the payout number of medals in the game is set in the E register (Sr7), and 0 is set in the D register. (Sr8). Further, the address of the number-of-payouts counter (total total) is set in the HL register (Sr9), and 3-byte data addition and storage processing is performed (Sr10). In the 3-byte data addition and storage processing, processing of adding 1-byte payout number data to a 3-byte payout number counter (total total) is performed.

  When the 3-byte data addition and storage processing is performed in step Sr10, when it is determined that the special state is not being performed in step Sr1, it is determined in step Sr6 that the payout number counter (total total) has reached the upper limit value. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sr11, where the address of the continuous bonus article payout number counter (total total) is set in the HL register (Sr11), and the address of the payout number counter (total total) is set in the DE register (Sr12). . Thereafter, a division process is performed (Sr13). In the division process, the value of the quotient obtained by dividing the value of the HL register by the DE register is set in the A register. Then, the value of the quotient calculated by the division processing is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as a continuous accessory ratio (total total) (Sr14).

  Thereafter, the address of the number-of-games counter (for addition) for counting the number of games played in the slot machine 1 is set in the HL register (Sr15), 2000 is set in the DE register (Sr16), and the value of the HL register is set in DE. The remainder obtained by dividing by the register value is set in the DE register (Sr17). Then, it is determined whether or not the remainder value is 0 based on the value of the DE register (Sr18). If it is determined in Sr18 that the remainder value is not 0, the continuous accessory ratio updating process is terminated and the process returns to each state counting process. Then, the address of the continuous bonus article payout number counter (for addition) is set in the HL register (Sr19), and is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and during the special state (B1, BB2) between the latest consecutive 6,000 games. ), The address of the continuous accessory payout number counter (total of 6000G) for counting the number of payout medals is set in the DE register (Sr20), and the 6000G total data transfer process is performed (Sr21). In the 6000G total data transfer process, the value of the HL register is added to the value of the DE register.

  After that, the address of the consecutive number-of-distribution-item payout counter (total of 6000G) is set in the HL register (Sr22), and the address of the number-of-payout counter (total of 6000G) that is updated by the above-described bonus ratio update process is set in the DE register. (Sr23), a division process is performed (Sr24). In the division process, the value of the quotient obtained by dividing the value of the HL register by the DE register is set in the A register. Then, the value of the quotient calculated by the division process is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as a continuous character ratio between the past 6,000 games (Sr25).

  In step Sr25, after storing the continuous character ratio between the past 6000 games in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the continuous character ratio update process is terminated, and the process returns to each state counting process.

  The accessory payout ratio between the past 6000 games is referred to in a display monitor data selection process described later, and is displayed on the gaming machine information display 50 together with an abbreviation indicating the type of ratio display being displayed.

  As described above, in the continuous accessory ratio updating process of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the special state (BB1, BB2) is controlled (Sr1), and if it is determined that the special state is controlled, It is determined whether or not a total cumulative payout number counter that counts the total number of medals awarded to the player has reached an upper limit value (Sr6). If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached, If it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached without performing the processing (Sr7 to Sr10) for updating the total cumulative number of paid-out articles and the total cumulative number of consecutive paid-out articles, A process (Sr7 to Sr10) for updating the cumulative number of consecutive bonus articles is executed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the total accumulated number of payouts and the total number of consecutive consecutive payouts from being updated regardless of the situation in which the total number of medals given to the player cannot be updated.

  Next, the control contents of the instruction-combining-ratio update process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 48, in the instruction-added accessory ratio update process, first, a payout number counter (total total) for counting the total payout number of medals paid out in the slot machine 1 has reached an upper limit value. Is set in the HL register (St1), and whether the number-of-payout counter (total total) has reached the upper limit value is determined based on the value of the upper limit arrival determination flag. Is determined (St2). The upper limit arrival determination flag is set to 0 when the number-of-payouts counter (total total) has not reached the upper limit value, and is set to 1 when the upper limit value has been reached.

  If it is determined in step St2 that the payout number counter (total total) has not reached the upper limit value, the special state (B1) is controlled when the gaming state is controlled to the special state (B1, BB2). , BB2), the value of the output buffer of the output port that outputs the BB signal indicating outside of the slot machine to the outside of the slot machine 1 is read into the A register (St3), and the value of the output buffer is the initial value (0). It is determined whether or not the vehicle is in the special state based on the determination (St4).

  If it is determined in the step St4 that the game is not in the special state, the navigation number of the game set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c by the above-described ball-out control process is read into the A register (St5), and one or more navigations are performed. A number is set, and it is determined whether or not the game is a game in which navigation notification is performed (St6).

  Then, when it is determined in the step St4 that the game is in the special state, and when it is determined in the step St6 that the game is a navigation notification game, the payout number of medals in the game is read into the A register (St7). ), The D register is set to 0 (St8), and is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and is used as an instruction for counting the total number of medals to be paid out in the game in which the navigation notification is performed and the game in the special state. The address of the number-of-items-paid-out counter (total total) is set in the HL register (St9), and 3-byte data addition and storage processing is performed (St10). In the 3-byte data addition and storage process, a process of adding 1-byte payout number data to a 3-byte instruction-incoming accessory payout number counter (total total) is performed.

  Then, after performing the 3-byte data addition and storage processing in the step of St10, the process proceeds to the step of St11. If it is determined in step St2 that the payout number counter (total total) has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step St11 without performing the processes in steps St3 to St10. If it is determined in step St6 that the game is not a game in which the navigation notification is performed, the process proceeds to step St11 without performing the processes in steps St7 to St10.

  In the step of St11, the address of the instruction-added payout number counter (total total) is set in the HL register (St11), and the address of the payout number counter (total total) updated by the above-described continuous duty ratio update process is set. It is set in the DE register (St12), and a division process is performed (St13). In the division process, the value of the quotient obtained by dividing the value of the HL register by the DE register is set in the A register. Then, the value of the quotient calculated by the division process is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as a designated accessory payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number (St14).

  After storing the designated-incoming-competent payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the step of St15, the designated-compensated-incoming-goods ratio updating process is terminated, and the process returns to each state counting process.

  The instruction-added payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number is referred to in a display monitor data selection process described later, and is displayed on the gaming machine information display 50 together with an abbreviation indicating the type of ratio display being displayed. .

  As described above, in the instruction-added accessory ratio updating process of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the total cumulative number-of-payouts counter that counts the total number of medals awarded to the player has reached the upper limit value. (St2) If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached, the process of updating the cumulative instruction-incorporated bonus payout number (St3 to St10) is not performed, and if it is determined that the upper limit value has not been reached, Determines whether or not it is controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2) (St4). If it is determined that the state is controlled to the special state, the process of updating the total number of payouts of the instruction-incorporated bonus material (St7) To St10), and when it is determined that the operation is not controlled to the special state, it is determined whether or not an operation mode advantageous to the player is instructed by the navigation notification (St6), and the navigation is notified to the player to be advantageous. Operation mode is instructed When it is determined that the is configured to perform processing (St7~St10) for updating the cumulative instruction write won game payout number. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the total instruction payout number payout number from being updated irrespective of a situation in which the total cumulative payout number counter for counting the total number of cards given to the player cannot be updated.

[AT status management processing]
The control content of the AT status management processing performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The AT state management process is a subroutine included in the game program.

  As shown in FIG. 49, in the AT state management processing, first, the value of the number-of-advantageous-sections game counter is set to an initial value (0) with reference to the value of the number-of-advantageous-sections game number counter set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Is determined (Su1). It is determined that the game is in the advantageous section based on the value of the output buffer of the signal in the advantageous section by the above-described payout control processing. Inside, the value of the advantageous section game number counter is set to 1 or more. If the value of the advantageous section game number counter remains at the initial value (0) in the step of Su1 and it is specified that the game is not in the advantageous section, the AT is executed without performing the processing of the later-described steps of Su2 to Su25. The state management process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1 that the value of the advantageous section game number counter is not the initial value (0) but is in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step Su2 and is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Counting the net number of medals paid out in the advantageous section (the number obtained by subtracting the total number of medals used for setting the bet number in the advantageous section from the total number of medals paid out in the advantageous section) With reference to the net increase counter for reading, the counter value of the net increase is read into the HL register (Su2). Thereafter, by referring to a winning flag which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and can specify the winning status of the general combination in the game (Su3), it is determined whether or not the replaying game has won in the game (Su4). ).

  If it is determined in the step of Su4 that the re-gaming combination has not won, the payout number of medals in the game is read into the A register (Su5), and the payout number of the A register is added to the net increase counter value of the HL register. (Su6). Then, the bet amount set in the game is read into the A register (Su7), and the bet amount in the A register is subtracted from the net increase counter value in the HL register (Su8).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the HL register is 0 or more (Su9). If the value of the HL register is not 0 or more, the value of the HL register is corrected to 0 (Su10), and the value of the HL register is corrected. The value is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as a net increase counter value (Su11). On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su9 that the value of the HL register is equal to or greater than 0, the value of the HL register is stored as a net increase counter value in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c without performing the correction in the step of Su10. (Su11), proceed to the step of Su12.

  If it is determined in step Su4 that the re-gaming combination has been won in the game, the process proceeds to step Su12 without performing the processing in steps Su5 to Su11.

  If the net increase counter value is stored and updated in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the step of Su11, and if it is determined in the step of Su4 that the replaying game has won in the game, the net increase number is determined based on the value of the HL register. It is determined whether or not the counter value has exceeded a first prescribed number (in this embodiment, 2395 sheets) serving as an advantageous section end condition (Su12), and it is determined that the net increase counter value has exceeded the first prescribed number. Then, the process proceeds to step Su15, sets an advantageous section end flag indicating that the advantageous section end condition is satisfied in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Su15), ends the AT state management processing, and returns to the main processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su12 that the net increase counter value does not exceed the first specified number, the value of the advantageous zone game number counter set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is read into the HL register (Su13). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous section game number counter has reached a second specified number (in this embodiment, 1500 games) which is an end condition of the advantageous section (Su14). If it is determined that the value of the advantageous section game number counter has reached the second specified number, the process proceeds to step Su15, and an advantageous section end flag indicating that the advantageous section end condition has been satisfied is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. (Su15), terminates the AT state management processing, and returns to the main processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su12 that the net increase counter value does not exceed the first specified number, and if it is determined in step Su14 that the advantageous section game number counter value has not reached the second specified number, , Su16, and performs a bet amount and game state determination process (Su16) to acquire the bet number set in the game and the currently controlled game state. Then, it is determined whether the number of bets set in the game is two or the currently controlled gaming state is a gaming state other than RT1 (Su17).

  In the step of Su17, when it is determined that the number of bets set in the game is two or the currently controlled gaming state is a gaming state other than RT1, the navigation notification in the steps of Su18 to Su25 described later is performed. The AT state management processing is ended without performing the related processing (the processing for performing the ED control, the processing for the payout state performing the processing related to the payout state, etc.), and returns to the main processing.

  On the other hand, in the step of Su17, when it is determined that the bet number set in the game is two or the currently controlled game state is not a game state other than RT1, that is, the bet number set in the game is three. If it is determined that the game state is RT1 and that the currently controlled game state is RT1, the process proceeds to step Su18, where the value of the net increase counter set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is updated in the step of Su11. Is read into the HL register (Su18). Further, a third specified number (1800 in this embodiment) relating to the net number of medals which is a condition for shifting to the ED state in which the navigation notification control is performed over the period until the advantageous section ends is read into the DE register ( Su19). Then, by comparing the HL register value and the DE register value, it is determined whether or not the net number of medals in the advantageous section has exceeded the third specified number (Su20).

  If it is determined in step Su20 that the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section has exceeded the third specified number, the process proceeds to step Su23, and an ED transition flag indicating transition to the ED state is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. (Su23). On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su20 that the net number of medals in the advantageous section does not exceed the third specified number, the medal is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, updated by the above-described payout control processing, and A counter for counting the number of games played in a predetermined state (a state in which the number of bets set in the game is three and the currently controlled gaming state is RT1) since the start of the section. The ED transition game number counter value is read into the HL register (Su21), and the ED transition game number counter value is equal to or more than a fourth prescribed number (1200 games in the present embodiment) relating to the number of advantageous section games that is a condition for transition to the ED state. Is determined (Su122). If it is determined that the ED transition game number counter value has reached the fourth prescribed number and is equal to or greater than the fourth prescribed number, the process proceeds to step Su23, and the ED transition flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. (Su23).

  Then, it is determined in step Su20 that the net number of medals has exceeded the third prescribed number, and the ED transition flag is set in step Su23, and the number of ED transition games reaches the fourth prescribed number in step Su22. After the determination is made that the ED shift flag is set in the step of Su23, it is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the ball-out state information indicating the ball-out state controlled in the game is acquired in the A register. Then (Su24), the payout state-related processing is performed (Su25). In the ball-out state-related processing, processing corresponding to the ball-out state specified based on the ball-out state information acquired in the A register, control to the ED state based on the ED transition flag being set in the step of Su23. For controlling the navigation notification over the period until the advantageous section ends, processing for managing the number of AT games for performing the navigation notification, and setting the advantageous section end flag to the RAM 41c by satisfying a predetermined arbitrary condition. And processing for terminating the advantageous section by setting the predetermined area, and stopping the output of the AT signal when terminating the control of the AT.

  Then, after the payout state-related processing is completed, the AT state management processing is completed, and the process returns to the main processing.

  As described above, in the AT state management process, when the game is controlled to be in the advantageous section, the condition for ending the advantageous section (the medal net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the first prescribed number, and the number of advantageous section games becomes the second prescribed number) Is reached, the advantageous section end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and control is performed to end the advantageous section. The advantageous section end flag is subsequently referred to in the main processing, and based on the setting of the advantageous section end flag, the advantageous section data initialization processing is executed, and data related to control in the advantageous section is initialized. This completes the control of the advantageous section.

  In the AT state management process, the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined upper limit game number (in the present embodiment, the second specified number (1,500 games)) when the control is performed in the advantageous section. Is determined based on the value of the advantageous section game number counter. If the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit game number, the advantageous section end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. , So as to end the control of the advantageous section. The end condition of the advantageous section is changed to an end condition that is satisfied when the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined upper limit game number (in the present embodiment, 1500 games). The termination condition may be established when the number exceeds the number of games obtained by subtracting 1 from the upper limit number of games (1499 in this embodiment).

  In the AT state management process, the advantageous section end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c when the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the first prescribed number and when the number of advantageous section games reaches the second prescribed number. I do. Then, the advantageous section end flag is referred to in the subsequent main processing, and the advantageous section data initialization processing is performed based on the setting of the advantageous section end flag, thereby terminating the advantageous section. ing.

  In the AT state management processing, when the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the first prescribed number, the advantageous section is terminated. The slot machine 1 can be designed so that the payout rate of medals in an advantageous section over the number of games is within a predetermined ratio. For example, the first specified number is set to 2395 (the maximum value (8) of the payout number in the slot machine 1 is subtracted from the upper limit number of 2400, and the maximum number (three) used for setting the bet amount is added). By doing so, the net increase in the number of medals to be paid out in the advantageous section can be made 2400 or less, and the payout rate of medals during 1600 games can be made within 150%. Thereby, it is possible to prevent an excessive number of medals from being paid out in the slot machine 1 during a predetermined period. It should be noted that the medal paid out in the advantageous section is replaced with an end condition that is established when the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined first predetermined number (2395 in this embodiment). The same applies to the case where the end condition is reached when the net increase number reaches the number (2396 in this embodiment) obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number. Note that the end condition of the advantageous section is replaced by an end condition that is satisfied when the net number of medals paid out in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined first predetermined number (2395 in this embodiment). The end condition may be set when the net number of medals paid out in the section reaches the number obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number (2396 in this embodiment).

  In the AT state management process, when the number of advantageous section games reaches the second prescribed number (upper limit game number (1500 games)) or the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the first prescribed number (2395). In such a case, the advantageous section is ended. When the number of advantageous sections reaches the second specified number, which is the upper limit number of games, by terminating the advantageous section, the advantageous section is prevented from continuing for a long time, and the medal in the advantageous section is prevented. When the net increase number of the game exceeds the first prescribed number, the AT state and the advantageous section are terminated, so that even if the number of advantageous section games does not reach the second prescribed number which is the upper limit number of games, the payout rate sharply increases. The advantage section is prevented from continuing when the height increases.

  In the AT state management process, a common advantageous section end flag is set when the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the first prescribed number and when the number of advantageous section games reaches the second prescribed number. Control is performed such that the advantageous section data initialization processing is performed in the main processing to end the advantageous section. Thereby, even when the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the first prescribed number or when the number of advantageous section games reaches the second prescribed number, the common advantageous section data initialization process is performed to perform the advantageous processing. The section is ended.

  In the AT state management processing, in the processing of updating the medal net increase counter, the value of the net increase counter is acquired as a net increase value in a predetermined register (HL register), and the payout number is added to the net increase number value. When the value obtained by subtracting the bet value is smaller than 0, the value of the net increase counter is corrected to 0, and as shown in FIGS. When the value is smaller than the reference value (the value of the net increase number at the start of the advantageous section (initial value 0)), the value of the net increase counter becomes 0, and when the increase / decrease number of medals is increasing, The increase / decrease number after the increasing tendency becomes the value of the net increase number counter.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), after shifting to the advantageous section, navigation information is not performed, and the number of increase / decrease of medals tends to decrease. When the value of the counter is lower than the initial value (0 in this embodiment), the value of the net increase counter is 0 over the period in which the number of increased or decreased medals is lower than the initial value. Thereafter, when the control is performed in the AT state and the stop operation is performed in accordance with the navigation notification, the increase / decrease number of medals tends to increase, the value of the net increase counter is set to the value of the net increase number of medals ( (A value obtained by subtracting the bet amount from the payout number) is sequentially added and updated. With this, the value of the net increase counter is determined when the increase / decrease number of medals changes from the decreasing trend to the increase direction, that is, the increase / decrease number of medals when the increase / decrease number of medals becomes the lowest value is set as the reference value. The value indicates an increased number from the value.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 50B, the number of medals increased / decreased once exceeded the initial value of the net number increase counter, then decreased, and again fell below the initial value (0 in this embodiment). In such a case, the number of medals increases or decreases to zero over a period in which the number of medals is less than the initial value. Thereafter, as the increase / decrease number of medals tends to increase, the value of the net increase counter is updated by sequentially adding a value corresponding to the net increase number of medals (a value obtained by subtracting the bet value from the payout number value). As a result, the value of the net increase counter is set to a value indicating the increase number from the reference value, with the increase / decrease number of medals when the increase / decrease number of medals becomes the lowest value as a reference value. .

  In the AT state management process, during the advantageous section, after adding the payout number of medals in the game to the net increase counter value, the calculated value obtained by subtracting the bet value in the game from the net increase counter value is 0. If the calculated value is smaller than 0, the value obtained by adding the payout value to the net increase counter value and subtracting the bet value is set in the net increase counter and updated. If the net increase number becomes a negative value during the advantageous section by performing the process of setting and updating the net increase number counter to 0 in each advantageous game, the net increase number counter is corrected to 0, and the net increase number is counted again from 0. The net increase counter is updated so as to start, so the medal increase width (net increase) in the transition of the actual increase / decrease number of medals in the advantageous section is calculated as the net increase count. It is possible to identify directly as pointer value (see FIG. 50 (a)).

  In the present embodiment, by performing a process of updating the net increase counter during the advantageous section, the counting of the net number of medals is started from the transition to the advantageous section, and the net increase during the advantageous section is started. Although the configuration is such that the number of sheets is counted, the processing for updating the net increase counter is not performed when the AT state is not in the advantageous section, and the processing for updating the net increase counter is performed when the AT state is in the advantageous section. good. Even in such a configuration, when the navigation notification is not performed due to the AT state, the net number of medals does not increase, and the net number of medals increases in the AT state and the navigation notification is performed. In the same manner as the configuration in which the process of updating the net increase counter is performed during the middle, the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section can be counted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), for example, after the shift to the advantageous section, in a period in which the navigation notification is not performed, no prize with the payout rate exceeding 1 occurs, and the number of increase / decrease of the medals becomes equal to the reference value. If the number of medals decreases, the number of medals increases or decreases from the game in which the transition to the AT state and the navigation notification is started after the transition to the advantageous section. Is the least. It should be noted that a prize having a payout rate exceeding 1 may occur even during a period in which the navigation notification is not performed after the shift to the advantageous section. If a prize with a payout rate of more than 1 occurs during the period so that the number of medals increased or decreased during the period is monotonously increasing, the net number increased during the advantageous section in the game shifted to the advantageous section. The least. In addition, if a prize with a payout rate of more than 1 occurs in the period so that the number of medals increases and decreases after the number of medals increases and decreases temporarily below the reference value during the period, In this game, the net increase in number during the advantageous section is the smallest. As described above, the point in time during which the net increase in the number of sheets in the advantageous section becomes the smallest may vary depending on the situation. On the other hand, in the process of updating the net additional number counter of medals, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment acquires the value of the net additional number counter in the predetermined register as the net additional number value, and pays out the payout number to the net additional number value. If the value obtained by adding the numerical value and subtracting the bet value is smaller than 0, the value of the net increase counter is corrected to 0, so that the number of medals increased / decreased from a decreasing tendency to an increasing tendency. , The net increase counter is reset, and the net increase value is counted again from 0. From the time when the net increase number becomes minimum in the advantageous section, the net increase number is counted and the accurate net increase number is counted. You can do it.

  Further, in the present embodiment, by performing a process of updating the net number increase counter during the advantageous section, the counting of the net number of medals is started from the transition to the advantageous section, and the net increase during the advantageous section is performed. Although the configuration is such that the number of sheets is counted, the configuration may be such that a process of updating the net increase counter is performed regardless of whether the section is an advantageous section or not. In such a configuration, when the net number of medals is increasing in the section before shifting to the advantageous section, the net number of medals in the section is taken over to count the net number of medals in the advantageous section. Can be done.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the medal payout rate to 1 or more by performing the stop operation in the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R notified by the navigation notification. When the stop operation is performed in an operation mode other than the operation modes of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R notified by the navigation notification, the medal payout rate is set to less than 1 and the AT state (output) In the ball state A and the ball outgoing state B), the number of medals increases or decreases according to the navigating notification. On the other hand, in states other than the AT state, the number of medals increases or decreases. By controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the lighting state, it is notified that it is a period in which the number of medals increases or decreases in the advantageous section.

  In the present embodiment, in the AT state management processing, if the advantageous section end flag is set because the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the first prescribed number, the number of advantageous section games is increased to the second prescribed number (upper limit game). ), The advantageous section end flag is set by the arrival of the number, and the advantageous section end flag is set by the payout-related processing. In the configuration in which the advantageous section is terminated by performing the processing and initializing the data relating to the advantageous section (including the data relating to the AT state), that is, in the AT state management processing, regardless of the termination condition of the established advantageous section, the common condition is established. By performing the advantageous section data initialization process, the data relating to the advantageous section is similarly initialized, and the advantageous section is terminated. But, at the end of the advantageous interval, the data relate to advantageous section in accordance with the end condition of the enacted advantageously section initializes, it may be configured to terminate the advantageous intervals.

  In the present embodiment, the number of medals actually paid out as a result of the game in the advantageous section is added to the net increase counter to count the net number of medals in the advantageous section. When a predetermined small role with payout of medals is won, regardless of whether the predetermined small role wins and the medal is actually paid out as a result of the game, the predetermined small role wins and the medal May be considered as paid out, and the number of medals to be paid out may be added to the net increase counter to count the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section. With such a configuration, in the advantageous section, when a predetermined small win is won by an internal lottery, the predetermined small win is regarded as winning and a medal is paid out, and the paid out medal is counted as a net increase counter. Therefore, by intentionally dropping the predetermined small winning combination, it is possible to prevent the net increase counter from exceeding the specified number and prevent the number of games in the advantageous section from being intentionally extended.

  In addition, when a predetermined small win is won in the internal lottery, the predetermined small win wins and the medal is actually paid out regardless of whether the predetermined small win wins and the medal is actually paid out as a result of the game. In the configuration in which the number of medals to be paid out is added to the net increase counter and the net number of medals in the advantageous section is counted, the small lottery accompanied by the payout of medals is included in the internal lottery. When the lottery target is won, regardless of whether it is possible for the player to reliably win the small role, if the small role wins, the small role wins In addition to adding the paid-out medals to the net increase counter, if a lottery target role including a small role with a medal payout is won in the internal lottery, the player must ensure that the small role wins Possible situations In the case where a prize could not be won despite the presence of a stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, for example, the navigation target role is won as a lottery target role in the internal lottery, and the navigation notification gives an advantage to the player. By notifying the operation mode, it is possible to win the predetermined small role included in the navigation target role, but by operating in a different operation mode from the notified operation mode, it is possible to win the predetermined small role. If a role cannot be won, or if a specific small role is won and operated in a certain operation mode (such as an operation at an operation timing within the range of pulling in the specific role), the specific small role is always won. Although it is possible to make a specific small role not win by operating in an operation mode other than a certain operation mode even though it is possible, the player can win. It is considered that the small role has won and the medal has been paid out, and by adding the paid out medal to the net increase counter, the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is counted, while the internal lottery is performed. If a lottery target including a small win with a payout is won, if the player cannot win the small win in a situation where it is impossible to reliably win the small win, for example, the internal lottery In the situation where the navigation target role is won as the lottery target role and the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R which is advantageous to the player by the navigation notification is not notified, the predetermined small role included in the navigation target role is won. If it is not possible to make the player increase the number of medals, it is preferable not to add the number to the net number increase counter. In a situation where it is not possible to make the player increase the number of medals, the net increase counter is added only when the number of medals is actually increased, thereby preventing the player from being disadvantaged.

  In the present embodiment, when updating the net increase counter in the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 adds the value of the medal payout number paid out in the game to the net increase counter, and updates the bet amount. When the calculated value obtained by subtracting the value of the medal used for the setting is smaller than 0, the value of the net increase counter is corrected to 0 so that the increase / decrease number of medals is 0 in the net increase counter. When the value is less than 0, the value is not counted for the value less than 0, and is counted only for the value greater than 0. However, the main control unit 41 initializes the net increase counter to 0 by the start of the advantageous section. In the advantageous section, when a medal is paid out, a value corresponding to the number of paid out medals is added to a net increase counter, and when the medal is used for setting a bet number, the medal is paid. By repeatedly performing the process of subtracting the value of the number of medals from the net increase counter, the net increase of medals in the advantageous section is counted. The configuration may be such that: In such a configuration, when the number of increase / decrease of medals is less than 0, the net increase counter is not corrected to 0, so that the process of counting the net increase by the net increase counter can be simplified.

  In the present embodiment, when updating the net increase counter, the main control unit 41 adds the value of the medal payout number paid out in the game to the net increase counter, and is used for setting the bet amount. When the calculated value obtained by subtracting the value of the medal is smaller than 0, the value of the net increase counter is corrected to 0. When the calculated value is 0 or more, the calculated value is changed to the net increased number. By controlling the value of the net increase counter to be updated to the value of the counter, the net increase number of medals is counted starting from the point at which the net increase of medals decreases most after the start of the advantageous section. . After the start of the advantageous section, the timing at which the net add-on number of medals decreases most can vary depending on the situation. However, the main control unit 41 starts counting the net number of medals by the net number increase counter from a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section, and The configuration may be such that the net increase in medals up to the present as the starting point is counted, and the advantageous section is terminated when the net increase in medals exceeds the specified number.

  For example, the main control unit 41 counts the net number of medals up to the present, starting from a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section, and determines the advantageous section when the net number of medals exceeds a specified number. As a configuration for terminating, the counting by the net increase counter is started from the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, and the net increase in the number of medals up to the present starting from the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is the prescribed number. In the case of exceeding, the configuration may be such that the advantageous section is terminated. According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net number of medals for determining the termination condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and the net number of medals starting from a point other than when shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section. It is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section on the basis of the above, so that the control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the net increase counter can be simplified.

  Further, for example, the main control unit 41 counts a net increase in medals up to the present, starting from a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section, and when the net increase in medals exceeds a specified number, As a configuration for terminating the advantageous section, after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, when the advantageous section notification LED 12a indicates that the state has shifted to the AT state, and when the operation mode of increasing the medals is notified by the navigation notification, When the net number of medals up to the present as the starting point exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section may be terminated and the section may be shifted to the normal section. According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net number of medals for determining the termination condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, the advantageous section notification LED 12a switches to the advantageous section. Since there is no need to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase of medals starting from a time other than when the operation mode of increasing the medals is notified by the navigation notification, which indicates that the transition has been made, the net increase The control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the counter can be simplified.

  In addition, for example, the main control unit 41 counts the net increase in the number of medals up to the present, starting from a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section, and when the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the specified number, As a configuration for terminating the advantageous section, after transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, regardless of whether or not the operation mode of increasing the medals by the navigating notification has been notified, it is suggested that the state has shifted to the AT state by the advantageous section notification LED 12a. Then, when the net increase in the number of medals from the start to the present exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section may be terminated and the normal section may be shifted. According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net number of medals for determining the termination condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, the operation of increasing the medals by the navigation notification is performed. Regardless of whether or not the mode has been notified, there is no need to determine the conditions for ending the advantageous section based on the net medal increase of medals starting from a time other than when it is suggested by the advantageous section notification LED 12a that the vehicle has shifted to the advantageous section. Accordingly, the control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the net increase counter can be simplified.

  In the present embodiment, in the AT state management processing, the control is performed so that the advantageous section is terminated when the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the first specified number. The number of medals to be paid out in each game is counted without counting the number of medals used for setting the bet number in the above, and the advantageous section is terminated when the total number of medals paid out in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined specified number. A configuration in which control is performed so that the For example, the prescribed number of the total payout number is 2865 (a net increase number (2400) at which the payout rate of medals between 1600 games is 150%) and a minimum number of games to which the net increase number of medals are given (160 games = 2400/1 The payout in one game in the slot machine 1 is calculated from the sum of the number of medals (480 games = 160 games × the specified number per game 3) used in setting the number of bets in the maximum payout number per game (15). When the total number of medals paid out in the game during the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section is terminated as the maximum value (the value obtained by subtracting the maximum value (15)) of the advantageous section. The maximum net increase in the number of medals to be paid out in a section can be 2400 or less, and the payout rate of medals during 1600 games is set to 150% or less. Door can be. Note that the same effect can be obtained even when the advantageous section is terminated when the total number of medals paid out in the game during the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (the specified number + 1).

  As described above, in the payout control processing (first processing) called from the main processing at the start of the game from the main processing, the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous section is the predetermined value (1). If it is determined that the section is a section (Sj1), it is determined that the three bets (first bet) are set, and if it is determined that the gaming state is controlled to RT1 (Sj13). Then, the ED transition game number counter for counting the ED transition game number is updated (Sj14). Then, in the AT management processing (second processing) called from the main processing at the end of the game, it is determined that three bets (first bet) are set, and the gaming state is controlled to RT1. If it is determined that there is a game (Su17), it is determined whether or not the value of the ED shift game number counter updated by the payout control process in the game reaches the specified game number (fourth specified number) (Su22). If it is determined that the specified number of games has been reached, the process of performing ED control (Su23) in which the navigation notification control is performed until the end of the advantageous section is performed, while the bet number of three cards (No. If it is determined that “1 bet amount” is not set, or if it is determined that the gaming state is not controlled by RT1, the AT state management processing is performed without performing the processing (Su23) of performing ED control. By Ryo is adapted to return to the main processing. Accordingly, in the AT state management processing, when the three bets (first bet number) are not set, or when the gaming state is a gaming state other than RT1, the processing for performing the ED control is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to urge a player or the like to play a game with three bets (first bet) and RT1.

  In the AT state management processing called at the end of the game from the main processing in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines that the game is in the advantageous section if the advantageous section game number counter is a value other than the initial value (0). Judgment (Su1), the net increase counter is updated based on the number of medals paid out and the number of bets in the game, regardless of whether three bets or two bets are set. (Su3 to Su11), after updating the net increase counter, it is determined whether or not the value of the net increase counter has exceeded a first specified number (Su12). If it is determined that the value has exceeded the first specified number, , An advantageous section end flag is set (Su15). Thereafter, in the main process, the advantageous section data initialization processing is performed based on the fact that the advantageous section end flag is set, thereby initializing information on the advantageous section and ending the advantageous section.

  When controlling to the advantageous section, the main control unit 41 updates the net increase counter even if three bets are set or two bets is set, and updates the net increase counter. Since the advantageous section is terminated when the counter value exceeds the specified number (first specified number), even if three bets are selected or two bets are selected, the upper limit number (in this embodiment, In order to prevent the payout of medals (2400) from being performed, the number of medals to be paid out in the advantageous section is limited so as not to be excessively large. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the gambling property in the slot machine 1 from excessively increasing.

  In the AT state management processing, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the value of the advantageous section game number counter is not the initial value (0) but an advantageous section (Su1), and sets the bet number of three. When it is determined that the game has been performed (Su17), the processing related to the navigation notification (Su18 to Su25) is performed, while the value of the advantageous section game number counter is determined to be the advantageous section instead of the initial value (0). However, if it is determined (Su1) that the number of three bets has not been set (Su17), the AT state management processing is terminated without performing the processing related to the navigation notification (Su18 to Su25). It returns to the main processing. Accordingly, in the AT state management process, if the three bets (the first bet) are not set, the process related to the navigating notification is not performed. The user can be prompted to play the game with the number (first bet number).

  In the AT state management processing, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the value of the advantageous section game number counter is not an initial value (0) but an advantageous section (Su1), and determines that the gaming state is RT1. When it is determined (Su17), while the processing related to the navigation notification (Su18 to Su25) is performed, it is determined that the value of the advantageous section game number counter is not the initial value (0) but an advantageous section (Su1). If it is determined that the game state is a game state other than RT1 (Su17), the AT state management processing is ended without performing the processing related to the navigation notification (Su18 to Su25), and the processing returns to the main processing. It has become. Accordingly, in the AT state management process, when the three bets (first bet) are not set, the process related to the navigating notification is not performed. You can be encouraged to do so.

  In the AT state management processing, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the value of the number-of-advantage-sections game counter is not the initial value (0) but is an advantage section (Su1), and three bets are set. If it is determined that the game state is RT1 (Su17), the processing related to the navigation notification (Su18 to Su25) is performed, and the value of the advantageous section game number counter is set to the initial value (0). ) Is determined to be an advantageous section (Su1), but if it is determined that the three bets are not set, or if the gaming state is determined to be a gaming state other than RT1 (Su17), the AT status management process is terminated without performing the processes (Su18 to Su25) related to the navigation notification, and the process returns to the main process. Thereby, in the AT state management processing, when the three bets (first bet number) are not set and the gaming state is a gaming state other than RT1, processing related to the navigation notification is performed. Therefore, it is possible to urge a player or the like to play a game with three bets (first bet) and RT1.

  In the AT state management processing, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the three bets (first bet number) are set and determines that the gaming state is controlled to RT1. In this case (Su17), it is determined whether or not the net increase number specified based on the net increase counter exceeds the third specified number (Su20). If the net increase number exceeds the third specified number, the advantageous section is determined. While performing the process (Su23) of performing the ED control for performing the navigation notification control over the period up to the end, if it is determined that the three bets (the first bet) are not set, or the gaming state Is determined not to be controlled by RT1 (Su17), the process of determining whether the net increase in number exceeds the third specified number (Su20), and the process of performing ED control (Su23) are not performed. It has become. Thereby, in the AT state management processing, if the three bets (first bet) are not set, or if the gaming state is a gaming state other than RT1, the net increase number becomes the third specified number. Since it is not determined whether or not the game has exceeded the limit, the process of performing the EF control is not performed. Therefore, the player is required to play a game with three bets (first bet) and RT1. Can be encouraged.

[Timer interrupt processing]
The control content of the timer interrupt process (main) performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The timer interrupt processing (main) is a subroutine included in the game program.

  As shown in FIG. 51, in the timer interrupt processing (main), first, after exchanging all the front registers and the back registers (Sv1), the timer interrupt is disabled (Sv2), and the timer interrupt is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The value of the voltage drop state counter that has been set is obtained (Sv3). Then, referring to the input port to which the voltage drop signal is input from the power interruption detection circuit 48 (Sv4), it is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sv5). When the voltage drop signal is input, the voltage drop state counter determines whether or not the voltage drop state counter has reached a predetermined upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (Sv6). If the value has reached the value, the power interruption processing (main) is performed (Sv7).

  In the power interruption process, all the front registers and the back registers are exchanged, and the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 are saved by storing them in a predetermined order in the game stack area of the game RAM area, and the stack pointer is saved. The current address of the game stack area indicated by SP is saved by storing it in a predetermined area of the game RAM area. The predetermined area of the game RAM area including the predetermined area of the game RAM area where the main control unit 41 stores the value of the register and the area of the game RAM area where the value of the address indicated by the stack pointer SP is stored is backed up. It is backed up by the power supply, and even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, the stored contents of the game RAM area are preserved as long as the power is supplied by the backup power supply.

  Then, among the parallel output ports provided in the main control unit 41, the output port 3 to which the drive signal of the hopper motor 34b is output is initialized, and the output state is turned off. Thereby, when the payout of the medals is performed by the hopper unit 35, the payout of the medals is first stopped first. After that, among the parallel output ports, output ports 0 and 1 to which drive signals for the reel motors 32L, 32C and 32R are output are initialized, and when the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R is controlled, the reels 2L and 2R are initialized. Stop rotation of 2C and 2R.

  Thereafter, among the parallel output ports, the control signals of the output port 2 from which the control signals of the left / middle / right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R and the flow path switching solenoid 30 are output, the credit display 11, and the game assistance display 12 are output. The output ports 4 and 5 to be output, the output ports 6 and 7 for outputting a test signal, and the output ports 8 and 9 for transmitting a command to the sub-control unit 91 are sequentially initialized to control signals to various switches. Etc. are stopped.

  After the output ports 0 to 9 are initialized, destruction diagnosis data (5A (H) in this embodiment) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and parity adjustment data set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set. clear. Then, the parity adjustment data of the new RAM 41c is calculated so that the exclusive OR of all the storage areas of the RAM 41c becomes 0, the new parity adjustment data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the access to the RAM 41c is performed. Is set to prohibit, and the loop processing starts.

  In the loop processing, the apparatus stands by while monitoring the output state of the voltage drop signal. In this state, when the voltage drop signal is no longer input, the recovery of the voltage is determined, and the program is started from the startup processing (main). On the other hand, if the voltage drops while the voltage drop signal is being input, the operation is internally stopped.

  When the power supply of AC 100 V is stopped by the above processing, the power interruption processing (main) is executed, the value of the register before the power interruption is saved in the game stack area of the game RAM area, and the game Since the contents of a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c including the stack area are also maintained by supplying the backup power, the startup processing (main) executed when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted. , It is possible to return to the control state before the power interruption. Further, it is possible to specify whether the stop operation was effective in the control state before the power interruption.

  If it is determined in step Sv5 of the timer interrupt process that the voltage drop signal has not been input, or if it is determined in step Sv6 that the voltage drop state counter has not reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step Sv8, and Update the degraded state counter. When the process proceeds from step Sv5 to step Sv8, the current value is maintained by adding 0 to the voltage drop state counter, while when the process proceeds from step Sv5 to step Sv8, the voltage is increased. Update to add 1 to the drop state counter.

  Then, detection states of various switches are input from the input port, and port input processing for generating input data, fixed data, and edge data (ON edge data and OFF edge data) is performed (Sv9). Thereafter, the value of the flag register in which the operation result is stored among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 is stored in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order by using the above-described second save instruction, thereby saving. After that (Sv10), a time monitoring update process included in the non-game program is performed (Sv11). Thereafter, the value of the flag register evacuated to the game stack area in step Sv10 is sequentially read from the game stack area in the reverse order of the evacuation and set in the flag register using the above-mentioned second return instruction. Then, the flag register is returned to the state before the time monitoring update processing is performed (Sv12).

  In the time monitoring update process, first, using the aforementioned LD instruction, the value of the address indicated by the current stack pointer SP is read from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program, and It is stored and saved in a predetermined area of the game RAM area. Then, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program is read from a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is set for a non-game program. Then, the values of all the registers (accumulator register, flag register, general-purpose register, index register, interrupt register, refresh register, program counter, etc.) provided in the main control unit 41 including the flag register are described using the first save instruction. Are saved in a predetermined order in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP. In addition, when the time monitoring update process included in the non-game program is called from the game program, when the stack pointer SP is changed from the game program to the non-game program, the LD instruction is used, and the flag is changed. The second zero flag TZ of the register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the time monitoring update process is called from the game program, the state of the register saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the time monitoring update process is determined by the time monitor update process. May be different from the state of the register when calling.

  Thereafter, a sensor monitoring process for detecting an abnormality related to the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and a payout sensor 34c, a test signal output process for outputting a test signal generated in association with a game result, and various timers used by the non-game program are updated. A timer update process and a role ratio monitor output data selection process for selecting output data to be displayed on the role ratio monitor are sequentially performed. In the sensor monitoring process, when an abnormality relating to the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c or the payout sensor 34c is detected, sensor error reference data capable of specifying the type of the detected abnormality is stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. To be set.

  Then, by using the above-mentioned first return instruction, the value of the register stored and saved in the non-gaming stack area when the time monitoring and updating process is started is replaced with the non-gaming stack area in the reverse order of the saving. , And by setting the registers in the registers corresponding to the order, all the registers are restored to the state at the time when the time monitoring update processing is started. Thereafter, by using the above-described LD instruction, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area when the time monitoring update processing is started is read and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. The stack pointer SP is returned to the state at the time when the time monitoring update processing was started, and the time monitoring update processing is ended. In order to end the time monitoring update process included in the non-game program and return to the game program, the stack pointer is restored after restoring the values of all registers saved at the start of the time monitoring update process. When the SP is changed from the non-game program to the game program, the use of the LD instruction changes the second zero flag TZ of the flag register, and the flag register is changed before and after the execution of the LD instruction. The state may change. That is, the state of the register when the time monitoring and updating process ends is sometimes different from the state of the register saved when the time monitoring and updating process starts.

  After the flag register is restored in step Sv12, the sensor error reference data set by the time monitoring update process in step Sv11 is referenced (Sv13), and the sensor set by the time monitoring update process in the current timer interrupt is executed. The logical sum of the error reference data and the sensor error reference data set by the time monitoring update process in the previous timer interrupt is calculated (Sv14). In step Sv14, a sensor error flag that is set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c and that can specify whether an abnormality relating to the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c or the payout sensor 34c is detected is calculated. Update based on logical sum. When it is determined that an abnormality is detected based on the sensor error reference data by performing the steps Sv13 to Sv15, it is determined whether or not the sensor error flag is in a state indicating that the abnormality is detected. Regardless of this, the sensor error flag is updated to indicate that the abnormality has been detected. On the other hand, if it is determined that no abnormality is detected based on the sensor error reference data, the state of the sensor error flag is maintained. That is, when it is determined that an abnormality has been detected based on the sensor error reference data, the content of the sensor error reference data is reflected in the sensor error flag, while the abnormality is detected based on the sensor error reference data. If it is specified that the error has not been performed or that the abnormality has been cleared, the contents of the sensor error reference data are not reflected in the sensor error flag.

  After updating the sensor error flag in step Sv15, a random number value update process for updating a random number value in a random number circuit provided inside the main control unit 41 is performed (Sv16). The watchdog timer (WDT) register is cleared (Sv17). Thereafter, the value of a branch counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c for branching the processing included in the timer interrupt is read into a predetermined register, and is updated by adding a predetermined value (1 in the present embodiment). The updated value is set as the value of the branch counter in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sv18). In the process of updating the branch counter, if the branch counter is 0 to 2, 1 is added, and if the branch counter is 3, the counter is initialized and returned to 0, so that the branch counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Update. That is, the value of the branch counter loops in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 0... Every time the timer interrupt processing (main) is executed. The value of the branch counter is referred to in each process executed in the timer interrupt process (main). For example, a predetermined control is executed when the branch counter reaches a predetermined value. Control will be branched.

  After updating the branch counter in step Sv18, it is determined whether or not the branch counter is 4 (Sv19). If the branch counter is 4, the branch counter is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Counter update processing (Sv20) for updating predetermined various timers, indicators such as various LEDs connected to the output port (credit indicator 11, game assist indicator 12, 1-3 BET LEDs 14-16, status indicator LED 17, start valid LED dynamic display processing (Sv21) for controlling the lighting state of the LED 18, the section display LED 19, the replaying LED 20, and the like) to perform a transmission or the like by setting a lighting signal for dynamically lighting according to the setting of each processing such as the main processing. )I do.

  When it is determined in step Sv19 that the branching counter is not 4, and after the LED dynamic display process is performed in step Sv21, a medal insertion signal indicating that a medal has been inserted or a medal payout among the external output signals. The output setting of the medal payout signal indicating that the game is to be performed is updated, and a medal insertion / payout signal transmission process (Sv22) to be transmitted to the outside of the slot machine 1 is performed. , An input error signal, a payout error signal), a security signal transmission process (Sv24) to be transmitted to the outside of the slot machine 1, and various commands such as a door command and an operation end command set in a command queue. Command transmission processing (Sv25) for performing transmission and the like is sequentially performed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the branch counter is 2 with reference to the branch counter. It is determined whether or not a reel error is occurring based on whether or not the set reel error flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sv26). If no reel error is occurring, a reel control process is performed to control the rotation and stop of the reel by setting the excitation pattern of each of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R according to the progress of the game and the like (Sv27). .

  If it is determined in step Sv25 that the branch timer is not 2, if it is determined in step Sv26 that a reel error has occurred, or if the reel control process in step Sv27 has been completed, the reel control process is executed. A drive signal corresponding to the excitation pattern thus output is output to each of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, so that the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R rotate and stop in a predetermined control manner (reel motor drive signal output processing ( Sv29), a process of transmitting a control signal to the solenoid drive circuit 46, a process of updating the lighting state of the left / middle / right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, a process of setting the signal during the advantageous section to an OFF state, and the like. After sequentially performing the port output update process (Sv30) to be performed, a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is With reference to the output buffer of the preferred interval in the signal that is set (in this example, 1) a predetermined value indicating the ON state in the output buffer determines whether is set (SV31). A predetermined value indicating the ON state in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section by the processing at the end of the game (Sb82) in the main processing by setting the flag during the advantageous section by the payout control processing of the main processing (this embodiment Then, 1) is set.

  In step Sv31, when it is determined that the predetermined value (1 in this embodiment) indicating the ON state is set in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section, the signal during the advantageous section is controlled to the ON state, After the output of the signal during the advantageous section to the test apparatus is started (Sv32), the process proceeds to step Sv33. On the other hand, in step Sv31, the initial value (0 in the present embodiment) indicating the OFF state is set in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section, and the predetermined value (1 in the present embodiment) indicating the ON state is set. If it is determined that it has not been set, the process proceeds to step Sv33 without performing the process of step Sv32.

  In step Sv33, all front and rear registers are exchanged (Sv33), the timer interrupt is set to be enabled (Sv34), the timer interrupt processing (main) is terminated, and the timer interrupt processing (main) is completed. ) Is returned to the main processing at the start of the processing.

  As described above, in the timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment, the counter update processing (Sv20) for updating a plurality of timer values used in the specific processing (game program) including the timer value for one game time management, and the special processing ( The time monitoring update process (Sv11) for updating the timer value used in the non-game program is separately performed. Thus, the time monitoring updating process for updating the timer value used in the special process is not mixed with the counter updating process for updating the timer value used in the specific process.

  In the timer interruption process of the present embodiment, the time monitoring and updating process including the process of outputting the test signal is performed before the counter updating process of updating the timer value for one game time management. Thus, the update of the timer value for one game time management is started after the output of the test signal is started, so that the time interval at which the test signal is output can be reliably set to be equal to or longer than the minimum time of one game. .

[Time monitoring update process]
The control content of the time monitoring update process performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The time monitoring update process is a subroutine included in the non-game program and called by a timer interrupt process (main) included in the game program. The time monitoring update process sequentially calls a sensor monitoring process, a test signal output process, a medal passing time timer update process, and a display monitor output data selection process included in the non-game program.

  As shown in FIG. 52, in the time monitoring update process, first, the above-mentioned LD instruction is used to change the value of the current address of the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program, It is stored and saved in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area (Sv201). Then, using the LD instruction, the value of the stack pointer SP is stored in the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program as the value of the stack pointer SP. The stack pointer SP is set for a non-game program by setting the value (Sv202). Then, by using the above-mentioned first save instruction, the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register are stored in a predetermined order in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP. It is saved and saved (Sv203). After that, it is included in the non-gaming program, is a sensor monitoring process (Sv204) for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the detection signals of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and the payout sensor 34c, and is connected to the slot machine 1. Test signal output processing (Sv205) for outputting a test signal to the test apparatus, medal passing time timer updating processing (Sv206) for updating a timer for measuring the passing time of medals in the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, The ratio monitor display data selection process (Sv207) for selecting the ratio data to be displayed on the monitor is sequentially performed.

  After performing the process of selecting the ratio display data in the step Sv207, the value of the register stored and saved in the non-gaming stack area in the step Sv203 using the first return instruction described above, By sequentially reading from the non-gaming stack area in the reverse order of saving, and setting the registers corresponding to the order, all the registers are returned to the state at the time when the time monitoring update process was started (Sv208). Thereafter, by using the above-described LD instruction, the value of the stack pointer SP for the game program saved in the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area in the step of Sv201 is read, and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. The stack pointer SP is returned to the state at the time of starting the monitoring update processing (Sv209), the time monitoring update processing is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (main) of the caller.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 performs various processes (sensor monitoring process, test signal output process, medal passing time timer updating process, winning ratio monitor display data selecting process) in accordance with the time monitoring updating process included in the non-game program. In this case, by calling the time monitoring update process from the timer interrupt process (main) (Sv11) included in the game program, various processes of the time monitoring update process are performed, and when each process ends, the caller is called. The processing returns to the timer interrupt processing (main).

  In the time monitoring update process, after being called from the timer interrupt process (main), which is a game program, first, a process of saving the stack pointer SP and the register is performed, and then, a sensor monitoring process, a test signal output process, A plurality of processes such as a medal passing time timer updating process and a winning ratio monitor display data selecting process are performed. Then, after all these processes are completed, the stack pointer SP and the register saved when called from the game program are restored, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (main) of the caller. In such a configuration, that is, in a non-game program called by a single calling process from a game program, a plurality of processes (for example, a sensor monitoring process, a test signal output process, a medal passing time timer updating process, a winning ratio monitor display data selection) In the configuration in which the processing is performed, the processing for saving the stack pointer SP and the register and the processing for restoring the stack pointer SP and the register are not performed for each of the plurality of processings performed in the non-game program, and the processing can be performed once.

  When a non-game program (for example, a time monitoring update process) is called from a game program (for example, a timer interrupt process (main)), an operation result is stored in a register provided in the main control unit 41 on the game program side. After the value of the flag register is saved by storing it in the game stack area of the game RAM area, the non-game program is called, and after the non-game program is terminated, the value is saved before calling the non-game program. By sequentially reading the value of the flag register from the game stack area and setting the value in the corresponding flag register, the flag register is returned to the state before calling the non-game program. Thereby, the game program calls the non-game program, and when the non-game program uses the flag register to perform an operation, even when the value of the flag register is changed, the game program returns to the game program. Then, the value of the flag register is restored to the state before the non-game program is called, and the subsequent processing can be performed.

  In a non-game program (for example, time monitoring update processing), when called by a game program (for example, timer interrupt processing (main)), first, the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is used. The current address value of the indicated game stack area is stored and saved in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area. Then, after performing a predetermined process according to the non-gaming program, when ending the non-gaming program, the value of the stack pointer SP evacuated to a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area when the non-gaming program is started Is set to the stack pointer SP, thereby returning the stack pointer SP to the state when the non-game program was started. Thereby, even when the non-game program uses the stack pointer SP in the non-game program and changes the stack pointer SP, when the non-game program is terminated, when the non-game program is started, With the stack pointer SP returned to the state, the game program can be returned to the calling game program.

  In a non-game program (for example, a time monitoring update process), when called by a game program (for example, a timer interrupt process (main)), the values of all registers provided in the main control unit 41 are stored in a non-game RAM. It is saved by storing it in the non-game stack area of the area. Then, after performing a predetermined process according to the non-game program, when terminating the non-game program, the value of the register stored and saved in the non-game stack area when the non-game program is started Are sequentially read from the non-game stack area and set in the corresponding registers, whereby all the registers are restored to the state at the time when the non-game program was started. Thereby, even if the non-gaming program uses a register to perform various processes in the non-gaming program and changes the value of the register, the non-gaming program is terminated when the non-gaming program is terminated. With the values of all the registers restored to the state at the start of the game, it is possible to return to the calling game program.

  In the non-game program, when called by the game program, the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 are saved by storing them in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area, and the non-game program is saved. When ending, by setting the value of the register stored and saved in the non-game stack area to the corresponding register, all registers are restored to the state when the non-game program was started Has become. The values of the registers used by the game program are stored and saved in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area, and the registers are restored from the non-game stack area. There is no need to provide an area for saving, and only the area for saving the value of the flag register need be provided in the game stack area, so that the capacity of the game stack area can be reduced.

  Also, while the main control unit 41 requires a 1-byte program capacity for an instruction to save the value of the flag register, the main control unit 41 requires a 2-byte program capacity for an instruction to save the value of all registers. I do. When the non-game program is called from the game program, the value of the flag register among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 is evacuated to the game stack area of the game RAM area on the game program side. On the calling and non-gaming program side, the values of all registers are evacuated to the non-gaming stack area of the non-gaming RAM area. The capacity can be reduced.

[Sensor monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 53, in the sensor monitoring process, the payout sensor is updated with reference to the timer interrupt process (main), which is updated in the timer interrupt process (main) and set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not it is time to perform processing relating to the payout sensor that monitors whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the detection states of 34c and 34d (timing when the branch timer is 0) (Sz101). Then, if it is time to perform the processing related to the payout sensor, the process proceeds to Sz102. On the other hand, when the processing for the payout sensor is not the timing, the process proceeds to step Sz117, and the processing for the insertion sensor for monitoring whether or not the detection state of the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c is abnormal is performed.

  If it is determined in step Sz101 that it is time to perform the processing related to the payout sensor, the sensor error set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c to transmit the monitoring result of the sensor monitoring processing to the game program. The reference data is cleared (Sz102). Then, by referring to an error flag which is set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c and can specify whether or not an error of the error codes E1 to E5 has occurred (Sz103), the error codes E2, E3, It is determined whether an abnormality of E4 has occurred (Sz104).

  If it is determined in step Sz104 that an error has occurred in the error codes E2, E3, and E4, the process proceeds to step Sz117. If it is determined that no error has occurred in the error codes E2, E3, and E4. After referring to the predetermined area of the port input buffer in which the fixed data of the payout sensors 34c and 34d are stored (Sz105), the payout of paying out medals by the hopper unit 35 with reference to the predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c. It is determined whether a payout flag indicating that control is being performed is set (Sz106).

  If it is determined in step Sz106 that the payout flag is set, it is determined whether one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is ON based on the finalized data of the payout sensors 34c and 34d referred to in step Sz105. (Sz107), and when one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is in the ON state, a predetermined area of the port input buffer in which the edge data of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is stored is referred to (Sz108). It is determined whether data (ON edge data or OFF edge data) is set (Sz109).

  If it is determined in step Sz107 that one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is in the ON state and that the edge data has been set in step Sz107, that is, one medal paid out from the hopper unit 35 When the vehicle starts passing through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d, or when one medal paid out from the hopper unit 35 finishes passing through the detection range of the payout sensor, the non-gaming RAM of the RAM 41c is used. The sensor check timer 1 set in a predetermined area of the area is initialized and set to 0 (Sz110), and the counting of the passage time of a new medal is started. Then, when it is determined in step Sz109 that the edge data is not set, and after the sensor check timer 1 is initialized in step Sz110, 1 is added to the sensor check timer 1 and updated (Sz111).

  The sensor check timer 1 determines the time from when the medal starts to pass through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d to when the medal has passed, and the time when the medal passes through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d. This is a timer for counting the time until the next medal starts passing. By being updated in step Sz111 in the sensor monitoring process, the sensor check timer 1 determines whether or not the payout sensor is related during the period in which the payout flag is set, that is, during the period in which the hopper unit 35 controls the payout of medals. The processing is updated every time the processing is performed (one time every four times of the timer interrupt processing (main), and 2.24 milliseconds).

  If it is determined in step Sz107 that one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is in the ON state and that the edge data is not set in step Sz109, that is, the medal payout control is performed for one of the payouts from the hopper unit 35. If the medals are passing through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d, or if the period is between the payout of one medal and the payout of the next medal during the payout control, the sensor The check timer 1 is updated by adding one unit time (2.24 milliseconds in this embodiment) (Sz111).

  Then, after updating the sensor check timer 1 in step Sz111, it is determined whether or not the value of the sensor check timer 1 has exceeded a predetermined maximum monitoring time (11.20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). It is determined (Sz112).

  Here, the maximum value of the monitoring time of the sensor check timer 1 is at least the maximum value of the time required from the time when the medal is paid out by the hopper unit 35 and the medal starts to pass through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d until the medal ends. After the medals paid out by the hopper unit 35 have passed through the detection ranges of the payout sensors 34c and 34d, the next medals are paid out by the hopper unit 35 and pass through the detection ranges of the payout sensors 34c and 34d. The time is set to be longer than the longer time required to start the operation. Accordingly, during the payout control for paying out medals, based on the sensor check timer 1, at least the time during which the detection state of the payout sensors 34c and 34d can be continued in the ON state, and the payout sensors 34c and 34d. Then, it is determined whether or not a period longer than a period in which the detection state can be continued in the OFF state has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step Sz112 that the value of the sensor check timer 1 has exceeded the maximum value of the monitoring time, sensor error reference data indicating that an abnormality has been detected based on the detection states of the payout sensors 34c and 34d (payout sensor ) Is set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 14c (Sz113), the sensor check timer 1 is initialized and set to 0 (Sz114), and the time measurement of the passage time of a new medal is started, and The value (0) of the sensor check timer 1 set in the step is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz115), and the process proceeds to step Sz117. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sz112 that the value of the sensor check timer 1 has not exceeded the maximum value of the monitoring time, the value of the sensor check timer 1 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz115), and Sz117 Proceed to step.

  If it is determined in step Sz106 that the payout flag is set, and if it is determined in step Sz107 that one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is not in the ON state, the processing of steps Sz108 to Sz113 is performed. By proceeding to step Sz114 without performing, the sensor error reference data is maintained in the cleared state in step Sz102, the process proceeds to step Sz114, and the sensor check timer 1 is initialized and set to 0. The value (0) of the sensor check timer 1 set in the step Sz114 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz115), and the process proceeds to the step Sz117.

  If it is determined in step Sz106 that the payout flag is not set, both the payout sensors 34c and 34d are in the OFF state based on the fixed data of the payout sensors 34c and 34d referred to in step Sz105. It is determined whether or not this is the case (Sz116). If both the payout sensors 34c and 34d are in the OFF state, the process proceeds to step Sz107. If it is determined in step Sz107 that one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to step Sz117 without setting the sensor error reference data (payout sensor).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sz106 that the payout flag is not set, and if it is determined in step Sz116 that both the payout sensors 34c and 34d are not in the OFF state, the process proceeds to step Sz113. After setting the sensor error reference data (payout sensor) in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 14c, the sensor check timer 1 is initialized (Sz114), and the value of the sensor check timer 1 is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. (Sz115), the process proceeds to the step of Sz117.

  By performing the processing of the above steps Sz11 to Sz116, processing related to the payout sensor that determines whether or not an abnormality related to payout of medals has occurred based on the detection state of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is performed. After the processing is performed, the processing after the step of Sz117 is performed, so that the processing regarding the input sensor is performed following the processing regarding the payout sensor.

  As shown in FIG. 54, in the processing related to the insertion sensor in the sensor monitoring processing, first, whether or not a medal care permission flag indicating that the insertion of medals from the medal insertion unit 4 is permitted is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Is determined (Sz117), and if the medal maintenance permission flag is not set, the sensor monitoring process is terminated and the process returns to the caller time monitoring update process.

  If it is determined in step Sz117 that the medal maintenance permission flag is set, a predetermined area in the game RAM area of the RAM 41c is referred to (Sz118), and abnormalities relating to the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and the payout sensor 34c (hereinafter, medal). It is determined whether or not a medal sensor error is occurring based on whether or not a sensor error flag that can specify whether or not a sensor error has been detected (Sz119). If a medal sensor error is occurring, the sensor monitoring process is terminated, and the process returns to the caller time monitoring update process.

  If it is determined in step Sz119 that the medal sensor error has not occurred, the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c (in FIG. 54, the inserted medal sensors 1, 2, and 3) set in the port input buffer in the game RAM area. With reference to the data (Sz120), it is determined whether or not the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are ON (Sz121).

  If it is determined in step Sz121 that the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are ON, the ON state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is retracted to a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c (Sz122). With reference to the sensor check timer 2 set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area, it is determined whether or not the sensor check timer 2 is 0 (Sz123).

  The sensor check timer 2 is a timer for measuring the time from when the medal starts passing through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c to when the medal finishes passing. The sensor check timer 1 is updated by the step Sz127 in the sensor monitoring process, so that the sensor check timer 1 performs the sensor monitoring process during the period in which the inserted medal sensor 31a is in the ON state (for each timer interrupt process (main), 0.56 milliseconds).

  If it is determined in step Sz123 that the sensor check timer 2 is 0, it is determined whether or not the inserted medal sensors 31b and 31c (in FIG. 26, the inserted medal sensors 2 and 3) that are referred to in step Sz120 are in the ON state. Is determined (Sz124), and if the inserted medal sensors 31b and 31c are not in the ON state, the medal insertion without referring to the medal insertion signal is performed based on the medal insertion signal ignoring timer set by the medal insertion signal processing in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not it is within the signal ignoring time (in this embodiment, within 504 milliseconds after the start of the switching control of the medal flow path by the flow path switching solenoid 30) (Sz125), and the medal insertion signal is ignored. If the time is not within the time, the sensor check timer 2 stores one unit time (0.56 milliseconds in this embodiment). The sum is updated (Sz126), and the value of the sensor check timer 2 after the addition is set to the maximum value of the normal passage time range required for the medal to pass normally through the detection range of the inserted medal sensor 31a (in this embodiment, 99.68 m) is determined (Sz127). Note that the normal passage time range includes the measured value of the time required for the medal to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the shape of the medal receiving channel 29b of the medal selector 29, and the insertion in the medal receiving channel 29b. It is determined in advance based on the arrangement of the medal sensors 31a to 31c, the characteristics of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and the like (in the present embodiment, the range is 10.08 to 99.68 milliseconds).

  If it is determined in step Sz127 that the value of the sensor check timer 2 has exceeded the maximum value of the normal passage time range, if it is determined in step Sz124 that the inserted medal sensors 31b and 31c are in the ON state, the inserted medal is determined. After setting sensor error reference data (insertion medal sensor) indicating that an abnormality has been detected based on the detection states of the sensors 31a to 31c in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 14c (Sz128), the sensor check timer 2 is started. Initialized and set to 0 (Sz129), timing of the passage time of a new medal is started. Then, the sensor monitoring process is terminated, and the process returns to the time monitoring update process of the caller.

  If it is determined in step Sz121 that the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are not in the ON state, if it is determined in step Sz126 that it is not within the medal insertion signal ignoring time based on the medal insertion signal ignoring timer, the sensor is determined in step Sz127. If it is determined that the value of the check timer 2 does not exceed the maximum value of the normal passage time range, the value of the sensor check timer 2 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz130), and the sensor monitoring process is terminated. The process returns to the time monitoring update process of the caller.

  As described above, in the sensor monitoring process, by performing the processes of steps Sz101 to Sz116, the process related to the payout sensor is performed, and an abnormality related to the payout of medals occurs based on the detection state of the payout sensors 34c and 34d. It is determined whether or not there is an abnormality regarding the insertion of medals based on the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c by performing the processing of steps Sz117 to Sz130. It has become.

  In the sensor monitoring process, by performing a process related to the payout sensor, it is determined whether or not an abnormality related to the payout of the medal has occurred. A determination is made as to whether an abnormality has occurred with respect to the insertion of the battery.

[Test signal output processing]
The test signal output process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. After performing the above-described sensor monitoring processing, the main control unit 41 subsequently performs test signal processing.

  As shown in FIG. 55, in the test signal output process, first, a main game process refers to one game time management timer set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c (Sz201). It is determined whether or not the value is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment, a value at the time of starting clocking by one game time management timer, a value corresponding to 4.1 seconds) (Sz202). If the step Sb43 of the main process is performed before the timer interrupt process (main), which is the caller of the time monitoring update process that called the test output process, is performed. The value of the timer for use is set to a predetermined value.

  If it is determined in step Sz202 that the one game time management timer is the initial value, the branching counter set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c by the timer interrupt processing (main) is referred to (Sz203). If the branch counter has a predetermined value (3 in the present embodiment), the predetermined value (the output to be output to the test apparatus) is set in the test signal output timer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In this embodiment, the value is a value corresponding to the number of data. In this embodiment, a time ((22.4 milliseconds) × the number of output data (4)) for continuing the output of the test signal capable of specifying one output data is set. To start timing (Sz204). On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sz202 that the one game time management timer is not the initial value, if it is determined in step Sz203 that the branch timer is not 3, after setting the test signal output timer in step Sz204, An initial address of an output data address for specifying a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which output data to be output as a test signal is stored is acquired (Sz205). The output data is data that can specify the winning status of the special role and the winning status of the general role in the internal lottery.

  After that, referring to the value of the test signal output timer (Sz206), it is determined whether or not the measurement of the predetermined time by the test signal output timer has ended (Sz207). If the test signal output timer is not 0 and the measurement of the predetermined time by the test signal output timer has not ended, it is determined whether or not the output data fixed mode is set (Sz208). The output data fixing mode is set when output data set by the RT information output processing performed in the step Sb2 of the main processing is output as a test signal.

  If the fixed output data mode is not set, the test signal output timer is updated by subtracting one unit time (0.56 milliseconds in the present embodiment) (Sz209), and then in step Sz206. When the value of the referenced test signal output timer is divided by a predetermined value (in this embodiment, a value corresponding to the time (22.4 milliseconds) for continuing the output of a test signal capable of specifying one output data) It is determined whether the remainder value is 0 (Sz210). If the remainder is 0, the process returns to step Sz205, and performs the processing of steps Sz205 to Sz210 based on the value of the test signal output timer updated in step Sz209. On the other hand, if the remainder value is not 0, the value of the test signal output timer referred to in step Sz206 is set to a predetermined value (in the present embodiment, the time (22. A quotient obtained by dividing by (a value corresponding to 4 milliseconds) is calculated, the value of the quotient is added to the output data address of the initial address acquired in step Sz205 (Sz211), and the process proceeds to step Sz212. Then, the output data address is further advanced by one address, and the output data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c specified based on the output data address is obtained (Sz213).

  If it is determined in step Sz208 that the output data fixed mode is set, the process proceeds to step Sz212, where the output data address of the initial address set in step Sz206 is advanced by one address (Sz212). The output data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c specified based on the output data address is obtained (Sz213).

  Thereafter, the output data acquired in the step Sz213 is set as a test signal output (Sz214), and the test signal output is set to the output port 6 and output (Sz215). If it is determined in step Sz207 that the value of the test signal output timer referred to in step Sz206 is 0, the test signal output is set to the OFF state (Sz216), and the test signal output is output to the output port 6. It is set and output (Sz215). After setting the output of the test signal in the step of Sz215, the test signal output process is terminated, and the process returns to the time monitoring update process of the caller.

  With such control, the main control unit 41 determines whether the one game time management timer has been set to the initial value and started, that is, whether the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R has been started as a game. The test signal is output from the output port 6 for a predetermined period (89.6 milliseconds (22.4 milliseconds × 4) in this embodiment).

  In addition, the main control unit 41 sequentially outputs, as a test signal, four output data that can specify the winning status of the general combination and the special combination in the internal lottery at predetermined time intervals (in the present embodiment, 22.4 milliseconds). The output is switched and output from the output port 6.

  Next, a medal passing time timer update process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. After performing the above-described test signal output processing, the main control unit 41 subsequently performs a medal passing time timer update processing.

  As shown in FIG. 56, in the medal passing time timer updating process, first, the medal sensor process included in the non-gaming program refers to the medal passing time timer set in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c, It is determined whether or not the value of the medal passing time timer is 0 (Sz301).

  If the value of the medal passing time timer is 0, that is, if the medal sensor processing does not measure the time for the medal to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the medal passing time timer updating process is terminated. Then, the process returns to the caller time monitoring update process.

  On the other hand, when the value of the medal passing time timer is not 0, that is, when the medal sensor processing is measuring the time for the medal to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, a predetermined value is added to the medal passing time timer. Then, the medal passage time timer updating process is terminated, and the process returns to the caller time monitoring updating process.

[Display monitor output data selection processing]
The display monitor output data selection processing performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. After performing the above-described medal passing time timer update processing, the main control unit 41 subsequently performs display monitor output data selection processing.

  The display monitor output data selection process is started after the port input process in the timer interrupt process (main) performed every 0.56 milliseconds by the main control unit 41, and is used in the LED dynamic display process of the timer interrupt process (main). This is a process for setting the lighting data of the LED to be used.

  As shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, in the display monitor output data selection processing, first, the address of the display monitor selection timer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set in the HL register (Sz401), and the display of the address is performed. One is added to the monitor selection timer value and updated (Sz402). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the display monitor selection timer value has reached the upper limit value (8928) (Sz403). If it is determined that the display monitor selection timer value has reached the upper limit value (8928), The display monitor selection timer value is initialized and set to 0 (Sz403). The content is updated by adding 1 to the display monitor display content vector (Sz405). The display monitor display content vector is updated in the range of 0 to 4 by correcting it to 0 when the value exceeds 4 by adding 1.

  If the display monitor display content vector is updated in step Sz405, and if it is determined in step Sz403 that the display monitor selection timer value has not reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step Sz406 to refer to the game state. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting is being confirmed (Sz407). If it is determined in step Sz407 that the setting is being confirmed, the process of steps Sz447 to Sz463 described later is performed to display a display test pattern on the 7-segment display of the gaming machine information display 50.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sz407 that the setting is not in the confirmation state, the address of the display monitor identifier output data table is set in the HL register (Sz408), and the value of the display monitor display content vector is stored in the A register and the B register. Read (Sz409). Then, based on the A register value and the HL register value, an address at which the identifier output data corresponding to the value of the display monitor display content vector is calculated (Sz410), and the identifier output data stored at the address is calculated. The data is read into the DE register (Sz411).

  After that, in the step Sz409, the value of the display monitor display content vector read into the B register is updated by adding 1 (Sz412), and is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. A digestion game number determination flag capable of specifying whether or not the number of games exceeds a prescribed number is read into the A register (Sz413). The determination value included in the digestion game number determination flag is extracted in the C register (Sz414).

  Then, based on the determination value extracted in the C register, it is determined whether or not the number of games played in the slot machine 1 exceeds a prescribed number of games (Sz415).

  If it is determined in step Sz415 that the number of games played in the slot machine 1 has not exceeded the prescribed number of games, the address of the display monitor selection timer is set in the HL register (Sz416), and the predetermined area of the ROM 41b is set. Is read into the BC register (Sz417). Then, the display monitor selection timer value of the HL register is divided by the operation constant 1 of the BC register (Sz418), and it is determined whether or not the value of the least significant bit of the quotient is 0 (Sz419). If it is determined in step Sz419 that the value of the least significant bit of the quotient is not 0, the output data for blanking (non-displaying) the display of the 7-segment display by clearing the DE register and setting it to 0 is set. The value is set in the DE register (Sz420), and the process proceeds to Sz421.

  If it is determined in step Sz415 that the number of games played in the slot machine 1 exceeds the prescribed number of games, the process proceeds to step Sz421 without performing the processing of steps Sz416 to Sz420. If it is determined in step Sz419 that the value of the least significant bit of the quotient obtained by dividing the display monitor selection timer value by the arithmetic constant 1 is 0, the processing in step Sz420 is not performed. , Sz421.

  In step Sz421, the DE register value is set in the output buffer of the gaming machine information display 50 as identifier display data (Sz421).

  After that, display data for displaying “−−” on the gaming machine information display 50 is set in the DE register (Sz422). Then, the head address of the display monitor threshold data table is set in the HL register (Sz423), the value of the display monitor display vector is read into the A register (Sz424), and the display monitor display vector is read based on the A register value and the HL register value. The address at which the threshold data corresponding to the value is stored is calculated (Sz425). Then, by referring to the validity ratio monitor display valid data which is stored in a predetermined area corresponding to the value of the display monitor display vector and can specify whether the validity ratio display is valid, the validity ratio display is valid. It is determined whether or not there is (Sz426).

  If it is determined in step Sz426 that the winning combination display is not valid, the process proceeds to Sz446, which will be described later, and the DE register value is set as the winning ratio display in the output buffer of the gaming machine information display 50 (Sz446). The monitor output data selection process is terminated, and the process returns to the time monitoring update process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sz426 that the hand combination display is valid, the data stored in the address specified by the HL register value is read into the B register as a threshold (Sz427), and the display monitor combination is determined. The head address of the output data table is set in the HL register (Sz428), and the address where the output data corresponding to the value of the display monitor display vector is stored is calculated based on the A register value and the HL register value (Sz429). Then, the output data stored at the address is read into the A register (Sz430). Thereafter, the output data of the A register is compared with the threshold value of the B register, and a value indicating the comparison result is set in the C register (Sz431).

  Thereafter, data for which the display mode is not blinking is temporarily set in the B register (Sz432), and it is determined whether or not the output data is less than the threshold value based on the C register value (Sz433). If it is determined in step Sz433 that the output data is not less than the threshold value, data indicating that the display mode is to blink is temporarily set in the B register (Sz434), and the process proceeds to step Sz435. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sz433 that the output data is smaller than the threshold value, the process proceeds to step Sz435 without performing the processing of step Sz434. In step Sz435, the quotient obtained by dividing the output data of the A register by 10 is set in the A register, and the remainder is set in the E register (Sz435).

  After the output data of the A register is divided by 10 in the step of Sz435 and the quotient and remainder are respectively set in the predetermined registers, the head address of the display data table is set in the HL register (Sz436), and the HL register value is set. The display data stored at the address of the value obtained by adding the A register value is read into the D register, and the tens place display of the winning combination display is set (Sz437).

  After that, the E register value is read into the A register (Sz438), the display data stored at the address of the value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is read into the E register, and the 1 Is set (Sz439).

  Thereafter, it is determined based on the value of the B register whether or not there is a blink setting (Sz440). If it is determined that there is a blink setting, the display monitor selection timer value is read into the HL register (Sz441). Then, a predetermined timer reference value (a value corresponding to 0.3 seconds in this embodiment) is read into the BC register (Sz442), and a quotient obtained by dividing the HL register value by the BC register value is set in the HL register. Then, the remainder is set in the DE register (Sz443). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the least significant bit of the quotient set in the HL register is 0 (Sz444). If it is determined that the least significant bit of the quotient is not 0, the display data (the value of the DE register) Is set to 0 (Sz445), and the process proceeds to Sz446.

  If it is determined in step Sz440 that there is no blinking setting based on the value of the B register, the process proceeds to step Sz446 without performing the processes in steps Sz441 to Sz445. If it is determined in step Sz444 that the least significant bit of the quotient is 0, the process proceeds to step Sz446 without performing the processing in step Sz445.

  In the step of Sz446, the DE register value is set in the output buffer of the gaming machine information display 50 as the display of the role ratio (Sz446). Thereafter, the display monitor output data selection process is terminated, and the process returns to the time monitoring update process.

  If it is determined in step Sz407 that the setting is being confirmed, the process proceeds to step Sz447, where 0 is set as display data (DE register value) (Sz447), and the DE register value is displayed as an identifier. It is set in the output buffer of the gaming machine information display 50 as the winning ratio display (Sz448, Sz449).

  Thereafter, after reading the display monitor selection timer value into the HL register (Sz450), the HL register value is corrected (Sz451), and the arithmetic constant 2 registered in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b in advance is read into the BC register (Sz452). ). Then, the quotient obtained by dividing the display monitor selection timer value of the HL register by the operation constant 2 of the BC register is set in the HL register, and the remainder is set in the BC register (Sz453). After that, the arithmetic constant 3 registered in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b is read into the BC register (Sz454), and the HL register value (the value of the quotient set in the step of Sz453) is divided by the arithmetic constant 3 of the BC register. Is set in the HL register and the remainder is set in the BC register (Sz455).

  Then, the value of the L register is read into the A register (Sz456), the address of the output buffer of the gaming machine information display 50 for displaying the winning ratio is read into the HL register (Sz457), and the A register value is added to the HL register. Correction is performed (Sz458). Then, the C register value is read into the A register (Sz459), the address of the display test pattern data of the gaming machine information display 50 is read into the DE register (Sz460), and the A register value is added to the DE register for correction (Sz461). ).

  Thereafter, the output data of the display test pattern stored at the address specified by the DE register value is read into the A register (Sz462), and the output of the gaming machine information display 50 for displaying the duty ratio specified by the HL register value is output. The A register value is stored in the buffer (Sz463). Thereafter, the display monitor output data selection process is terminated, and the process returns to the time monitoring update process.

[About counter update processing]
The counter update process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. The counter update process is a subroutine included in the game program and called in a timer interrupt process included in the game program.

  As shown in FIG. 59, in the counter update processing, first, in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the medal insertion signal ignoring timer for measuring the medal insertion signal ignoring time that does not refer to the medal insertion signal in the above-described medal insertion signal processing is set. The address is set in the HL register (Sv301). Then, by referring to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the address set in the HL register, it is determined whether or not the medal insertion signal ignoring timer value is 0, that is, whether the medal insertion signal ignoring time is being counted. (Sv302), if it is determined that the medal insertion signal ignoring timer value is not 0 and the medal insertion signal ignoring time is being counted, the medal insertion signal ignoring timer value is decremented by 1 and updated (step 302). Sv303).

  Thereafter, the address of a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the one game time management timer for measuring the minimum time of one game as described above is set in the HL register (Sv304). Then, with reference to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the address set in the HL register, it is determined whether or not the timer value for one game time management is 0, that is, whether or not the minimum time of one game is being counted. (Sv305), when it is determined that the timer for one game time management is not 0 and the minimum time of one game is being counted, the timer value for one game time management is decremented by 1 and updated. (Sv306). Thereafter, the counter updating process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  As described above, in the counter updating process, the medal insertion signal ignoring which is a counter that counts the time (medal insertion signal ignoring time, the minimum time of one game, and the like) managed by the game program (main processing, medal insertion signal processing, and the like). The timer and one game time management timer are updated. On the other hand, a medal passing time timer for measuring a time (medal sensor monitoring time, test signal output time, medal passing time, etc.) managed by a non-game program (medal sensor check processing, sensor monitoring processing, test signal output processing, etc.) The sensor check timer 1, the sensor check timer 2, and the test signal output timer are not updated in the counter update processing included in the game program, and are not updated in the above-described non-game program. , Timer update processing).

[Display mode of gaming machine information display]
As shown in FIG. 60, when the game control board 40 is attached to a predetermined position inside the housing 1a, a lower part on the front side (player side) of the game control board 40 is configured with a 7-segment display. Gaming machine information display 50 is disposed. The gaming machine information display 50 is capable of visually recognizing display contents from outside the board case 120a in a state where the game control board 40 is sealed in the board case 120a. The information such as the advantageous section ratio in the slot machine 1 displayed on the machine information display 50 can be recognized by a clerk or the like.

  Therefore, the display contents of the gaming machine information display 50 can be visually recognized through the board case 120a with the front door 1b opened. Further, inside the housing 1a, the visibility of the display content of the gaming machine information display 50 is not hindered. More specifically, all components such as reels provided in the slot machine 1 and other substrates and the like are not provided at the position on the display side of the gaming machine information display 50, and the display side of the gaming machine information display 50 is not provided. Wiring connecting the electronic components provided in the slot machine 1 does not pass through the position. Further, in a board case 120a that houses the game control board 40 on which the gaming machine information display 50 is mounted, a writing section for writing a seal or an unsealed person, management information and management history of the slot machine 1 and the game control board 40. A label on which information such as information is displayed, a sticking portion to which the label is attached, a display portion on which the information is printed and stamped, heat radiation holes, parts such as a fan for heat radiation, etc. It is provided avoiding the position on the display side.

  Further, the board case 120a is sealed after accommodating the game control board 40. In the sealed state, the board case 120a cannot be opened by releasing the seal without leaving any trace. Has become. Examples of the sealing method include a method of sealing a sealing piece with a one-way screw, a method of welding a part of a case, and a method of attaching a sealing seal having a trace of peeling. As a result, the connection line connecting the game machine information display 50 and the game control board 40 is disconnected, and the game machine information display 50 mounted on the game control board 40 enclosed in the board case 120a is correctly displayed. It is possible to prevent the contents from being displayed or to prevent sticking or the like on the display surface of the gaming machine information display 50, and to prevent illegal actions such as obstructing visibility.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the main control unit 41 calculates the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, the advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, the linked payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and the role payout ratio between the past 6000 games. In the gaming machine information display 50, the advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the linked payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number, the official goods payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number, and the instruction-inclusive role payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number are displayed on the gaming machine information display 50. The display is controlled.

  The advantageous section ratio between the past 6,000 games is the ratio of the number of games controlled to the AT-related advantageous sections during the past 6,000 games. The advantageous section related to the AT is a period from the time when the AT is won in the state where the AT is not won until the time when all the control of the AT accompanying the won AT is completed and the transition to the non-AT occurs. The advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games is determined by controlling the number of advantageous sections related to the AT with respect to the total cumulative number of games, which is the cumulative total number of games since the data in the RAM 41c is initialized at the time of factory shipment or for some reason. It is a percentage of numbers. The combination payout ratio in the past 6,000 games is the total number of medals paid out in the past 6,000 games, which is the total number of medals paid out in the BB controlled during the past 6,000 games. This is the ratio of the number of consecutive payouts that is the total. The payout ratio of the past 6,000 games is the ratio of the number of payouts, which is the total number of medals paid out during the RB controlled during the last 6,000 games, of the total number of payouts during the past 6,000 games. is there. The designated payout ratio in the past 6,000 games is the payout amount of the public goods in the past 6,000 games to the total payout number in the past 6,000 games, and the payout in the game in which the navigation notification is performed in the past 6,000 games. This is the ratio of the number of payouts with instructions including the number of medals. The combined payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number is determined at the time of factory shipment or for some reason in the total cumulative payout number, which is the total number of medals paid out after the data in the RAM 41c is initialized for some reason. This is the ratio of the number of consecutive payouts since the data in the RAM 41c was initialized to the present. The accessory payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of payouts is the ratio of the number of payables to the total cumulative number of payouts from the time when the data in the RAM 41c is initialized at the time of factory shipment or for some reason to the present. The designated payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of payouts is the ratio of the number of instructional payouts to the total cumulative number of payouts from the time when the data in the RAM 41c is initialized to the present time at the time of shipment from the factory or for some reason.

  In this embodiment, as the bonus, only the RB and the BB in which the RB operates continuously are mounted. However, winning of all types of small wins is permitted, but some reels are drawn in. The number of medals paid out during the CT may be determined by the number of medals paid out during the CT, and the number of medals paid out during the CT. When the number of payouts is reflected and the CB is mounted, the number of medals paid out during the CB is reflected in the combination payout ratio.

  The main control unit 41 controls the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, the advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, the linked payout ratio between the past 6,000 games, and the past 6,000 games in a period from when the power is turned on to when the power supply is stopped. , The paid-out ratio for the past 6,000 games, the combined payout ratio for the total cumulative payouts, the ratio of the officials payout for the total cumulative payouts, and the designated payout ratio for the total cumulative payouts Are switched every predetermined period (in this embodiment, 30 seconds) in the display order shown in FIG. 61 and displayed on the gaming machine information display 50.

  At this time, the gaming machine information display 50 displays an abbreviation indicating the display content currently being displayed in the upper two digits (for example, when the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games in the display order 1 is displayed, “ 1A ”) is displayed. In the abbreviation indicating the display content currently being displayed, the display content of the least significant digit of the two displayed digits is a character other than a number (in this embodiment, an alphabetic character of “A”, “C”, “F”). When the abbreviation, the ratio, and the ratio are displayed on the gaming machine information display device 50, the numeral portion of the abbreviation does not become adjacent to the ratio, the ratio. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the abbreviated numeral part from being adjacent to the ratio and the ratio, and the displayed contents of the ratio and the ratio from being erroneously recognized.

  At this time, the gaming machine information display 50 displays the ratio to be currently displayed and the ratio (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as data to be displayed) corresponding to the above-mentioned abbreviation in the last two digits. The data is also displayed in%. As data displayed in the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50, 0 to 99% is displayed. In this embodiment, the display is performed using both the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50. The data to be displayed is displayed. For example, when the data to be displayed is one digit, "0" is displayed in the upper digit of the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50, while , The value of the data to be displayed in the lower digit is displayed (for example, when 5% is displayed, "05" is displayed in the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50). If the data to be displayed is two digits, the data to be displayed is displayed in the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 (for example, if 15% is displayed, the gaming machine information display 50 is displayed). "15" is displayed in the last two digits). Thus, regardless of whether the data to be displayed on the gaming machine information display 50 is one digit or two digits, the data to be displayed using both the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 is displayed. By displaying, it is possible to prevent the ratio and the display content of the ratio from being erroneously recognized. Regardless of whether the number is one digit or two digits, by displaying the data to be displayed using both the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50, the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 are always displayed. One of the data is displayed in the digits. For example, when data is not displayed in one of the lower two-digit displays, it is possible to recognize the abnormality of the display.

  The abbreviation indicating the display content currently being displayed is changed so that the display content of the highest digit of the two displayed digits is a character other than a number (for example, “A1”), and the gaming machine information display device is displayed. In the configuration in which the abbreviation is displayed in the lower two digits of the 50 and the data to be currently displayed (for example, the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games) is displayed in the upper two digits of the gaming machine information display 50, the abbreviation number is used. It is possible to prevent the display contents of the ratio and the ratio from being erroneously recognized when the portion is adjacent to the ratio and the ratio.

  Regardless of whether the abbreviation and the data to be currently displayed are displayed in the lower two digits or the upper two digits in the gaming machine information display 50, the two digits for displaying the abbreviation and the data to be currently displayed are displayed. Even when the two-digit color is different, it is possible to prevent the abbreviated numeral portion from being adjacent to the ratio and the ratio, and the displayed contents of the ratio and the ratio from being erroneously recognized.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines the advantageous section ratio, the linked payout ratio, the role payout ratio, the designated role payout ratio, the linked role payout ratio, the role payout ratio, and the instructed role payout ratio. When the display is switched and displayed at predetermined intervals in the display order shown in FIG. 61, the game is advanced and these values are updated to new values within one period until the display completes one cycle. Even if it is possible, the display is cycled using the original value while limiting the update to a new value. More specifically, if the game is advanced and these values can be updated to new values within one period until these displays are completed, a new value is calculated and a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is calculated. However, by setting the original value without setting the new value in the output buffer for displaying the display content on the gaming machine information display 50, the display on the gaming machine information display 50 is displayed. One round is performed using the original value, and when the display of one round is completed, a new value may be set in the output buffer, and thereafter, the display may be performed with the new value. If these values can be updated to new values within one period until one cycle is completed, the calculation for obtaining the new values is restricted, and the display on the gaming machine information display 50 is restricted. Make one round, one When the display of completed, performs a computation for obtaining a new value, then, it may be performed display in the gaming machine information display 50 by using the new values. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the display contents such as the advantageous section ratios calculated at different times from being mixed in the period until the display contents on the gaming machine information display 50 make one cycle.

  Further, when the ratio of the advantageous section between the past 6000 games and the ratio of the advantageous section to the total cumulative number of games exceed the specified ratio (for example, 70%), the main control unit 41 displays a display mode different from the normal display mode (for example, the normal display mode). If it is always on, blinking lighting etc.) will display the advantageous section ratio. In addition, when the linked payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the combined payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number exceed a specified ratio (for example, 60%), the main control unit 41 displays a display mode different from normal (for example, If the normal lighting is always on, the linked payout ratio is displayed by blinking lighting etc.). The main control unit 41 determines that the display mode is different from the normal display mode (e.g., 70%) when the bonus delivery ratio between the past 6000 games and the bonus delivery ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of payments exceed a specified ratio (for example, 70%). If the normal lighting is always on, blinking lighting etc.) is used to display the accessory payout ratio. In addition, the main control unit 41 displays differently from the normal display when the designated bonus payout ratio for the past 6,000 games and the designated bonus payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of payouts exceed a prescribed ratio (for example, 80%). The instruction-incorporated accessory payout ratio is displayed in a mode (for example, blinking if normal lighting is always on).

  As described above, when the advantageous section ratio, the consecutive payout ratio, the official payout ratio, and the instruction with payout ratio exceed the prescribed ratio, the display is performed in a display mode different from the normal display mode, and the gambling is high. It can warn you that the state may be controlled.

  Further, the main control unit 41 determines the advantageous section ratio between the past 6,000 games, the linked payout ratio between the past 6,000 games, the duty payout ratio between the past 6,000 games, and the instruction-added duty payout ratio between the past 6,000 games. When displaying on the machine information display 50, when the number of past games has not reached 6000 games, for example, the upper two digits of the game machine information display 50 are blinked and the normal By controlling to a different display mode, it is possible to recognize that the tally has not reached 6000 games, and it is possible to recognize the possibility that the displayed ratio and the ratio are biased. I have.

  Further, when displaying the advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games on the gaming machine information display 50, the main control unit 41 determines that the number of past games is such that the advantageous section ratio substantially converges to the design value of the slot machine. When the state has not reached (for example, 175000 games), the advantageous section ratio is controlled by controlling the display mode different from normal, for example, by blinking the display of the upper two digits of the gaming machine information display 50. Has been able to recognize that the specified number of games has not generally reached the design value of the slot machine, and it has become possible to recognize the possibility that the displayed ratio and ratio are biased. I have.

  Further, when displaying the linked payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number on the gaming machine information display 50, the main control unit 41 determines that the past game count is such that the linked payout ratio substantially converges to the design value of the slot machine. When the number of games (for example, 17500 games) has not been reached, by controlling the display mode different from normal, for example, by blinking the display of the upper two digits of the gaming machine information display device 50, It is now possible to recognize that the role payout ratio has not reached the prescribed number of games that generally converges to the design value of the slot machine, so that it is possible to recognize the possibility that the displayed ratio and ratio are biased It has become.

  In addition, when the main controller 41 causes the gaming machine information display device 50 to display the accessory payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number, the rule that the past game number converges substantially to the design value of the slot machine is obtained. When the number of games (e.g., 6000 games) has not been reached, for example, the upper two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 are blinked, and the display is controlled in a display mode different from the normal mode. It is now possible to recognize that the payout ratio has not reached the specified number of games that generally converges to the design value of the slot machine, and it is possible to recognize the possibility that the displayed ratio and ratio are biased It has become.

  The main control unit 41 determines that the number of past games is substantially equal to the design value of the slot machine when the designated number of past games is displayed on the gaming machine information display 50 with respect to the total cumulative number of paid out games. When the number of games has not reached the prescribed number of games (for example, 175000 games), the display is controlled to a display mode different from normal, for example, by blinking the upper two digits of the gaming machine information display 50. As a result, it is possible to recognize that the instruction-added bonus payout ratio has not reached the specified number of games that generally converges to the design value of the slot machine, and the displayed ratio and ratio are biased. The possibilities are now recognizable.

  Note that the main control unit 41 displays “00” in the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 when the game has not reached the 6000 game, and displays the gaming machine information display after the game has reached the 6000 game. In the state in which the ratio to be displayed in the lower two digits of the device 50 and the ratio are displayed, that is, in the state after the 6000 game is reached, the display mode of the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 is changed to the display mode after the 6000 game. Is preferably configured to have a different display mode. With such a configuration, the upper two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 (for example, “1A”) are displayed when the game does not reach the 6000 game. ), It is possible to recognize that the total of the advantageous section ratios and the like specified in) has not reached 6000 games, and it is possible to recognize the possibility that the displayed ratios and ratios are biased. When the game does not reach the 6000 game, the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 display “00”. When the game does not reach the 6000 game, the game machine information display is always performed. The data is displayed in the lower two digits of the display 50. For example, when the data is not displayed in one of the lower two digits of the display, the abnormality of the display can be recognized.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 determines an advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, an advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, a linked payout ratio between the past 6000 games, a property payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and a past 6,000 games between the past 6,000 games. Whether the data used to calculate the designated in-guest payout ratio, the combined payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number, the official payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout amount, and the instructed duty withdrawal ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number is normal. If the number is determined to be abnormal (the number of paid-out articles, the number of consecutively-paid-out sheets, or the number of advantageous section payouts is larger than the total number of paid-out sheets), the stored value is set in a certain data format (such as 01 repetition). In some cases, for example, the data determined to be abnormal and the data related to the data are initialized, and the gaming machine information display 50 displays that an abnormality has been detected (for example, “FFFF”). By a, it is adapted to notify that effect the calculation of these data is made to recognize that it is not normally performed.

  When the data determined to be abnormal and the data related to the data are initialized, for example, the advantageous section ratio for the past 6,000 games, the consecutive payout ratio, the role payout ratio, the designated role payout ratio If it is determined that at least one of them is abnormal, data on all of them may be initialized, or only some of the data may be initialized. If it is determined that at least one of the advantageous section ratio, the consecutive payout ratio, the official payout ratio, and the designated official payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games is abnormal, data relating to all of them is initialized. May be performed, or only some data may be initialized. Further, when an abnormality is determined in a part of the data for the past 6,000 games, all the data for the past 6,000 games and for the total cumulative number of games are initialized. When an abnormality is determined, all the data for the past 6,000 games and for the total cumulative number of games may be initialized.

  Also, it is determined whether or not the data used to calculate the advantageous section ratio, the consecutive payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the instructed bonus payout ratio with respect to the past 6,000 games and the total number of games is normal, and determines whether the data is abnormal. If it is determined, the user is notified of the fact, and then a predetermined operation (for example, switches such as the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and the setting key switch 37 are operated in a predetermined procedure). ), The data may be initialized.

  Further, in the notification that the abnormality has been determined, as described above, the gaming machine information display 50 may display (for example, “FFFF”) that the abnormality has been detected, and may notify that fact. If it is determined that the abnormality is determined, a command capable of specifying the abnormality is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and the sub-control unit 91 is notified by the liquid crystal display 51 or the like that the abnormality is determined. You may do it.

  Further, the main control unit 41 performs a period from the start of the data collection to the time when the game reaches 6000 games, that is, the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, the advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, and the continuous section between the past 6000 games. Role payout ratio, duty payout ratio between past 6000 games, designated duty payout ratio between past 6000 games, linked payout ratio to total cumulative payouts, duty payout ratio to total cumulative payouts, total cumulative payouts The display content of the gaming machine information display 50 is different from the display mode after 6000 games since the start of the data collection in the period in which the data for calculating the instruction-incorporated accessory payout ratio or the like is insufficient. , So that it is possible to recognize that the data for calculating the display content is in an insufficient period.

  In the present embodiment, in the period from power-on until power supply is stopped, the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, the advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, the linked payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the past 6000 games The ratio of payouts of official goods between games, the ratio of payouts of instructed characters for the past 6,000 games, the ratio of payouts of combined roles to the total number of payouts, the ratio of payouts of public goods to the total number of payouts, and the payout of instructed materials to the total number of payouts The ratio is switched and displayed every predetermined period, but may be displayed only when the open state of the front door 1b is detected, or may be displayed by a predetermined operation switch (for example, a reset / setting switch 38). ) Is displayed only when an operation is detected, when a game is not being played, or when a setting is being changed or a setting is being confirmed. Or to so that may be or to appear after the power is turned on only for a predetermined period. Further, instead of automatically switching every predetermined period, the display content may be switched every time a predetermined operation is performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the data abnormality used for calculating the display content of the gaming machine information display 50 has been determined, or that the period for which the data for calculating the display content is insufficient is a period of insufficient gaming machine information. Although the configuration is notified using the display 50, a command that can specify the fact is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and the command can be confirmed on the display or the effect device controlled by the sub-control unit 91. good.

  Further, in this embodiment, the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, the advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, the linked payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the property payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and the The gaming machine information display 50 displays the instruction-added bonus article payout ratio, the linked-offer payout percentage with respect to the total cumulative payout number, the government-office payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number, and the instruction-added bonus payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number. The configuration is such that when the RAM 41c is initialized by a setting change in addition to these displays, and when a disconnection of a wiring (a backup power supply wiring or the like) provided in the slot machine 1 is detected, this fact is indicated. Recognizable contents may be displayed on the gaming machine information display 50.

  In particular, the game is stipulated while the bonus is being carried over if the setting is changed during the bonus, the advantageous section or the carryover of the bonus and the bonus or the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, or the bonus being carried over is cleared. More than a certain number of times, or an operation of intentionally ending the advantageous section is performed (for example, in RT2 and RT3 during AT, RT1 shift replay or SB is awarded, or a specific symbol is stopped) When an operation of shifting to RT1 is performed, that is, when a transition from a gaming state relatively advantageous to the player to a disadvantageous gaming state is intentionally detected, and the gaming machine information display 50 is disconnected. When the possibility that the connection is not normally established is detected due to the occurrence of the above, the fact is notified so as to be specified. By doing so, it is recognized that there is a possibility that the information may have been incorrectly operated so that correct information is not displayed as the advantageous section ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the linked payout ratio, the instruction-added payout ratio, or the like. Can be.

  Also, in the process of avoiding the overflow of the total cumulative data as described later, when the total cumulative data is initialized, it is possible to specify that, and as described above, the advantageous section ratio, the accessory payout ratio, It is preferable to notify in a manner different from the case where there is a possibility that the information has been incorrectly operated so that correct information is not displayed as the linked payout ratio, the instruction-added payout ratio, and the like. The initialization of the total accumulated data by the process of avoiding the above can be recognized separately from the initialization by an illegal operation for preventing correct information from being displayed as the advantageous section ratio or the like.

  As described above, if there is a possibility that the information is incorrectly operated so that correct information is not displayed as the advantageous section ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the linked payout ratio, the instruction-added payout ratio, etc. Is detected and the history of the detection is recorded on the side of the main control unit 41, and is not notified at the time of the detection, and thereafter, a predetermined operation (for example, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the setting key Are operated in a predetermined procedure, and a predetermined external device such as an inspection terminal is connected to the game control board 40, etc.). It can be confirmed by a provided display (for example, a gaming machine information display 50 or the like), a display (for example, a liquid crystal display 51 or the like) provided on the sub-control unit 91 side, or a display external to the slot machine 1. It may be so that.

  In addition, a setting change, disconnection detection, a connection failure of the gaming machine information display 50 has occurred, and an advantageous section ratio, a role payout ratio, a linked role payout ratio, an instruction-including position payout ratio, etc. There is a possibility that correct information may not be displayed as described above, and as described above, an illegal operation was performed so that correct information was not displayed as the advantageous section ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the linked payout ratio, the instruction-added payout ratio, etc. The possibility of the possibility may be confirmed by a display or an effect device controlled by the sub-control unit 91. In addition, during the bonus, during the advantageous section or during the carryover of the bonus, the setting is changed and the bonus or the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, the bonus being carried over is cleared, the advantageous section ratio, the property payout ratio, The sub-control unit 91 records a history that it is detected that there is a possibility that the information has been incorrectly operated so that the correct information is not displayed as the linked-offer payout ratio, the instruction-added payout ratio, and the like. May be used to confirm these histories.

[About display test pattern of gaming machine information display]
In the display monitor output data selection processing, by performing each processing of Sz447 to Sz463, the display based on the display test pattern is sequentially performed on the gaming machine information display 50, and as shown in FIG. The segments from the first segment to the eighth segment of the 7-segment display 50a constituting the gaming machine information display 50 are arranged in a predetermined order (in the present embodiment, the first segment → the second segment → the third segment → the fourth segment). (5th segment → 6th segment → 7th segment → 8th segment → 1st segment ...). By controlling each segment to be sequentially turned on, it is possible to visually check whether or not the gaming machine information display 50 is out of order, for example, whether or not there is a segment that is not turned on.

[Notification of section display LED lighting]
The notification during the lighting of the section display LED performed by the sub control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64.

  As described above, after controlling to the advantageous section, the main control unit 41 controls the section display LED 19 to be turned on when starting the control of the AT, and performs the section display indicating that the control is performed to the advantageous section. It is possible. Then, the main control unit 41 performs the section display when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the section display is being performed and the power supply is restarted in a normal procedure. It returns to the state where it is.

  Further, after controlling the AT to the advantageous section, the main control unit 41, when starting the section display with the start of the AT control, sends a command capable of specifying that the section display is to be performed to the sub-control unit 91. To send. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted and the power supply is returned to the state before the power supply was stopped, when the section display is restarted, a command capable of specifying that the section display is to be performed is issued by the sub-control unit 91. Send to

  On the other hand, when detecting that the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, the sub control unit 91 sets the time specified based on the RTC (real time clock) provided in the sub control unit 91 to the sub control unit 91. The data is stored in the storage means provided in the memory 91. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted and it is specified that the section display is to be performed on the main control unit 41 side based on the command from the main control unit 41, the RTC is referred to. The current time is specified, the current time is compared with the time stored in the storage means when the power supply is stopped, and the time is supplied to the slot machine 1 over the specific time (4 am in this embodiment). It is determined whether the power supply has been restarted. If it is determined that the power supply to the slot machine 1 has been restarted over a specific time (4 am in the present embodiment), the main controller 41 indicates that the section display is being performed. Is performed using the liquid crystal display 51 and the effect LED 57.

  As illustrated in FIG. 63, in the section display LED lighting-in-progress, a notification image (indicating that the section display LED 19 is in a lighting state) that indicates that the section display LED 19 is controlled to be in a lighting state by the main control unit 41. An image A of a character (“section indicator LED is lit”), an image B indicating the position of the section indicator LED 19 in the slot machine 1, and an image C of a predetermined character are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the front of the slot machine 1 is displayed. By controlling the staging LEDs 57L and 57R installed on the player side of the door 1b to be lit in a lighting mode different from that during a normal game, the fact that the lighting state is controlled is notified.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (a), the main control unit 41 controls the game section to be an advantageous section, starts section display when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and controls the section display LED 19 to be turned on. Then, the fact that the control is performed in the advantageous section is notified. At this time, the sub-control unit 91 does not perform the notification during the section display LED lighting. In this state, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, and thereafter, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted in a normal procedure in which the section display LED extinguishing operation described later is not performed, the main control unit 41 Controls the section display LED 19 to be turned on. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 controls so as to perform the notification during the section display LED lighting. Then, after the start of the section display LED on-state notification, the predetermined specific period elapses, or the game start operation is performed before the specific period elapses. Control to end.

  As shown in FIG. 64B, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the main control unit 41 is performing the section display, and thereafter, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted. Then, when the section display LED extinguishing operation is performed, the main control unit 41 initializes the information regarding the advantageous section and returns to a state where the game can be played. As a result, the operation is returned without performing the section display and without controlling the section display LED 19 to the lighting state. At this time, since the main control unit 41 does not perform the section display, the main control unit 41 does not transmit a command that can specify that the section display is performed to the sub control unit 91. On the other hand, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, the sub-control unit 91 does not receive a command that can specify that the section display is to be performed from the main control unit 41, so that the section display LED is turned on. Control is performed so as to restart the control of the effect without performing the middle notification.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 64 (c), even when the game section is controlled to be an advantageous section, the section display is not performed when the predetermined start condition is not satisfied, as shown in FIG. In this state, even when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and thereafter the power supply is restarted, the section display is not performed until a predetermined start condition is satisfied. At this time, since the main control unit 41 does not perform the section display, the main control unit 41 does not transmit a command that can specify that the section display is performed to the sub control unit 91. On the other hand, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, the sub-control unit 91 does not receive a command that can specify that the section display is to be performed from the main control unit 41, so that the section display LED is turned on. Control is performed so as to restart the control of the effect without performing the middle notification.

  Note that the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which an RTC (real-time clock) is provided and a time can be specified, but the sub-control unit 91 may be configured without an RTC. In the configuration in which the sub-control unit 91 does not include the RTC, if it is specified that the main control unit 41 performs the section display when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, the section display is always performed. A configuration may be adopted in which notification is made during LED lighting.

  As described above, the sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment performs the notification during the lighting of the section display LED for a certain period after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, and turns on the section display LED after the certain time has elapsed. The middle notification is terminated. In this way, when the power supply is started and the section display is returned to the state where the section display is being performed, a notification indicating that the section display LED is lit is performed. Thus, the user can recognize that the section is being displayed. On the other hand, since the notification while the section display LED is lit is ended in a fixed time, the notification while the section display LED is lit is continued after the game store is opened, which may give a sense of incongruity to a player or the like. Can be prevented.

  After the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the section display is being performed on the main control unit 41 side, the sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment sets a specific time outside the business hours of the game store (this embodiment In the example, when power supply is started over 4:00 am and the state returns to the state in which the section display is being performed, the section display LED is lit to indicate that the state has been returned to the state in which the section display is being performed. While the notification is performed by using the liquid crystal display 51, when the power supply is started without returning to a specific time and the state is returned to the state in which the section display is performed, the notification during the section display LED lighting is not performed. Has become. Thus, even if a power interruption occurs temporarily during business hours, it is possible to prevent a player or the like from feeling uncomfortable.

  The sub-control unit 91 according to the present embodiment terminates the notification during the lighting of the section display LED without waiting for a certain period of time when the game is started while the notification during the lighting of the section display LED is being performed. I have. Thus, after the start of the section display LED on-state notification, the section start LED on-state notification can be ended by starting the game even when a certain time has not elapsed.

  In the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment, after the power supply is stopped in a section before the start of the AT where the section display is not performed on the main control unit 41 side, the power supply is started and the section display is not performed. When returning to the state, the notification during the lighting of the section display LED is not performed. Thus, only when the section is controlled to the advantageous section and the state returns to the state where the section display is being performed, it is possible to make the clerk of the amusement store recognize that the store is opened with the section display being performed. it can.

[Function and Effect 1]
As a conventional gaming machine, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of a game is stored and a non-game program area in which a non-game program irrespective of the progress of the game are stored are separately allocated to a ROM. There is a configuration. In such a configuration, in the game program, every time the process included in the non-game program is executed, if the non-game program is called from the game program, the game program and the non-game program will come and go many times. However, there is a problem that the processing becomes complicated.

  On the other hand, the slot machine 1, which is the gaming machine of the present embodiment, includes a ROM 41b having a storage area in which a program is stored, and a main control unit 41 that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. The storage area of the ROM 41b includes a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored and a non-game program area in which a program called by the game program and a non-game program not related to the progress of the game are stored. In a non-game program, a single call from a timer interrupt process, which is a game program, to a time monitoring update process, which is a non-game program, determines a plurality of types of abnormalities in the non-game program. (Determination of abnormality). In such a configuration, the non-game game area of the ROM 41b in which the game program related to the progress of the game is stored and the non-game game stored in the ROM 41b in which the non-game program which is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game is stored In a configuration in which the program area and the non-game program are separately allocated, a plurality of types of abnormality determination are performed in the non-game program by calling the non-game program once from the game program. It can be reduced as much as possible.

  In this embodiment, in the time monitoring update process included in the non-game program called from the timer interrupt process included in the game program, two types of abnormalities are determined, that is, the abnormality determination regarding the payout of medals and the abnormality determination regarding the insertion of medals. However, in a non-game program called by a single call from the game program, a structure in which three or more types of abnormalities are determined may be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, the non-game program is called from the game program. Although the configuration is called, a process included in a game program other than the timer interrupt process may be applied as a game program that calls a non-game program for determining a plurality of types of abnormalities.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the time monitoring update process included in the non-game program called from the timer interrupt process included in the game program, the sensor monitoring process, which is a subroutine, is performed to determine the abnormality regarding the medal payout. And a configuration in which a plurality of types of abnormalities are determined by one subroutine, that is, a non-game program called by a game program is configured by a plurality of subroutines, and one type is provided for each subroutine. For example, in a time monitoring updating process, a first subroutine for determining an abnormality related to payout of medals and a second subroutine for determining an abnormality related to insertion of medals are performed in a time monitoring update process. May be configured to determine the abnormality of. In such a configuration, a plurality of types of abnormality determination processes are set as subroutines for each type of abnormality determination, thereby facilitating program management.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment has a ROM 41b having a game program area in which a game program is stored and a non-game program area in which a non-game program is stored, and a main control for performing control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. When the timer monitoring process, which is a non-game program, is called from the timer interrupt process, which is a game program, the register and the stack pointer SP used in the game program are evacuated. When the game program is returned to the game program, the saved register and the stack pointer SP are restored. With such a configuration, when the non-game program is called from the game program, it is possible to prevent the data of the register and the stack pointer SP used in the game program from being damaged.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a ROM 41b having a game program area in which a game program is stored and a non-game program area in which a non-game program is stored, and a main control for performing control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. A RAM 41c having a storage area capable of temporarily storing data. The RAM 41c is used by a game RAM area in which game data used by the game program is stored in a readable and writable manner, and by a non-game program. A non-game RAM area in which non-game data is stored in a readable manner, and from a timer interrupt process included in the game program, a time monitor update process included in the non-game program is called once to update the time monitor update. Payout of medals as multiple types of abnormality judgment in processing When a determination of an abnormality relating to insertion of medals and a determination of an abnormality relating to insertion of medals are performed, sensor error reference data capable of specifying the result of the abnormality determination is stored in the non-game RAM area, and the process returns from the time monitoring update process to the timer interrupt process. In the timer interrupt process as the game program, the sensor error reference data stored in the non-game RAM storage area is referred to without performing other processes. In such a configuration, the result of the abnormality determination by the non-game program is referred to before performing other processing, so that the result of the abnormality determination can be promptly reflected in the processing performed by the game program. In addition, after returning to the game program from the non-game program for performing the abnormality determination, the sensor error reference data is referred to before performing other processing. Can be performed.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment has a ROM 41b having a game program area in which a game program is stored and a non-game program area in which a non-game program is stored, and a main control for performing control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. The time monitoring update process included in the non-game program is called once from the timer interrupt process included in the game program, and the payout of medals is determined as a plurality of types of abnormality determination in the time monitor update process. In the time monitoring update process, even if an abnormality is determined based on the medal payout and the abnormality is determined, the abnormality determination regarding the medal payout is performed. Later, the determination of abnormalities related to the insertion of medals is performed continuously. That. With such a configuration, in the time monitoring update process that is a non-game program called from the timer interrupt process that is the game program, regardless of whether the abnormality is determined by performing the abnormality determination regarding the payout of medals, It is also possible to determine an abnormality related to insertion of a medal, which is an abnormality of the type.

  In this embodiment, in the time monitoring update process included in the non-game program called from the timer interrupt process included in the game program, two types of abnormalities are determined: an abnormality determination regarding the payout of medals and an abnormality determination regarding the insertion of medals. In a non-game program called by a single call from the game program, a configuration in which two or more types of abnormalities are determined may be used. In such a configuration, the non-game program Even if one type of abnormality is determined among a plurality of types of abnormality determination performed in the above, the other type of abnormality determination is continuously performed, so that whether any type of abnormality is determined Regardless, abnormality determination can be performed for other types of abnormality.

  The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment calls the time monitoring update process included in the non-game program once from the timer interrupt process included in the game program, so that a plurality of types of abnormality determination can be performed in the time monitoring update process. This is a configuration for determining an abnormality related to payout of medals as a medium and determining an abnormality related to insertion of medals. In such a configuration, the abnormality determination regarding the payout of medals as game media and the abnormality determination regarding the insertion of medals can be performed by calling one non-game program.

  The slot machine 1, which is the gaming machine of the present embodiment, includes a ROM 41b having a storage area in which a program is stored, and a main control unit 41 that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. The area includes a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, and a non-game program area in which a non-game program that is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game is stored. The non-game program (time monitoring update processing) is called once from the game program (timer interrupt processing) to determine an abnormality in the non-game program (determination of an abnormality related to payout of medals in sensor monitoring processing, and determination of an abnormality related to medal insertion). Judgment), test equipment connected to slot machine 1 Output control of a test signal to be output (test signal output processing), display control to display a winning combination which is a state based on a game history on a predetermined display (credit display 11, game assistance display 12) (play ratio monitor) This is a configuration for performing a plurality of controls including a display data selection process. In such a configuration, the non-game game area of the ROM 41b in which the game program related to the progress of the game is stored and the non-game game stored in the ROM 41b in which the non-game program which is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game is stored In a configuration in which the program area and the program area are separately allocated, a non-game program is called once from the game program to determine an abnormality in the non-game program, output control of a test signal, and a duty ratio that is a state based on the history of the game. Since a plurality of controls including a display control to be displayed on the predetermined display are performed, traffic between the game program and the non-game program can be reduced as much as possible.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 calls the non-game program (time monitoring update process) once from the game program (timer interrupt process) to execute an abnormality determination ( In the sensor monitoring process, determination of an abnormality related to payout of medals, determination of an abnormality related to insertion of medals), output control of a test signal output to a test device (test signal output process), and a duty ratio based on a game history. It is configured to perform display control (combination ratio monitor display data selection processing) to be displayed on a predetermined display and control to update a timer (medal passing time timer update processing). The above-described control may be performed. For example, by calling one non-game program from the game program, for example, abnormality determination and A configuration for controlling the output of the test signal, a configuration for performing display control for displaying the abnormality determination and the role ratio on the predetermined display, a configuration for performing the output control of the test signal and the display control for displaying the role ratio on the predetermined display, and the abnormality determination And a configuration for performing control for updating the timer. Even with these configurations, traffic between the game program and the non-game program can be reduced as much as possible.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 calls the non-game program (time monitoring update process) once from the game program (timer interrupt process), and determines an abnormality in the non-game program and outputs it to the test device. It is configured to perform a plurality of controls including output control of a test signal and display control for displaying a winning combination which is a state based on a history of a game on a predetermined display. In the abnormality determination, two types of abnormality determination (medal payout The above-mentioned configuration may be configured to perform one type of abnormality determination or three or more types of multiple abnormality determinations. . Even with such a configuration, traffic between the game program and the non-game program can be reduced as much as possible.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment has a ROM 41b having a game program area in which a game program is stored and a non-game program area in which a non-game program is stored, and a main control for performing control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. Unit 41, and a single call from the timer interrupt process included in the game program to the time monitor update process included in the non-game program causes the time monitor update process to perform an abnormality determination (for an abnormality related to medal payout). And a test signal output process for controlling output of a test signal output to the test apparatus. In the above, the sensor monitoring process and the test signal output process are each a subroutine. It is called configurations. In such a configuration, the process of performing the abnormality determination and the process of performing the output control of the external output signal output to the external device are set as subroutines, respectively, thereby facilitating the management of the program.

  The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment determines an abnormality in the non-game program by a single call from a timer interrupt process as a game program to a time monitoring update process as a non-game program (for example, determination of an abnormality related to payout of medals, This is a configuration for performing sensor monitoring processing, which is processing for determining an abnormality related to the input of a game, and test signal output processing, which is processing for controlling the output of a test signal. In this configuration, the output state of the test signal is set using an output port (in this embodiment, output port 6) in which ON data and OFF data are not set, that is, an output port that is not used in the processing of the game program. . With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the signal whose output state is controlled by the processing of the game program from being unintentionally controlled to the output state by the test signal output processing in the non-game program.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment has a ROM 41b having a game program area in which a game program is stored and a non-game program area in which a non-game program is stored, and a main control for performing control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. Unit 41, and a single call from the timer interrupt process included in the game program to the time monitor update process included in the non-game program causes the time monitor update process to perform an abnormality determination (for an abnormality related to medal payout). Display control for displaying on a predetermined display (credit display 11, game auxiliary display 12) a sensor monitoring process which is a process of performing a determination and an abnormality regarding insertion of a medal) and a status based on a game history. And a time monitor updating process. Oite, sensor monitoring process and the display monitor data selection processing is configured to be respectively called as a subroutine. In such a configuration, the process of performing the abnormality determination and the process of performing the display control of the duty ratio are each set as a subroutine, so that the management of the program is facilitated.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a ROM 41b having a game program area in which a game program is stored and a non-game program area in which a non-game program is stored, and a main control for performing control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. A testing device connected to the slot machine 1 in the time monitoring and updating process by a single call of the time monitoring and updating process included in the non-game program from the timer interrupt processing included in the game program. Display processing for controlling the output of the test signal to be output to the predetermined display (credit display 11, game auxiliary display 12), and the display ratio of the state based on the history of the game and the test signal output processing which is the processing for controlling the output of the test signal output to In the time monitoring update process, the display monitor data selection process is performed. Test signal output processing and display monitor for data selection processing is configured to be called as a subroutine respectively. In such a configuration, the process of controlling the output of the test signal and the process of controlling the display of the winning ratio are set as subroutines, respectively, so that the management of the program is facilitated.

  In a conventional gaming machine, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of a game is stored and a non-game program area in which a non-game program irrespective of the progress of the game are stored are separately allocated to a ROM. There is a configuration. In such a configuration, the storage area for the game data used in the game program and the storage area for the non-game data used in the non-game program are also assigned to separate areas, but the non-game data is referred to in the game program. If the game program refers to the data in the non-game data area each time the processing is performed, it is necessary to access both the game data area and the non-game data area from the game program many times, which makes the processing complicated. The problem arises.

  On the other hand, the slot machine 1, which is the gaming machine of the present embodiment, includes a ROM 41b having a storage area capable of storing a program, a main control unit 41 for performing control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b, And a RAM 41c having a storage area capable of temporarily storing a game program. The storage area of the ROM 41b is a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, and a program called by the game program. A non-game program area in which a non-game program irrespective of the progress is stored. The storage area of the RAM 41c includes a game RAM area in which game data used by the game program is stored in a readable and writable manner, Non-game RAM in which non-game data to be used is readably stored In the sensor monitoring process of the time monitoring update process that is a non-game program, a determination of an abnormality related to payout of medals and a determination of an abnormality related to insertion of medals are performed as an abnormality determination. Based on the sensor error reference data stored in the non-game RAM area as the first abnormal data, the timer interrupt processing (main), which is a game program that calls the time monitoring update processing, performs the processing from the time monitoring update processing to the game program. , The sensor error flag is updated as the second abnormal data stored in the game RAM area based on the first abnormal data with reference to the first abnormal data stored in the non-game RAM area. In the main process, which is a game program that can be executed thereafter, the game program is stored in the game RAM area. With reference to the second abnormal data has a structure for determining whether or not to shift to an error state to disable the progress of the game.

  In such a configuration, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, a non-game program area in which a non-game program which is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game is stored, Are separately allocated, and a game RAM area in which game data used by the game program is stored so as to be readable and writable, and a non-game RAM area in which non-game data used by the non-game program are stored readable. In the game program, when returning from the non-game program to the game program, the game program refers to the first abnormal data stored in the non-game data area, and performs the game based on the first abnormal data. The second abnormal data stored in the data area is updated, and the game The gram refers to the second abnormal data stored in the game data area to determine whether or not to shift to an error state that disables the progress of the game. By referring to the data and updating the second abnormal data in the game data area, in the game program such as the main processing performed thereafter, the first abnormal data in the non-game data area is repeatedly executed each time the processing related to the abnormality determination is performed. Since it is possible to refer to the result of the abnormality determination by the non-game program without accessing the abnormal data, the frequency of referring to the non-game data area from the game program can be reduced as much as possible.

  When the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment returns from the time monitoring update process as the non-game program to the timer interrupt process as the game program, it refers to a medal-related error as the first abnormal data stored in the non-game RAM area. With reference to the data, the sensor error flag can be updated as the second abnormal data stored in the game RAM area based on the first abnormal data, and when returning from the non-gaming program to the gaming program, With reference to the first abnormal data stored in the non-game RAM area, the logical sum of the first abnormal data and the sensor error flag stored in the game RAM area is calculated, and the sensor is operated in accordance with the calculation result. When the occurrence of an abnormality is identified from the first abnormal data by updating the error flag, the second abnormal data is updated and the second abnormal data is updated. If the occurrence of abnormal from the abnormal data not identified is configured not to update the second abnormal data. With such a configuration, the second abnormal data is updated when the occurrence of the abnormality is identified from the first abnormal data, and the second abnormal data is not updated when the occurrence of the abnormality is not identified from the first abnormal data. Therefore, even if the abnormality is eliminated and the first abnormality data is updated in the non-game program after the abnormality occurs, the abnormality is not generated from the second abnormality data until the abnormality is confirmed on the game program side. Can be specified.

  The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment performs an abnormality determination in a time monitoring update process, which is a non-game program called by a timer interrupt process (main), which is a game program, and identifies a first abnormality that can specify a result of the abnormality determination. The medal-related error reference data is stored in the non-gaming RAM area as data. The timer interrupt processing (main), which is a gaming program, is executed when the game returns from the time monitoring update processing, which is a non-gaming program, to the gaming program. Without performing the above processing, the medal-related error reference data is referred to as the first abnormal data stored in the non-game RAM area, and the second abnormal data stored in the game RAM area based on the first abnormal data. And the sensor error flag can be updated. In such a configuration, the result of the abnormality determination by the non-game program is referred to before performing other processing, so that the result of the abnormality determination can be promptly reflected in the processing performed by the game program. Further, in such a configuration, after the time monitoring update process is performed, the process using the second abnormal data before being updated based on the first abnormal data is performed by another process. Can be prevented.

  In a conventional gaming machine, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of a game is stored and a non-game program area in which a non-game program irrespective of the progress of the game are stored are separately allocated to a ROM. There is a configuration. In such a configuration, when the signal output by the game program and the signal output by the non-game program are performed using a common output port, the output data of the signal set by the non-game program may remain. Therefore, there is a risk that the game program will be output as an output signal.

  On the other hand, the slot machine 1, which is the gaming machine of the present embodiment, includes a ROM 41b having a storage area capable of storing a program, a main control unit 41 for performing control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b, The output area of the ROM 41b includes a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, and a program called by the game program. A non-game program area in which a non-game program is stored regardless of whether the output data is output data, for example, control signals for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, and the flow path switching solenoid 30 in the game program. Control signals, control signals for the credit indicator 11, commands to the sub-control unit 91, and the like are provided. The first output ports (output ports 0 to 5, 7 to 9) to which no output data is set in the non-game program, and the output data, for example, a test signal and the like are set in the non-game program. A second output port (output port 6) in which output data is not set in the program, and initialization of the first output port and the second output port is performed at the time of startup setting processing or power interruption which is a game program. This is a configuration performed from the processing (main). In such a configuration, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, a non-game program area in which a program called by the game program and which is not related to the progress of the game is stored, Are separately assigned, a first output port in which output data is set in a game program and no output data is set in a non-game program, and output data is set in a non-game program. In the above, since the output data of the signal set by the non-game program remains since the second output port and the second output port where the output data is not set are separately provided, the second output port is output as the output signal by the game program. There is no such thing as a game professional The independence of the control by the ram and the control by the non-game program can be ensured, and the first output port and the second output port are initialized from the game program, so that the control at the time of the initialization of the output port is performed. Can be simplified.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a first output port (output ports 0 to 5, 7 to 9) in which output data is set in a game program and no output data is set in a non-game program, A second output port (output port 6) in which output data is set in the game program and no output data is set in the game program. The game program includes a slot machine as an initialization condition. The first output port and the second output port are configured to be initialized when the supply of power to the power supply 1 and the detection of the power interruption are established. With such a configuration, control when the initialization condition is satisfied can be simplified.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a first output port (output ports 0 to 5, 7 to 9) in which output data is set in a game program and no output data is set in a non-game program, A second output port (output port 6) in which output data is set in the game program and no output data is set in the game program, and a test signal is output from the second output port. It is. In such a configuration, by controlling the non-game program to output a test signal that is not essential for the progress of the game, the capacity of the game program can be reduced.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a RAM 41c having a storage area in which data can be temporarily stored. And a non-game RAM area in which non-game data used by the non-game program is readablely stored. The game RAM area is a game program, and is initialized by a RAM initialization process called from an initial setting process or a main process. The non-gaming RAM area is a non-gaming program, and is configured to be initialized by a non-gaming RAM area initialization process called from the initial setting process. In such a configuration, in the game program and the non-game program, the game data and the non-game data can be referred to each other. Independence between the control by the game and the control by the non-game program can be ensured.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a RAM 41c having a storage area in which data can be temporarily stored. And a non-game RAM area in which non-game data used by the non-game program is readablely stored. When a setting change process is performed, the game RAM area is initialized by performing a game RAM area initialization process. Is initialized while the non-game RAM area is not initialized. In such a configuration, even when the setting change process involving the initialization of the game RAM area is performed, the non-game RAM area is not initialized, so that the storage contents stored in the non-game RAM area, for example, In addition, it is possible to prevent data or the like for displaying the winning combination, which is a state based on the game history, on the predetermined display device from being initialized.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a RAM 41c having a storage area capable of temporarily storing data, and the storage area of the RAM 41c is a game RAM area in which game data used by the game program is stored in a readable and writable manner. And a non-game RAM area in which non-game data used by the non-game program is readablely stored. The non-game RAM area uses RAM parity and fixed data for RAM destruction diagnosis in the initial setting process. When the abnormality is determined and the storage content of the RAM 41c is determined to be abnormal, the game RAM area initialization processing and the non-game RAM area initialization processing are performed to initialize all areas of the RAM 41c. . With such a configuration, the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c can be initialized when there is an abnormality in the content stored in the RAM 41c and there is a possibility that game control may not be performed normally. In addition, when there is an abnormality in the content stored in the RAM 41c, the non-game RAM area is initialized. Therefore, the stored content stored in the non-game RAM area that is not initialized even if the setting is changed, for example, a game The normalization of data based on the stored contents stored in the non-game RAM area can be ensured by normalizing data and the like for displaying the winning combination, which is a state based on the history of the game, on the predetermined display. .

  In a conventional gaming machine, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of a game is stored and a non-game program area in which a non-game program irrespective of the progress of the game are stored are separately allocated to a ROM. There is a configuration. In such a configuration, although the improper passing of medals is detected in the non-game program, the passing of the inserted medals is determined only in the game program, so that the non-game program does not operate normally. In this case, there is a possibility that the passing of the medal may be determined even if the fraud is performed.

  On the other hand, the slot machine 1, which is the gaming machine of the present embodiment, includes a ROM 41b having a storage area capable of storing a program, and a main control unit 41 that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. The storage area of the ROM 41b includes a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, and a non-game program area in which a non-game program irrelevant to the progress of the game is stored. The first condition in the game program is that the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b or 31c is in the ON state and the input data is in the OFF state, that is, the input data has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. Is detected, the passing of a medal, which is a game medium, is detected. The first detection processing (medal insertion signal processing) is performed, and as the second condition in the non-gaming program, the medal insertion signal state transition data specified based on the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is normal, and A second detection process (medal sensor check process) for detecting the passage of a medal, which is a game medium, is performed by establishing that the determined data of the inserted medal sensor 31b or 31c has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. When the passage of the game medium is detected in both the first detection processing and the second detection processing, it is determined that the game medium to be added to the bet amount and the credit has passed.

  In such a configuration, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, a non-game program area in which a non-game program which is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game is stored, Are separately assigned, a first detection process for detecting the passage of a game medium when a first condition is established in a game program, and a passage for detecting the passage of a game medium when a second condition is established in a game program. Since the passage of the game medium is determined when the passage of the game medium is detected in both of the second detection processes, the passage of the game medium can be appropriately determined without increasing the capacity of the game program.

  The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as a first condition, establishes that the finalized data of the inserted medal sensor 31b or 31c is in the ON state and the input data is in the OFF state. The first detection processing (medal insertion signal processing) for detecting the passage is performed, and as the second condition, the medal insertion signal state transition data specified based on the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is normal and the insertion is performed. A second detection process (medal sensor check process) for detecting the passage of a medal as a game medium by establishing that the determined data of the medal sensor 31b or 31c has changed from the ON state to the OFF state is performed. The two conditions are configured based on a state transition of a medal insertion signal including more information than the first condition. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate fraud related to the passage of the game medium without increasing the capacity of the game program.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the medal sensor check process as a non-game program, the medal insertion signal state transition data specified based on the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is normal as a second condition. In addition, the second detection process (medal sensor check process) for detecting the passage of a medal as a game medium when the determination data of the inserted medal sensor 31b or 31c is changed from the ON state to the OFF state is established. Yes, when the passage of the game medium is not normally detected by the second detection process, it is determined that the game medium is abnormal, and the medal-related error reference data (E5) is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to detect impropriety related to the passage of the game medium without increasing the capacity of the game program.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first condition is that the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b or 31c is in the ON state and the input data is in the OFF state. The first detection processing (medal insertion signal processing) for detecting the passage is performed, and as the second condition, the medal insertion signal state transition data specified based on the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is normal and inserted. The second detection process (medal sensor check process) for detecting the passage of a medal, which is a game medium, by establishing that the determined data of the medal sensor 31b or 31c has changed from the ON state to the OFF state is performed. In the first detection processing and the second detection processing, the passage of the game medium is detected using the common inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. It is. In such a configuration, since the passage of the game medium is detected by both the game program and the non-game program for the common sensor, it is possible to appropriately determine the passage of the game medium without increasing the capacity of the game program. it can.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can acquire the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c by a timer interrupt process (main) that executes a periodic process at regular intervals, and as a first condition, the inserted medal sensor 31b Alternatively, when it is established that the confirmed data of 31c is in the ON state and the input data is in the OFF state, the first detection processing (medal insertion signal processing) for detecting the passage of a medal as a game medium is performed. As two conditions, the medal insertion signal state transition data specified based on the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is normal, and the determined data of the inserted medal sensor 31b or 31c has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. Is established, a second detection process (medal sensor check process) for detecting the passage of a medal as a game medium is performed. A configuration, in the first detection processing and second detection processing is configured for detecting passage of game media with a detection state of the inserted medal sensor 31a~31c acquired in the same timer interruption process (main). In such a configuration, both the game program and the non-game program detect the passage of the game medium using the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c acquired in the same timer interrupt process (main). It is possible to appropriately determine the passage of the game medium without increasing the capacity.

  The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment awardes a predetermined number of medals according to the winning of the small role, controls the player in an advantageous manner according to the winning of the special role, and controls for a predetermined specific period, for example, during the past 6,000 games. It is possible to count the total number of payouts, which is the total number of medals awarded during the period from the time when the data in the RAM 41c is initialized at the time of shipment from the factory or for some reason to the present, etc. It is possible to count the number of bonuses paid out, which is the total number of medals awarded during the period (RB), and calculate the ratio of the number of bonuses paid out based on the number of bonuses paid out of the total cumulative number of paid outs. It is configured to calculate a certain accessory payout ratio and to display the calculated accessory payout ratio on the gaming machine information display device 50 in a identifiable manner, for a specific period (in the present embodiment, 6000 games). And a plurality of accumulation buffers 1 to 3 having different timings to arrive at a particular time period. In the period from the start of counting to the first time until the specific period is reached, the display of the payout ratio is flashed. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the accessory payout ratio displayed on the credit display 11 and the game assistance display 12 is not a normal value. In addition, since each of the plurality of accumulation buffers 1 to 3 having different timings to reach the specific period is provided, after the first accumulation buffer reaches the specific period once, the total buffer reaches the next specific period. Without waiting, every time the other accumulation buffer reaches the specific period, the accessory payout ratio can be updated to the latest information.

[Function and Effect 2]
In the conventional gaming machine, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, and a non-game program area in which a program called by the game program and not related to the progress of the game are stored, Are separately assigned, and when the non-game program is executed, a configuration is proposed in which the corresponding non-game program is called from the game program. In such a configuration, when a non-game program is called from the game program, the value of the register is saved and saved in the stack area in the non-game program, and saved when all processing based on the non-game program is completed. After returning the value to the register, the program is returned to the game program.However, since the value of the register after the value is updated by the instruction executed in connection with the call of the non-game program is saved, the game program When returning, there is a possibility that the register may return to a state different from that when the non-game program is called.

  On the other hand, the slot machine 1 that is the gaming machine of the present embodiment includes a ROM 41b having a storage area capable of storing a program, and a main CPU 41a that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. The storage area of the ROM 41b includes a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, a non-game program area in which a program called by the game program and a non-game program not related to the progress of the game are stored, The main CPU 41a executes processing based on values stored in a plurality of registers, and the values of the plurality of registers are updated by a read command LD executed in association with calling of a non-game program. Including the flag register, the processing included in the game program (main processing, When calling processing (non-gaming RAM area initialization processing, RT information output processing, winning information output processing, winning ratio monitoring data processing, medal sensor processing, etc.) included in the non-gaming program from the dull input signal processing, etc. The calling game program saves the value of the flag register to the game stack area of the RAM 41c used by the game program, and sets the stack pointer SP used by the non-game program by using the read instruction LD by the called non-game program. Thereafter, the non-game program saves all the values of the plurality of registers to the non-game stack area. In such a configuration, in the RAM 41c, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, and a non-game program in which a non-game program that is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game is stored. When a non-game program is called from a game program in a configuration where areas are separately allocated, the value of a flag register whose value is updated by execution of the read command LD is saved to the game stack area of the RAM 41c used by the game program. After setting the stack pointer SP used by the non-game program using the read command LD by the non-game program, the values of all the registers are saved to the non-game stack area of the RAM 41c, so that the value of the flag register is stored in the game stack area. Evacuate and protect State, it is possible to perform a non-game program.

  In the present embodiment, when the non-game program is called from the game program, the main CPU 41a saves the value of the flag register to the game stack area using the second save instruction (PUSH) by the game program. When the non-game program is called from the game program, the value of the flag register may be saved to a predetermined area other than the game stack area (for example, a game RAM area other than the game stack area, a back flag register, etc.). Further, when a non-game program is called from a game program, a configuration may be employed in which at least the values of a plurality of registers including the flag register are saved by the game program.

  The main CPU 41a of the present embodiment stores a first save instruction (PUSH ALL) for saving all the values of the plurality of registers in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c indicated by the stack pointer SP, and stores the value of the flag register among the plurality of registers in the stack pointer SP. , A plurality of instructions including a second save instruction (PUSH AF) for saving to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c can be executed, and the second save instruction for saving only the value of the flag register is more than one of the plurality of registers. Is smaller in program capacity than the first save instruction that saves the value of. In such a configuration, the value of the flag register is saved by using the second save instruction in the game program, and all the values of the plurality of registers are saved by using the first save instruction in the non-game program. The capacity can be reduced.

  The main CPU 41a of the present embodiment can execute a read instruction LD for reading data stored in a specified area to another specified area. Using the read instruction LD, the stack pointer SP The value indicated by the read instruction LD can be read out and stored in the designated area of the RAM 41c, or the value stored in the designated area of the RAM 41c can be read out and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Is executed to update the value of the second zero flag of the flag register, and when the non-game program is called from the game program, the main CPU 41a stores the value of the flag register including the second zero flag in the RAM 41c by the game program. Of the value stored in the flag register. Second zero flag value is updated by the execution of the output instruction LD is a construction is provided without value used to determine for the program run in the gaming program. In such a configuration, the value of the second zero flag updated by execution of the read command LD is a value that is not used for determination by the game program, but includes the second zero flag when calling the non-game program. By saving and protecting the value of the flag register, it is possible to reliably prevent an unintended operation from being performed when the game program returns from the non-game program.

  The main CPU 41a of the present embodiment is included in the game program, and includes a main process for performing a basic process, and a timer interrupt process (main) capable of performing an interrupt process during the execution of the main process. The processing can be executed, and when the processing (winning information output processing, data processing for winning ratio monitoring, medal sensor processing, etc.) included in the non-gaming program is called from the main processing included in the gaming program, the value of the flag register is read. After being saved in the game stack area of the RAM 41c, the interruption of the timer interrupt processing (main) is prohibited. With such a configuration, it is possible to minimize a period in which an interrupt is prohibited when a non-game program is called. Further, it is possible to prevent the value of the flag register from being changed by performing the timer interrupt processing (main) after saving the value of the flag register.

  In the present embodiment, when the main CPU 41a calls the process included in the non-game program from the main process included in the game program, the main CPU 41a saves the value of the flag register to the game stack area and then executes the timer interrupt process (main). However, when the main CPU 41a calls the process included in the non-game program from the main process included in the game program, the main CPU 41a sets the value of the flag register before saving the value in the game stack area of the RAM 41c. Alternatively, the timer interrupt processing (main) interrupt may be prohibited. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the value of the flag register from being changed by performing the timer interrupt processing (main) after saving the value of the flag register in the game stack area.

  In the conventional gaming machine, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, and a non-game program area in which a program called by the game program and not related to the progress of the game are stored, Are separately assigned, and when executing a non-game program, a configuration is proposed in which the corresponding non-game program is called from the game program. In such a configuration, when calling the non-game program from the game program, the timer interrupt is prohibited in advance, and when all the processing based on the non-game program is completed and the program returns to the game program, the timer interrupt prohibition is released. With this configuration, the timer interrupt can be prevented from being performed during the execution of the non-game program, but the timer interrupt may be delayed due to the prohibition of the timer interrupt with the execution of the non-game program. .

  On the other hand, the slot machine 1 that is the gaming machine of the present embodiment includes a ROM 41b having a storage area capable of storing a program, and a main CPU 41a that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. The storage area of the ROM 41b includes a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, a non-game program area in which a program called by the game program and a non-game program not related to the progress of the game are stored, The main CPU 41a performs basic processing (main processing, game start waiting processing included in the main processing, medal insertion signal processing, and the like) and when an interrupt condition that periodically occurs during execution of the basic processing is established. And a timer interrupt process (main) that can execute the process by interrupting the basic process. It is possible and is a basic process, from a process included in the game program (main process, medal insertion signal process, etc.) to a process included in the non-game program (winning information output process, medal sensor process, data process for position ratio monitoring) Is called, the timer interrupt during the execution of the non-game program is prohibited, and before a series of processes including the process of calling the non-game program from the game program, the interrupt condition is satisfied and the timer interrupt process ( By executing a one-time interruption process that waits until main) is executed, and performing a series of processes including a process of calling a non-game program from the game program after the timer interrupt process (main) is executed, In this configuration, a game program is called. In such a configuration, in the RAM 41c provided in the main control unit 41, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, and a program called by the game program, and a non-game program irrelevant to the progress of the game are stored. In a configuration in which the stored non-game program area and the non-game program are separately allocated, the timer interrupt processing (main) is prohibited when calling the non-game program from the game program, and before calling the non-game program from the game program, Since the non-game program is called after executing the one-time interrupt processing and executing the timer interrupt processing (main), the non-game program is executed in a state where the period until the next interrupt condition is satisfied is sufficient. A series of processes including the process of calling the program are performed. It becomes the non-game program is invoked and executed by, by the interrupt with the execution of the non-game program is prohibited can be prevented that the execution of the timer interrupt processing (main) will be delayed.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a calls up the medal sensor processing included in the non-gaming program from the medal insertion signal processing which is a part of the main processing included in the gaming program, or executes the RT information output processing from the main processing. When calling, a non-game program is called from the game program to execute a one-time interrupt wait process, and after the timer interrupt process (main) is executed, the non-game program is called. In this configuration, the non-game program is called after a plurality of processes included in the game program are performed. When the non-game program is called from the game program, a one-time interruption process is performed immediately before the non-game program is called. A configuration may be adopted, and by adopting such a configuration, a non-game program may be executed. In a state in which the interrupt is inhibited, it can be reliably prevented that the interrupt condition is satisfied.

  The main CPU 41a according to the present embodiment includes a main process for executing a basic process, and a timer interrupt capable of executing the process by interrupting the main process when an interrupt condition that occurs periodically during the execution of the main process is satisfied. And a process including a process (main). When a non-game program is called from the main process, a non-game program is called after executing an interrupt once wait process. The role ratio monitoring data process included in the non-game program called from the process is a process that requires a predetermined time (a time that may exceed a timing at which an interrupt that triggers the next timer interrupt process (main) occurs). is there. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the execution of the timer interrupt processing (main) from being delayed even if the period during which the timer interrupt is prohibited due to the execution of the non-game program is lengthened.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main process included in the game program and a timer capable of executing the process by interrupting the main process when an interrupt condition periodically generated during execution of the main process is satisfied. And an interrupt process (main). The main process calls a medal insertion signal process included in the game program via a game start waiting process included in the game program, and executes the process from the medal insertion signal process. A medal sensor process included in the non-game program can be called, and in a game start waiting process before calling the medal sensor process from the medal insertion signal process, a one-time interrupt wait process is executed, and a timer interrupt process (main) Is performed after the process is performed, and the medal sensor process is called. In the timer interrupt process (main), A port input process for updating input data of various switches (for example, the start switch 7 and the like) and sensors (for example, the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c) is executed. This is a configuration in which the insertion state is determined. In such a configuration, the medal sensor process included in the non-game program can be executed with reference to the latest input data updated in the timer interrupt process (main).

[Effect 3]
In a conventional slot machine, a control is performed in an advantageous section which can be controlled by an AT or the like in which an operation mode advantageous to a player is notified, and the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches the limit value of 1500 games. There is a configuration in which the advantageous section is terminated and information related to control of the advantageous section such as the number of remaining games of the AT is also initialized.
In the slot machine having such a configuration, no consideration has been given to a configuration in which a bet amount can be selected from a plurality of bet numbers in limiting an advantageous section.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of bets can be set to one of three (first bet) or two (second bet) by selection of a player. The main control unit 41 is configured to be able to execute the game both when the bet amount is set to three and when the bet amount is set to two. It is possible to control to an advantageous section, and in the payout control processing (first processing) performed at the start of the game, when it is specified as an advantageous section based on the value of the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section, Regardless of whether three or two bets are set as the bet number, an advantageous section game number counter that counts the number of advantageous section games that is the number of games since the start of the advantageous section is added for one game. And update the number of advantageous section games Is updated, it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous section game number counter has reached the prescribed number of games (the second prescribed number). If it is determined that the number of prescribed games has been reached, the advantageous section data initial This is a configuration in which an advantageous section is terminated by performing a conversion process.
According to this configuration, the game is executed regardless of whether the three bets (first bet) or the two bets (second bet) are set by the player's selection. In a possible configuration, the main control unit 41 controls the number of advantageous section games even when three bets are set or two bets are set when the advantageous section is controlled. The counter is updated, and the advantageous section is ended when the value of the advantageous section game number counter reaches the prescribed game number (the second prescribed number). Therefore, even if three bets are selected, two bets remain. Even if it is selected, the advantageous section is limited so as not to be controlled to the advantageous section for a long period of time equal to or more than the predetermined number of games (1500 games), so that the gambling in the slot machine 1 can be prevented from excessively increasing.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs a payout control process at the start of a game, and performs a process of updating the number-of-advantage-segments game counter when it is specified that the game is in the advantageous zone. The main control unit 41 may be configured to perform processing for updating the advantageous section game number counter in processing at the end of the game, for example, in the AT state management processing after the reel stop control processing. In the configuration in which the process of updating the advantageous section game number counter at the end of the game is performed, the advantageous section game number counter is updated regardless of whether three bets are set or two bets are set, By terminating the advantageous section when the value of the advantageous section game number counter value reaches the prescribed game number, the advantageous section is limited so that the advantageous section is not controlled for a long period of time equal to or more than the predetermined number of games. In addition, the gambling property of the slot machine 1 can be prevented from excessively increasing.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can output a signal in the advantageous section to the outside of the slot machine 1 indicating that the vehicle is in the advantageous section when controlling to the advantageous section. Is set to a predetermined value (1) different from the initial value (0) in the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous section set in the above. It is determined whether or not the signal is in the advantageous section by determining whether or not the signal in the advantageous section is being output based on whether or not the value of the output buffer of the medium signal is the initial value. In such a case, the processing relating to the advantageous section is performed in the payout control processing or the like.
According to this configuration, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the vehicle is in the advantageous section based on whether or not the signal in the advantageous section is being output. What can be done can be guaranteed.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the output of the advantageous section signal is being performed based on whether or not the value of the output buffer of the advantageous section signal is an initial value in the main processing and the payout control processing. Although it is a configuration to determine whether or not during the advantageous section by determining whether or not during the advantageous section, the determination as to whether or not during the advantageous section is not limited to whether or not during the output of the signal during the advantageous section, for example, The determination may be made based on an advantageous section flag indicating that the game is in the advantageous section, an advantageous section game number counter for counting the number of games in the advantageous section, or the like.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can set the flag during the advantageous section in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c when controlling to the advantageous section, and outputs the signal during the advantageous section in the payout control processing of the main processing. If it is determined that the signal is not being output during the advantageous section based on the value of the buffer and the signal is not during the advantageous section, the start condition of the advantageous section (that the advantageous section transition hand is won by the internal lottery) is satisfied. If it is determined whether or not the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, a flag during the advantageous section indicating that the control is performed to the advantageous section is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In the subsequent main processing, it is determined whether or not the flag during the advantageous section is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. By setting a predetermined value (1) in a signal output buffer, a signal during an advantageous section is output by a subsequent timer interrupt process.
According to this configuration, when the advantageous section start signal is not being output, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section start condition is satisfied. If the advantageous section start condition is satisfied, the advantageous section flag is set to the RAM 41c. Is set in the predetermined area and the transition to the advantageous section is performed, so that it is possible to ensure that the process of transitioning to the advantageous section is performed in a state where no signal is output during the advantageous section.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to output a predetermined signal to a test device that performs a performance test of the slot machine 1, and the signal during the advantageous section is output to the test device, This is a signal used for the performance test.
According to this configuration, in the state where the signal during the advantageous section is output to the test apparatus that performs the performance test, the process related to the advantageous section is performed by the main control unit 41. Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the main controller 41 performs the process of shifting to the advantageous section in a state where the signal during the advantageous section is not output.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the value of the output signal of the signal during the advantageous section as the test signal in the main processing or the payout control processing is an initial value. In this configuration, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in the advantageous section by determining whether or not the vehicle is in the middle of the output. Alternatively, it may be configured to determine whether or not the vehicle is in the advantageous section based on a signal output to an external device such as the above.

In the payout control process performed at the start of the game, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the advantageous section shift related processing related to the shift of the advantageous section and the number of three bets (first bet number). The initial value (0) is set in the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous interval, it is determined that the signal is out of the advantageous interval, and the bet amount of the three bets is determined. If it is determined that it is set, while performing the advantageous section shift related processing, the initial value (0) is set in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section, and it is determined that it is outside the advantageous section. When it is determined that the number of bets has not been set, the advantageous section shift-related processing is not performed.
According to this configuration, when the three bet number (the first bet number) is not set, the advantageous section shift-related processing is not performed. (The first bet)).

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can control to a plurality of game states including the special states (BB1, BB2), and in the payout control processing performed at the start of the game, the main control unit 41 relates to the shift of the advantageous section. Advantageous section shift related processing and processing for determining whether the gaming state is controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2) can be performed, and the initial value (0) is stored in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section. When it is determined that the current time is outside the advantageous section and it is determined that the state is not controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2), the advantageous section transition related processing is performed, and the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section is output. Although the initial value (0) is set and it is determined that the vehicle is outside the advantageous section, if it is determined that the state is controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2), the advantageous section transition related processing is not performed.
According to this configuration, when the game state is controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2), the advantageous section shift-related processing is not performed, so that the special state (BB1, BB2) is given to the player or the like. Can be encouraged to play the game.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can control to a plurality of game states including the special states (BB1, BB2), and in the payout control processing performed at the start of the game, the main control unit 41 relates to the shift of the advantageous section. Advantageous section shift-related processing, processing for determining whether or not the gaming state is controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2), and determination for whether or not three bets (first bet) are set It is possible to perform the processing, and when the initial value (0) is set in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section and it is determined that it is out of the advantageous section, it is determined that three bets are set. If it is determined that the state is not controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2), the advantageous section shift related processing is performed, and the initial value (0) is set in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section. It is determined that it is out of the section, If it is determined to be controlled in the special state (BB1, BB2), or, in the case where the number of three bets is determined not to be set is configured not to perform the advantageous interval migration-related processing.
According to this configuration, when the gaming state is controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2), or when the number of three bets (the first number of bets) is not set, the advantageous section shift-related processing is performed. Since the game is not performed, it is possible to urge the player to play a game in a gaming state other than the special states (BB1, BB2) and with three bets (first bet).

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment includes stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R operated by the player to stop the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and the operation modes of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R (in the order of stop). Can be performed, and in the ball-out control processing performed at the start of the game, processing related to the navigation notification (processing for performing navigation notification in accordance with the currently controlled ball-out state, ED transition) It is possible to perform a process of updating the game number counter, a payout state process for performing a process according to the payout state, and a process of determining whether or not three bets (first bet number) are set. If the predetermined value (1) is set in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section and it is determined that the section is in the advantageous section, and if it is determined that the number of bets is set to three, the navigation notification is performed. While processing related to A predetermined value (1) is set in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section, and it is determined that the vehicle is in the advantageous section. However, if it is determined that the number of three bets is not set, it is related to the navigation notification. This is a configuration in which no processing is performed.
According to this configuration, when the three bets (the first bet) are not set, the processing related to the navigation notification is not performed, so the three bets (the first bet) are not performed. ) To encourage the player to play the game.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, when a special role (BB1, BB2) is won by an internal lottery in the game and the special role is not won, the main role of the special role is carried over to the next game and thereafter. When the winning of the special role (BB1) targeted for the internal lottery is carried over, provided that two bets (second bets) are set, the gaming state is changed to RT1. The stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R operated by the player to stop the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided, and the operation modes (stop order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are notified. Navigation notification can be performed, and in the ball-out control processing performed at the start of the game, processing related to navigation notification (processing for performing navigation notification in accordance with the currently controlled ball-out state, ED transition game count Update, a ball-out state process for performing a process according to the ball-out state, and a process of determining whether or not the gaming state is controlled to RT1. When it is determined that a predetermined value (1) is set in the buffer and that the game state is in the advantageous section, and it is determined that the gaming state is controlled to RT1, the processing related to the navigation notification is performed, while the advantageous section is performed. When it is determined that the predetermined value (1) is set in the output buffer of the medium signal and the vehicle is in the advantageous section, but it is determined that the gaming state is not controlled to RT1, processing related to the navigation notification is performed. There is no configuration.
According to this configuration, the specific gaming state in which the winning of the specific special role (BB1) to be subjected to the internal lottery is carried over, provided that the number of two bets (the second number of bets) is set. When the game is not controlled by RT1, the process related to the navigation notification is not performed, so that it is possible to prompt a player or the like to play a game at RT1.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, when a special role (BB1, BB2) is won by an internal lottery in the game and the special role is not won, the main role of the special role is carried over to the next game and thereafter. When the winning of the special role (BB1) targeted for the internal lottery is carried over, provided that two bets (second bets) are set, the gaming state is changed to RT1. The stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R operated by the player to stop the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided, and the operation modes (stop order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are notified. Navigation notification can be performed, and in the ball-out control processing performed at the start of the game, processing related to navigation notification (processing for performing navigation notification in accordance with the currently controlled ball-out state, ED transition game count Update processing, a payout state process for performing a process according to the payout state), a process of determining whether or not the gaming state is controlled to RT1, and setting a bet number of three (first bet number). It is possible to perform a process of determining whether or not the game state is RT1 when a predetermined value (1) is set in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section and it is determined that the game is during the advantageous section. If it is determined that the bet amount is set to three and the bet amount is set to three, processing related to the navigation notification is performed, and a predetermined value (1) is stored in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section. Is set, and it is determined that the game is in the advantageous section, if it is determined that the gaming state is not controlled by RT1, or if it is determined that the number of three bets is not set, the navigation is performed. This is a configuration in which processing related to notification is not performed.
According to this configuration, when three bets (first bet) are not set, the internal lottery is performed on condition that two bets (second bet) are set. If the winning of the specific special role (BB1) is not controlled by RT1, which is the specific gaming state being carried over, processing related to the navigation notification is not performed. The user can be prompted to play a game with three bets (first bet) and RT1.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment includes an ED transition game number counter that counts the number of ED transition games in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and increments the ED transition game number counter by one each time a game is played in an advantageous section. When the number of ED transition games specified based on the ED transition game number counter reaches the predetermined number of games (fourth prescribed number), navigation information control is performed over a period until the advantageous section ends. In the game in which it is determined that the three bets (first bet) are set and the gaming state is determined to be controlled to RT1, the ED transition is performed. While a process of updating the game number counter is performed, it is determined that the game in which it is determined that the three bets (the first bet) is not set or the gaming state is not controlled to RT1. In the game, a configuration that does not perform a process of updating the ED number of transition game.
According to this configuration, an internal lottery target is provided on condition that a game in which three bets (first bet) is not set or two bets (second bet) is set. In a game that is not controlled by RT1, which is a specific gaming state in which the winning of the specific special role (BB1) is carried over, ED control is performed by reaching a predetermined number of games (fourth specified number). Since the process of updating the number of ED transition games is not performed, it is possible to urge a player or the like to play a game with three bets (first bet) and RT1.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can set the bet amount to either three (first bet amount) or two (second bet amount) by the player's selection, and the three bets can be set. The game can be executed both when the number is set and when the two bets are set, and the main control unit 41 controls the game section to be an advantageous section that is advantageous to the player. And a number-of-advantages-segments counter that counts the number of games controlled in an advantageous section in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c; a net increase in the number of medals paid out after the advantageous section is started (payout during the advantageous section) A net increase counter for counting the number of medals obtained by subtracting the total number of medals used for setting the bet amount from the total number of medals issued is provided. Section game number counter In the AT state management process performed after the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, the advantageous section game number counter is set to a value other than the initial value (0). In some cases, regardless of whether three bets are set or two bets, the net increase counter is updated, the net increase counter is updated, and the value of the net increase counter is updated. Is determined to have exceeded a first prescribed number, and if it is determined that the first prescribed number has been exceeded, control is performed so as to end the advantageous section.
According to this configuration, the game is executed regardless of whether the three bets (first bet) or the two bets (second bet) are set by the player's selection. In a possible configuration, in the advantageous section, the medal number counter is updated regardless of whether the first bet number is set or the second bet number is set, and the medal number counter value becomes equal to the first specified number. When the number of bets exceeds three, the net number of medals is increased in the advantageous section regardless of whether three bets (first bet) or two bets (second bet) are selected. Since it is limited so that it does not become excessive, the gambling in the slot machine 1 can be prevented from increasing.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can set the bet amount to either three (first bet amount) or two (second bet amount) by the player's selection. The game can be executed both when the number is set and when the two bets are set, and the main control unit 41 controls the game section to be an advantageous section that is advantageous to the player. The stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R operated by the player to stop the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and the operation mode (stop order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R during the advantageous section. In the AT state management processing performed after the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, processing related to the navigation notification (processing for performing ED control, Related to the state And a process of determining whether or not three bets (first bet) has been set, and the advantageous section game number counter is set to an initial value. When it is determined that the value is a value other than (0) and when it is determined that the number of bets is set to three, a process related to the navigating notification is performed, and the number-of-advantage-zone games counter is set to the initial value (0). ), But when it is determined that the bet amount of three is not set, the processing related to the navigation notification is not performed.
According to this configuration, in a game in which the three bets (the first bet) are not set, the processing related to the navigating notification is not performed. (First bet number) can be prompted to play a game.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the game is in the advantageous section based on whether or not the advantageous section game number counter has the initial value (0) in the AT state management processing. However, the determination of whether or not the vehicle is in the advantageous section is not limited to the determination based on whether or not the advantageous section game number counter is the initial value (0). The configuration may be such that the determination is made based on a flag, an output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section, or the like.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, when a special combination (BB1, BB2) is won by an internal lottery in the game and the special combination does not win, the main combination of the special combination is carried over to the next game and thereafter. When the winning of the special role (BB1) targeted for the internal lottery is carried over, provided that two bets (second bets) are set, the gaming state is changed to RT1. And the stop section 8L, 8C, 8R operated by the player to stop the reels 2L, 2C, 2R can be controlled to an advantageous section that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to provide a navigation notification for notifying the operation mode (stopping order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R during the advantageous section, and to execute the navigation after all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped rotating. In the AT state management processing, it is determined whether or not the processing relating to the navigation notification (the processing for performing the ED control, the processing relating to the dispensing state for performing the processing relating to the dispensing state, and the like) and whether the gaming state is controlled to RT1. If it is determined that the advantageous section game number counter is a value other than the initial value (0) and it is determined that the gaming state is controlled to RT1, the navigation notification is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the advantageous section game number counter is a value other than the initial value (0), but it is determined that the gaming state is not controlled to RT1, the processing relating to the navigation notification is performed. Is not performed.
According to this configuration, the specific gaming state in which the winning of the specific special role (BB1) to be subjected to the internal lottery is carried over, provided that the number of two bets (the second number of bets) is set. When the game is not controlled by RT1, the process related to the navigation notification is not performed, so that it is possible to prompt a player or the like to play a game at RT1.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, when a special combination (BB1, BB2) is won by an internal lottery in the game and the special combination does not win, the main combination of the special combination is carried over to the next game and thereafter. When the winning of the special role (BB1) targeted for the internal lottery is carried over, provided that two bets (second bets) are set, the gaming state is changed to RT1. And the stop section 8L, 8C, 8R operated by the player to stop the reels 2L, 2C, 2R can be controlled to an advantageous section that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to provide a navigation notification for notifying the operation mode (stopping order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R during the advantageous section, and to execute the navigation after all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped rotating. In the AT state management processing, it is determined whether or not the processing related to the navigation notification (the processing for performing the ED control, the processing relating to the payout state performing the processing related to the payout state, and the like) and whether the gaming state is controlled to RT1. Processing to determine whether or not three bets have been set, and when it is determined that the advantageous section game number counter is a value other than the initial value (0), If it is determined that the state is controlled to RT1, and it is determined that the number of bets is set to three, processing related to the navigation notification is performed, and the advantageous section game number counter is set to the initial value (0). ), When it is determined that the gaming state is not controlled to RT1, or when it is determined that the number of bets is not set to three, processing related to the navigation notification is performed. Is not performed.
According to this configuration, an internal lottery target is set on condition that three bets (first bet) are not set or two bets (second bet) are set. If the winning of the particular special role (BB1) is not controlled by RT1, which is the specific gaming state being carried over, the processing related to the navigation notification is not performed, so that the player etc. The player can be prompted to play a game with three bets (first bet) and RT1.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment uses the net increase in the number of medals paid out after the advantageous section is started in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section is used to set the bet amount. A net increase counter that counts the total number of medals obtained by subtracting the total number of medals obtained is updated. The net increase counter is updated every time a game is played in an advantageous section, and identification is performed based on the net increase counter. When the net increase in the number of medals to be performed exceeds the third specified number, it is possible to perform the ED control in which the navigation notification control is performed over the period until the advantageous section ends. In the game in which it is determined that the bet amount is set and the gaming state is controlled to RT1, it is determined whether or not the value of the net increase counter exceeds a third specified number. In a game in which it is determined that the number of bets (first bet) is not set, or in a game in which the gaming state is not controlled by RT1, the value of the net increase counter exceeds the third prescribed number. It is a configuration that does not determine whether or not
According to this configuration, when three bets (first bet) are not set, the internal lottery is performed on condition that two bets (second bet) are set. If the winning of the specific special role (BB1) is not controlled by RT1, which is the specific gaming state being carried over, the ED control is performed when the number exceeds the third specified number. Since it is not determined whether the value has exceeded the third specified number, it is possible to urge the player or the like to play a game with three bets (first bet number) and RT1.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of bets can be set to either three (first bet) or two (second bet) by the selection of the player, and the main control unit 41 Means that if a special role (BB1, BB2) is won by an internal lottery in the game and the special role does not win, the winning of the special role can be carried over to the next game and thereafter. Includes a special special role (BB1) that is subject to an internal lottery provided that two bets (second bets) are set, and three bets (first bets) In the set game, a symbol combination in which a specific special combination (BB1) is won is controlled so that it cannot be derived to the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R regardless of the winning result of the internal lottery.
According to this configuration, in the gaming state RT1 in which the winning of the specific special combination (BB1) is carried over, three bets (first bet) are selected and the game is performed, so that the internal lottery is performed. Even if none of the winning combinations are won, the specific special winning combination (BB1) does not win and the gaming state can be maintained at RT1.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of bets can be set to either three (first bet) or two (second bet) by the selection of the player, and the main control unit 41 Is configured to have a MAXBET switch 6 that can store credits in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and that is operated when a player sets a bet amount using credits. When the total number of credits and the bet amount of three can be set, the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is effectively received.
According to this configuration, in a situation where the remaining number of credits is sufficient to set the three bets, the MAXBET switch 6 is operated by the player or the like, and the three bets (the first bet) are performed. On the other hand, if the remaining number of credits is insufficient to set the three bets, the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not accepted effectively, and only the two bets (the second bet) are set. Even if the MAXBET switch 6 is operated in a situation where it is not possible, no two bets will be set, so that the game can be prevented from being played with the second bet as much as possible.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of bets can be set to either 3 (first bet) or 2 (second bet) by the selection of the player, and the main controller 41 Is a setting change state in which any one of a plurality of setting values (1 to 6) having different degrees of advantage for the player can be selected and set, and the currently set setting It is possible to control to a setting confirmation state in which the value can be confirmed, and when a special role (BB1, BB2) is won by an internal lottery in the game and the special role does not win, the special role is not considered. The winning combination can be carried over from the next game onward. The special role is a special special role that is the target of the internal lottery, provided that three bets (first bet number) are set. (BB2) and two bets (second bets) are set The main control unit 41 includes a specific special role (BB1) that is an object of the internal lottery on condition that the internal lottery is set, and the main lottery of the internal lottery is set on condition that two bets (second bet numbers) are set. When the winning of the target special role (BB1) is carried over, a status display indicating that the winning of the special role is carried over is performed, while the bet amount of three pieces (the first bet number) is set. When the winning of the special role (BB2) to be subjected to the internal lottery is carried over on condition that the status is displayed, the status display is not performed. In this configuration, the status display is continued even when the control is performed to the setting confirmation state.
According to this configuration, when the status display is performed, the winning of the specific special role (BB1) to be subjected to the internal lottery is performed on condition that two bets (second bets) are set. In addition to being notified that the item has been carried over, the status display is controlled once in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state because it is continued even if it is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, it can be confirmed that the winning of the specific special role (BB1) is carried over.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that a special combination (BB1) to be subjected to an internal lottery is carried over on condition that two bets (second bets) are set. It is possible to display a status indicating that the winning of the special role has been carried over, and a special target for the internal lottery provided that the number of two bets (the second bet) is set. In the game in which the role (BB1) has been won, the status display is started before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective, and when the special role (BB1) is won in the game, the status display is ended. When the special combination (BB1) does not win in the game, the status display is controlled to be continued.
According to this configuration, since the status display is started before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is checked after the presence or absence of the status display is confirmed. Can be performed. When the special combination (BB2) is won, the state display is ended in the game, so that it is possible to immediately confirm that the state where the special combination (BB2) has been won is ended.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can execute a main process that is repeatedly executed for each unit of game, and a timer interrupt process that interrupts the main process at regular time intervals and executes the process. In the internal lottery process executed in, it is determined whether or not the special combination (BB1, BB2) has been won in the internal lottery. If it is determined that the special combination has been won, the special combination (BB1, BB2) Is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c to indicate that the game has been won, and the LED special display process executed in the timer interrupt process refers to the internal win flag and designates a specific special role (based on the internal win flag). BB1) is determined to be winning or not, and if it is determined that the special combination (BB1) is winning, the status display LED 17 is turned on. No. The by controlling to a predetermined lighting state status display LED17 by output from the output port, a configuration for starting status.
According to this configuration, when the special combination (BB1) is won by the internal lottery, the status display is started immediately. Therefore, the time for checking whether or not the status display is being performed is determined by the stop switches 8L and 8C. , 8R before the operation becomes effective.

In the internal lottery process executed in the main process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has won the special combination (BB1, BB2) when it is determined that the special combination (BB1, BB2) has been won. After setting an internal winning flag indicating the fact in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, an interrupt BC number waiting process is performed to wait until a timer interrupt process is performed a predetermined number of times. The reel stop control process for performing the stop control is executed, and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the condition that the reel under rotation control is in the constant speed state in the reel stop control process is enabled. Yes, after the internal winning flag is set in the internal lottery process, and after the timer interrupt process is performed at least once, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are turned off. To enable the work.
According to this configuration, the state notification can be reliably started before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can control the AT to be advantageous for the player in the advantageous section, and when controlling to the AT, sends an AT signal indicating that the AT is controlled to a slot. It is possible to output to the outside of the machine 1, and when controlling to the advantageous section, by controlling the section display LED 19 to the lighting state, it is possible to perform the section display indicating that the control is performed to the advantageous section. After the game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section, the section display is started when the control of the AT is started, and the section display is started when the control of the AT is started. In this configuration, the AT signal is controlled to be output to the outside.
According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the external device that has received the AT signal from specifying that it is controlled to be in the advantageous section before the section display is started.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has a configuration capable of outputting an operation information signal for designating an operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the test apparatus. In the payout control process, a predetermined value (1 indicating ON state) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 19, and the section display LED 19 is controlled to the lighting state by the timer interrupt processing, indicating that the section is controlled to the advantageous section. An operation information signal output process is performed in the main process after the section display is started, so that the operation information signal is output to the test apparatus after the section display is started.
According to this configuration, since the operation information signal is output to the test apparatus after the start of the section display, the test apparatus can specify the operation mode specified in the state where the section display is performed. Becomes

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can control the AT to be advantageous to the player in the advantageous section, and by controlling the section display LED 19 to the lighting state when controlling to the advantageous section. It is possible to display a section indicating that the section is controlled, and to output a signal in the advantageous section indicating that the section is controlled to the advantageous section to the test apparatus. Advantageous section data initialization processing for initializing information on the advantageous section is performed. When the advantageous section ends, the advantageous section related information including the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section is initialized by the advantageous section data initialization processing. Then, after controlling the signal during the advantageous section to the OFF state, the section display is terminated.
According to this configuration, the section display is terminated after the advantageous section related information is initialized and the signal during the advantageous section is turned off, so that the section display is performed in a state where the advantageous section related information is not initialized. In addition to preventing the termination, the section display is terminated even though the advantage section signal is output to the test apparatus because the output buffer of the advantage section signal is not initialized. Can be prevented.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to perform an advantageous section data initialization process for initializing information on the advantageous section when ending the advantageous section. Is set, and in the processing at the end of the game in the main processing (Sb83 to Sb85), after the advantageous section related information is initialized, the output buffer of the advantageous section signal is set to the OFF state. In this configuration, it is determined whether or not the initial value (0) shown is set, and if it is determined that the OFF state is set, the signal during the advantageous section is controlled to the OFF state.
According to this configuration, the advantageous section-related signal is initialized when the advantageous section is ended, so that the advantageous section signal is turned off without individually setting the output buffer of the advantageous section signal to the OFF state. Can be.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the predetermined state (1) indicating the ON state in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section to output the signal during the advantageous section indicating that the control is performed to the advantageous section. In the main process, it is determined whether or not the game is in the advantageous section at the end of the game based on the flag in the advantageous section set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. When it is determined, a predetermined value (1) indicating the ON state is set in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section, and the signal during the advantageous section is output when the predetermined value is set in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section. Configuration.
According to this configuration, each time the game is over, it is determined whether or not the game is in the advantageous section. If it is determined that the game is in the advantageous section, the ON state is set in the output buffer of the signal in the advantageous section. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the signal during the advantageous section from being turned off in spite of the above.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can perform the section display indicating that the control is performed on the advantageous section by controlling the section display LED 19 to the lighting state while controlling the section on the advantageous section. After the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the section display is being performed, when the power supply is started, the section display can be restarted. If the section display is resumed on the main control unit 41 side when the power supply is started after the power supply to the power supply is stopped, it indicates that the state has been returned to the state in which the section display is being performed. The sub display unit 91 is configured to be able to perform the notification while the section display LED is being lit using the liquid crystal display 51. The sub-control unit 91 determines that the section display LED is lit for a certain period after power supply to the slot machine 1 is started. Information It performs a configuration to terminate the section display LED lights in notification after the predetermined time elapses.
According to this configuration, when the state is returned to the state in which the section display is being performed when the power supply is started, the section display LED is lit while the state is being displayed. The clerk can be made to recognize that the section display is being performed. On the other hand, since the notification while the section display LED is lit is ended in a fixed time, the notification while the section display LED is lit is continued after the game store is opened, which may give a sense of incongruity to a player or the like. Can be prevented.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can control the AT to be advantageous to the player in the advantageous section, and by controlling the section display LED 19 to the lighting state when controlling to the advantageous section. It is possible to perform a section display indicating that the section is controlled, and the sub-control unit 91 stops the power supply to the slot machine 1 while the section display is being performed on the main control unit 41 side. After that, when the power supply is started over a specific time outside the business hours of the game store (4 am in this embodiment) and the state returns to the state in which the section display is performed, the section display is performed. While the LED indicating that the section display LED has been turned on is returned using the liquid crystal display 51, the power supply is started without crossing a specific time and the section returns to the state where the section display is performed. If displayed, the section display LE Lighting in a configuration that does not perform the notification.
According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent a player or the like from feeling uncomfortable even if a power interruption occurs temporarily during business hours.

  In the present embodiment, the sub control unit 91 includes an RTC, and can specify the time when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the time when the power supply is started. After the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the section display is being performed on the 41 side, the power supply is performed over a specific time outside the business hours of the game store (4 am in this embodiment). When the main control unit 41 starts and returns to the state in which the section display is being performed, the sub-control unit 91 is configured to perform the notification while the section display LED is lit. When returning to the state where the section display is being performed, the power to the slot machine 1 is determined based on the time when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the time when the power supply is started. What happens when the supply is stopped If the time is within a predetermined time, without interval display LED lights in the broadcast, the elapsed time when it exceeds the predetermined time may be configured to perform a section view LED lights in the broadcast. Even with such a configuration, even if a power interruption occurs temporarily during business hours, it is possible to prevent a player or the like from feeling uncomfortable.

After the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the section display is being performed on the main control unit 41 side, the sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment sets a specific time outside the business hours of the game store (this embodiment In the example, when the power supply is started over 4:00 am and the state returns to the state in which the section display is being performed, the section display LED indicating that the state has been returned to the state in which the section display is being performed is being lit. The notification is performed using the liquid crystal display 51. When the game is started while the notification during the lighting of the section display LED is being performed, the notification during the lighting of the section display LED is ended without waiting for a certain period of time. Configuration.
According to this configuration, it is possible to end the section display LED lighting notification by starting the game even when the predetermined time has not elapsed.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment performs section display indicating that the section is controlled to the advantageous section by controlling the section display LED 19 to the lighting state only in the section of the advantageous section after the start of the AT. After the power supply is stopped in the section before the start of the AT where the operation is not performed, the power supply is started and the state where the section display is not performed can be returned. When the power supply is stopped in the section before the start of the AT where the section display is not performed on the side and the power supply is started and the state returns to the state where the section display is not performed, the section display LED lighting notification is performed. The configuration is not performed.
According to this configuration, it is recognized that the store is opened in the state where the section display is being performed for the store clerk only when the section is controlled to the advantageous section and the state returns to the state where the section display is being performed. Can be done.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment may carry over the winning of the special role after the next game if the special role (BB1, BB2) is won by the internal lottery and the winning special role does not win. It is possible to set any one of a plurality of set values (1 to 6) having different degrees of advantage to the player when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started. It is possible to perform advantageous section related information initialization processing for initializing information about an advantageous section when a setting operation using a setting key switch or an initialization operation using a reset / setting switch is performed. The medal payout rate is set to be appropriate by playing the game in the game state RT1 in which the winning of the role (BB1) is carried over, and the advantageous section related information initialization processing is performed. Then, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, when the setting key switch is turned on, the reset / setting switch is turned on. Also in this case, the advantageous section related information is initialized and the advantageous section and the section display are ended, while the information on the game state is not initialized and RT1 is maintained.
According to this configuration, even when the power supply is started while the setting operation is being performed, or when the power supply is started while the initialization operation is being performed, the advantageous section is ended and the section display is performed. While the game state RT1 is maintained while the game state RT1 is maintained, it is not necessary to perform an operation for setting the game state to RT1 each time the advantageous section and the section display are ended.

The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a main control unit 41 that controls a game, a sub-control unit 91 that controls an effect based on a command transmitted from the main control unit 41, and a reel 2L, The main control unit 41 includes stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are operated to stop the 2C and 2R. The main control unit 41 can transmit an internal winning command that can specify a winning result of the internal lottery. It is a configuration capable of performing a navigation notification for instructing the operation modes of the switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the internal lottery target combination can be performed even when three bets (first bets) are set. Even when two bets (second bet) are set, a multi-bell, a plurality of types of roles including three roles, three bets are set, or two bets are set. Internal, regardless of whether the wager is set If one of the multi-bell and the three-role is won in the selection, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the stop order corresponding to the selected multi-bell and the three-role, the corresponding stop is performed. Reel stop control is performed so as to be more advantageous to the player than when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in a stop order other than the stop order. In the case of winning, it is possible to perform navigation notification for notifying the stopping order corresponding to the winning multi-bell and the three-piece combination, and that the betting number of three (the first betting number) is set or 2 Regardless of whether the number of bets (second bet) is set or not, if the internal lottery wins either the multi-bell or the three-course role, the multi-bell or the three lots will be used in the internal lottery. It is possible to specify that the role has been won, but it will not be possible to specify the type of role that has been won. It is configured to transmit an identifiable internal winning command a group of winning combination is won.
According to this configuration, regardless of whether the three bets (first bet) is set or the two bets (second bet) is set, a large number of bets are set by the internal lottery. If both the bell and the three-piece role are to be drawn, and if any type of role is won, the operation mode that is advantageous to the player will change depending on the type of the winning role, Regardless of whether three bets (first bet) is set or two bets (second bet) are set, multiple bells or three-pieces are played by internal lottery. Although it is possible to specify that the winning combination has been won, an internal winning command that can specify the group of the winning combination is transmitted so that the type of the winning combination cannot be specified. Is set, and even if two bets (second bet) are set, the internal winning command Preferred operating mode for Luo player can be prevented from being identified.

When the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that one of the multi-bell and the three-prize combination has been won in the internal lottery in the advantageous section, the three bets (first bet) are set. In the case of winning, the operation mode (order of stopping the correct answer) corresponding to the type of the multi-bell and the winning combination of three winning combinations can be notified by navigating, and the number of two bets (second bet) is set. In this case, the operation mode (the order of stopping correct answers) corresponding to the type of the multi-bell and the winning combination of three wins is not notified.
According to this configuration, if two bets (the second bet) are set, an operation mode advantageous to the player is not instructed by the navigation notification, so that the three bets (the second bet) are set. The number) can prompt the player to play the game.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets whether the three bets (first bet) is set or the two bets (second bet) is set. When either the multi-bell or the three-role role is won in the internal lottery, it is possible to specify that the multi-bell or the three-role role has been won in the internal lottery, but the type of the winning role cannot be specified. This is a configuration that transmits an internal winning command that can specify the group of the winning combination so that the winning combination can be specified, and that creates and transmits an internal winning command that cannot identify the type of the winning combination by common group information setting processing It is.
According to this configuration, the internal lottery is performed regardless of whether three bets (first bet) are set or two bets (second bet) are set. When the multi-bell or three-prize combination is won, the internal winning command is created by the common group information setting process, so that the program capacity for creating the command can be reduced.

[Effect 4]
The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can execute a main process that is repeatedly executed for each unit of game, and a timer interrupt process that interrupts the main process at regular time intervals and executes the process. It is possible to perform a specific process (process by a game program) and a special process (process by a non-game program) at the time, and set a timer value for one game time management for counting a minimum time of one game in a timer interrupt process. During the execution of the specific process (game program), the timer interrupt process may be executed, and while the timer value for one game time management is updated, the special process (non- During the execution of the game program, the timer interruption process is not executed, and the timer value for one game time management is not updated.
According to this configuration, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed by updating the timer value for one game time management as much as possible, while the time during which the special processing related to the detection of the injustice is performed is one game time. By not updating the management timer value, processing for updating one game time management timer value and special processing are not mixed.

In the main processing, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines whether the timer value for one game time management is a specific value (0) before the start of reel rotation in one game, and If the timer value is determined not to be the specific value (0), the game waits without proceeding until the timer value for one game time management is determined to be the specific value (0), and the one game time management The game is advanced when it is determined that the timer value for use is a specific value (0).
According to this configuration, the game is not advanced until it is specified that the minimum time has elapsed based on the timer value for one game time management, and the game is advanced when the minimum time has elapsed. Minimum time can be secured.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment prohibits the execution of the timer interrupt process when the timer value for one game time management is determined to be the specific value (0) in the main process, and In this configuration, an initial value (a value corresponding to 4.1 seconds) is set in the timer.
According to this configuration, the timer interrupt process is prohibited when setting the initial value in the one game time management timer, so that the one game time is set while the initial value is set in the one game time management timer. It is possible to prevent the management timer value from being updated.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment includes a medal selector 29 having a medal receiving flow path 29b for flowing medals from outside the slot machine 1 and guiding the medals to the inner hopper tank 34a. As a special process (non-game program), a medal sensor process for monitoring the passing status of medals flowing down the medal receiving flow path 29b is executed.
According to this configuration, during the period in which the medal sensor process for monitoring the passing status of the medals flowing down the medal receiving flow path 29b is performed, the timer value for one game time management is not updated, so that one game is performed. The process for updating the timer value for time management and the medal sensor process related to the detection of fraud do not coexist.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets an error code when an abnormality is detected in the medal sensor process, determines whether or not the error code is set in a specific process (game program), and sets the error code. When it is determined that is set, error processing is executed. During the execution of the error processing, timer interrupt processing can be performed, and the timer value for one game time management is updated.
According to this configuration, the timer value for one game time management is updated during the execution of the error processing, so that the elapse of the minimum time is measured even during the error processing, and the error processing is smoothly performed after the end of the error processing. Can play games.

The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment is configured to perform error processing when an error is detected. The error processing is performed by performing a reset operation using the reset switch 23 while power supply to the slot machine 1 is continued. Thus, the power supply can be terminated without interrupting the power supply.
According to this configuration, the game can be smoothly restarted even if the error processing is performed.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can control the special states (BB1, BB2) which are advantageous to the player, and can be provided in the special state with respect to the total accumulated payout number of medals given to the player. The bonus payout ratio, which is the ratio of the total cumulative number of bonuses paid out for the given medals, and the total continuous number of bonuses paid out in the special state with respect to the total cumulative number of medals paid out to the player. A gaming machine information display 50 for displaying a continuous bonus ratio, which is a ratio, is provided as a special process (non-gaming program). The present invention is configured to be able to execute the data processing for the winning ratio monitor for updating the total cumulative number of payables and the total continuous number of payables.
According to this configuration, during the period in which the role ratio monitor data processing for updating the data for calculating the role payout ratio and the continuous role ratio is performed, the timer value for one game time management is not updated. Thus, the processing for updating the timer value for one game time management and the data processing for the duty ratio monitoring relating to the performance display of the gaming machine are not mixed.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the game is being controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2) in the data processing for the duty ratio monitoring. It is determined whether or not a total accumulated payout number counter that counts the total number of medals awarded to the player has reached an upper limit value. If it is determined that the upper limit value has not been reached without performing the process of updating the number of articles paid out and the total cumulative number of consecutive bonus articles, the total number of paid out articles and the total number of consecutive bonus articles are updated. This is a configuration for performing processing.
According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the total cumulative number of paid-out articles and the total cumulative number of consecutive paid-out articles from being updated regardless of the situation in which the total number of medals given to the player cannot be updated.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is capable of performing navigation notification for instructing the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. In addition to the ratio, the total cumulative payout amount of the total cumulative payout amount, which is the total number of medals awarded to the player, the total cumulative continuous payout amount, and the operation mode advantageous to the player is indicated by the navigation notification. It is possible to display an instruction-added duty ratio, which is a ratio of a total instruction-added duty payout number, which is a sum of a payout number with the navigation notification, which is a payout number of medals awarded for the winning ratio, and In the data processing, it is determined whether or not a total cumulative payout number counter that counts the total number of medals awarded to the player has reached an upper limit value, and when it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached, Is cumulative If it is determined that the upper limit value has not been reached without performing the process of updating the number of the designated payouts, it is determined whether the state is controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2) and the state is controlled. If it is determined that the control has been performed, a process of updating the cumulative instruction-incorporated bonus payout number is performed, and if it is determined that the special state is not controlled, an operation mode advantageous to the player is instructed by the navigation notification. It is determined whether or not the operation has been performed, and if it is determined that an operation mode advantageous to the player has been instructed by the navigating notification, a process of updating the total number of payouts including the instructed combination of the important items is performed.
According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the total instructed bonus article payout number from being updated irrespective of the situation in which the total cumulative payout number counter that counts the total number of sheets given to the player cannot be updated.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute, as a special process (non-game program), an operation information signal output process of outputting a stop execution position signal to a test device that tests the slot machine 1. .
According to this configuration, during the operation information signal output process of outputting a test signal to the test device that tests the slot machine 1, the timer value for one game time management is not updated. Thus, the process of updating the timer value for one game time management and the process of outputting the operation information signal related to the test of the slot machine 1 are not mixed.

The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment can perform navigation notification for instructing the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. In the operation information signal output processing, the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed. It is determined whether or not the instructed navigation notification is performed. If it is determined that the navigation notification is performed, a process of outputting a stop execution position signal designating the instructed operation mode is performed. When it is determined that the winning is not performed, a process of outputting a stop execution position signal designating an operation mode corresponding to the winning number with reference to a winning number indicating a winning result of the internal lottery is performed.
According to this configuration, when it is determined that the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is instructed, the process of specifying the winning result of the internal lottery can be omitted, and therefore, the stop execution position signal that specifies the operation mode Can be simplified.

In the timer interrupt process, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment updates a counter updating process for updating a plurality of timer values used in a specific process (game program) including a timer value for one game time management, and a special process (non- And a time monitoring update process for updating a timer value used in a game program).
According to this configuration, the time monitoring update processing for updating the timer value used in the special processing does not mix with the counter update processing for updating the timer value used in the specific processing.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can output a test signal capable of specifying the winning result of the internal lottery to the test device, and determines that one game time management timer value is the specific value (0). In this case, by setting an initial value to the timer value for one game time management, measurement of the minimum time is started, and a test signal is output when the initial value is set to the timer value for one game time management. Configuration.
According to this configuration, since the test signal is output when the initial value is set to the timer value for one game time management, by specifying the time interval at which the test signal is output, the test apparatus can set one time. It is possible to specify whether the minimum time of the game is secured.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to perform a process of outputting a test signal before updating the timer value for one game time management in the timer interrupt process.
According to this configuration, since the update of the timer value for one game time management is started after the output of the test signal is started, the time interval at which the test signal is output is reliably set to be equal to or longer than the minimum time of one game. be able to.

  As described above, the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings. However, the present invention is not limited to the embodiments, and includes changes and additions within a scope not departing from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say.

  In the above embodiment, an example is described in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine in which a bet amount is set using medals and credits as a game value, but a slot in which a bet number is set using a game ball as a game value. The present invention may be applied to a machine or a completely credit-type slot machine that sets a bet amount using only credits as a game value. When a game ball is used as a game value, for example, one medal can be made to correspond to five game balls. When the number of bets is set to 3 in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting a bet amount by using this.

  Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to the use of only one of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls. For example, a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls can be used together. It may be. That is, it is possible to set a bet amount and play a game by using any of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and game balls, and to generate a plurality of types of games such as medals and game balls by generating a prize. A slot machine that can pay out any of the utility values may be applied.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment and the modified examples, the example in which the present invention is applied to the slot machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Is a pachinko game machine that performs a game by firing a game ball into a game area, wherein a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, and a non-game program irrespective of the progress of the game. Is stored in a non-game program area, and a non-game program area is stored in a ROM.

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R Reel 6 MAXBET switch 7 Start switch 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 41 Main controller 91 Sub controller

Claims (1)

A variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each of which can be identified,
In the slot machine capable of deriving a display result by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and generating a prize according to the display result,
Bet number setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of bet numbers including a first bet number or a second bet number by a player's selection;
Game execution means for enabling a game to be executed even when the first bet amount is set and when the second bet amount is set;
Advantageous section control means for controlling to an advantageous section that is advantageous to the player;
In the first process performed at the start of the game, when the advantageous section is the advantageous section, regardless of whether the first bet number is set or the second bet number is set, after the advantageous section starts Advantageous section game number updating means for updating the number of advantageous section games, which is the number of games of
After the number of advantageous section games is updated, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached a specified number of games, and if it is determined that the number of advantageous sections has been reached, the first advantageous section is terminated. Section end means,
In the second processing performed after the display result is derived on the variable display unit, in the case of the advantageous section, regardless of whether the first bet number is set or the second bet number is set, Advantageous section increment updating means for updating an advantageous section increment that is an increment of a game value since the start of the advantageous section;
After the advantageous section increment is updated, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section increment has exceeded a prescribed amount, and if it is determined that the advantageous section increment has exceeded the prescribed amount, a second advantageous section ending means for terminating the advantageous section is provided. ,
Advantageous state control means for controlling to an advantageous state advantageous to the player in the advantageous section;
Advantageous section notification means for performing an advantageous section notification indicating that it is controlled to the advantageous section,
Advantageous section signal output means for outputting a signal during the advantageous section indicating that it is controlled in the advantageous section to the outside,
Advantageous section related information initialization means for initializing the advantageous section related information related to the advantageous section when ending the advantageous section,
With
In the advantageous section notification means, when ending the advantageous section, the advantageous section related information initializing means initializes the advantageous section related information, and the advantageous section signal output means terminates output of the advantageous section signal. A slot machine that ends the advantageous section notification after the completion of the notification.

Images